Owner’s Manual
r
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
r
Owner’s Manual
Thank you and congratulations on your choice of the Roland BK-5 Backing Keyboard.
To ensure that you obtain the maximum enjoyment and take full advantage of the BK-5’s functionality, please read this
owner’s manual carefully.
About this manual
You should first read the chapter “Before you start using the BK-5” on p. 16. It explains how to connect the AC adaptor
and turn on the power. This Owner’s Manual explains everything, from the BK-5’s basic operations to more advanced
functions.
Conventions in this manual
In order to explain the operations as clearly as possible, this manual uses the following conventions:
• Text enclosed in square brackets [ ] indicates the name of a button or knob. Example: the [MENU] button.
• Paragraphs that begin with “NOTE” are cautionary statements that you must read.
• Paragraphs that begin with “MEMO” contain useful information that may come in handy.
• The numbers of pages that you can turn to for additional or related information are given like this: (p. **).
The explanations in this manual include illustrations that depict what should typically be shown by the display. Note,
however, that your unit may incorporate a newer, enhanced version of the system (e.g., include newer sounds), so what
you actually see in the display may not always match what appears in the manual.
Before using this instrument, carefully read “Using the unit safely” on p. 4 and “Important notes” on p. 6. Those sections provide
information concerning the proper operation of the BK-5. Additionally, in order to feel assured that you have gained a good grasp
of every feature provided by your new unit, the manual should be read in its entirety. The manual should be saved and kept on
hand as a convenient reference.
Copyright © 2011 ROLAND EUROPE. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without the written permission of Roland Europe S.p.a.
Roland and GS are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Roland Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Using the unit safely
The
symbol alerts the user to important instructions
Used for instructions intended to alert
or warnings.The specific meaning of the symbol is
determined by the design contained within the
triangle. In the case of the symbol at left, it is used for
general cautions, warnings, or alerts to danger.
the user to the risk of death or severe
injury should the unit be used
improperly.
Used for instructions intended to alert
the user to the risk of injury or material
damage should the unit be used
improperly.
The
symbol alerts the user to items that must never
be carried out (are forbidden). The specific thing that
must not be done is indicated by the design contained
within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it
means that the unit must never be disassembled.
* Material damage refers to damage or
other adverse effects caused with
respect to the home and all its
furnishings, as well to domestic
animals or pets.
The ● symbol alerts the user to things that must be
carried out. The specific thing that must be done is
indicated by the design contained within the circle. In
the case of the symbol at left, it means that the power-
cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet.
• Do not open (or modify in any way) the unit or its AC
adaptor.
• This unit, in combination with an amplifier and head-
phones or speakers, may be capable of producing sound
levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. Do not
operate for a long period of time at a high volume level, or at a
level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or
ringing in the ears, you should immediately stop using the unit,
and consult an audiologist.
.................................................................................................
• Do not attempt to repair the unit, or replace parts within
it (except when this manual provides specific instructions
directing you to do so). Refer all servicing to your retailer,
the nearest Roland Service Center, or an authorized Roland dis-
tributor, as listed on the “Information” page.
.................................................................................................
• Never install the unit in any of the following locations.
................................................................................................
• Never allow foreign objects (e.g., flammable material,
coins, pins) or liquids (e.g., water or juice) to enter this
unit. Doing so may cause short circuits, faulty operation,
or other malfunctions.
• Subject to temperature extremes (e.g., direct sunlight
in an enclosed vehicle, near a heating duct, on top of
heat-generating equipment); or are
................................................................................................
• Immediately turn the power off, remove the AC adaptor
from the outlet, and request servicing by your retailer,
the nearest Roland Service Center, or an authorized
Roland distributor, as listed on the “Information” page
when:
• Damp (e.g., baths, washrooms, on wet floors); or are
• Exposed to steam or smoke; or are
• Subject to salt exposure; or are
• Humid; or are
• Exposed to rain; or are
• The AC adaptor, the power-supply cord, or the plug has been
damaged; or
• Dusty or sandy; or are
• If smoke or unusual odor occurs
• Subject to high levels of vibration and shakiness.
• Objects have fallen into, or liquid has been spilled onto the unit;
or
.................................................................................................
• Make sure you always have the unit placed so it is level
and sure to remain stable. Never place it on stands that
could wobble, or on inclined surfaces.
• The unit has been exposed to rain (or otherwise has become
wet); or
.................................................................................................
• The unit does not appear to operate normally or exhibits a
marked change in performance.
................................................................................................
• In households with small children, an adult should pro-
vide supervision until the child is capable of following all
the rules essential for the safe operation of the unit.
................................................................................................
• Protect the unit from strong impact.
(Do not drop it!)
• Be sure to use only the AC adaptor supplied with the
unit. Also, make sure the line voltage at the installation
matches the input voltage specified on the AC adaptor's
body. Other AC adaptors may use a different polarity, or
be designed for a different voltage, so their use could result in
damage, malfunction, or electric shock.
.................................................................................................
• Use only the supplied power-supply cord. Also, the sup-
plied power cord must not be used with any other device.
................................................................................................
.................................................................................................
• Do not excessively twist or bend the power cord, nor
place heavy objects on it. Doing so can damage the cord,
producing severed elements and short circuits. Damaged
cords are fire and shock hazards!
.................................................................................................
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
r
Using the unit safely
• Do not force the unit's power-supply cord to share an
outlet with an unreasonable number of other devices. Be
especially careful when using extension cords—the total
power used by all devices you have connected to the extension
cord's outlet must never exceed the power rating (watts/amperes)
for the extension cord. Excessive loads can cause the insulation on
the cord to heat up and eventually melt through.
.................................................................................................
• Before using the unit in a foreign country, consult with
your retailer, the nearest Roland Service Center, or an
authorized Roland distributor, as listed on the “Informa-
tion” page.
.................................................................................................
• Do NOT play a CD-ROM disc on a conventional audio CD
player. The resulting sound may be of a level that could
cause permanent hearing loss. Damage to speakers or
other system components may result..
• The unit and the AC adaptor should be located so their
location or position does not interfere with their proper
ventilation.
.................................................................................................
• Always grasp only the plug on the AC adaptor cord when
plugging into, or unplugging from, an outlet or this unit.
.................................................................................................
• At regular intervals, you should unplug the AC adaptor
and clean it by using a dry cloth to wipe all dust and
other accumulations away from its prongs. Also, discon-
nect the power plug from the power outlet whenever the
unit is to remain unused for an extended period of time.
Any accumulation of dust between the power plug and the power
outlet can result in poor insulation and lead to fire.
.................................................................................................
• Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming entan-
gled. Also, all cords and cables should be placed so they
are out of the reach of children.
.................................................................................................
• Never climb on top of, nor place heavy objects on the
unit.
.................................................................................................
• Never handle the AC adaptor or its plugs with wet hands
when plugging into, or unplugging from, an outlet or
this unit.
.................................................................................................
• Before moving the unit, disconnect the AC adaptor and
all cords coming from external devices.
.................................................................................................
• Before cleaning the unit, turn off the power and unplug
the AC adaptor from the outlet (see p. 20).
.................................................................................................
• Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning in your
area, disconnect the AC adaptor from the outlet.
.................................................................................................
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Important notes
1. Important notes
In addition to the items listed under “Using the unit safely” on p. 4, please read and observe the following:
Power supply
Additional precautions
• Do not connect this unit to same electrical outlet that is being
used by an electrical appliance that is controlled by an inverter
(such as a refrigerator, washing machine, microwave oven, or air
conditioner), or that contains a motor. Depending on the way in
which the electrical appliance is used, power supply noise may
cause this unit to malfunction or may produce audible noise. If it is
not practical to use a separate electrical outlet, connect a power
supply noise filter between this unit and the electrical outlet.
• Unfortunately, it may be impossible to restore the contents of data
that was stored on a USB memory once it has been lost. Roland
Corporation assumes no liability concerning such loss of data.
• Use a reasonable amount of care when using the BK-5’s buttons,
other controls and jacks/connectors. Rough handling can lead to
malfunctions.
• Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display.
• When connecting/disconnecting cables, grasp the connector
itself—never pull on the cable. This way you will avoid causing
shorts, or damage to the cable’s internal elements.
• The AC adaptor will begin to generate heat after long hours of
consecutive use. This is normal, and is not a cause for concern.
• Before connecting this unit to other devices, turn off the power to
all units. This will help prevent malfunctions and/or damage to
speakers or other devices.
• To avoid disturbing your neighbors, try to keep the BK-5’s volume
at reasonable levels. You may prefer to use headphones, so you do
not need to be concerned about those around you (especially late
at night).
Placement
• When you need to transport the unit, package it in the box
(including padding) that it came in, if possible. Otherwise, you will
need to use equivalent packaging materials.
• Using the BK-5 near power amplifiers (or other equipment con-
taining large power transformers) may induce hum. To alleviate
the problem, change the orientation of this instrument or move it
further away from the source of interference.
• Do not apply undue force to the music stand while it is in use.
• Use only the specified expression pedal (Roland EV-series, sold
separately) or pedal switch (Roland DP-series, BOSS FS-5U). By
connecting any other expression pedal or footswitch, you risk
causing malfunction and/or damage the unit.
• This device may interfere with radio and television reception. Do
not use it in the vicinity of such receivers.
• Noise may be produced if wireless communications devices, such
as cell phones, are operated in the vicinity of this unit. Such noise
could occur when receiving or initiating a call, or while conversing.
Should you experience such problems, you should relocate such
wireless devices so they are at a greater distance from this unit, or
switch them off.
• Some connection cables contain resistors. Do not use cables that
incorporate resistors for connecting to this unit. The use of such
cables can cause the sound level to be extremely low, or impossible
to hear. For information on cable specifications, contact the man-
ufacturer of the cable.
• Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight, place it near devices that
radiate heat, leave it inside an enclosed vehicle, or otherwise sub-
ject it to temperature extremes. Excessive heat can deform or dis-
color the unit.
Storage devices that can be connected to the
BK-5’s USB MEMORY port
• The BK-5 allows you to connect commercially available USB Flash
memory. You can purchase such devices at a computer store, a
digital camera dealer, etc.
• When moved from one location to another where the temperature
and/or humidity is very different, water droplets (condensation)
may form inside the BK-5. Damage or malfunction may result if
you attempt to use the unit in this condition. Therefore, before
using the unit, you must allow it to stand for several hours, until
the condensation has completely evaporated.
• Though external hard disks with a capacity in excess of 2TB can be
used, please bear in mind that the BK-5 can manage a maximum
of 2TB. (FAT-32 formatted storage devices can be used right away.)
• Use USB memory sold by Roland (M-UF-series). We cannot guar-
antee operation if any other USB memory is used.
• Do not allow objects to remain on top of the keyboard. This can be
the cause of malfunction, such as keys ceasing to produce sound.
• Depending on the material and temperature of the surface on
which you place the unit, its rubber feet may discolor or mar the
surface.
You can place a piece of felt or cloth under the rubber feet to pre-
vent this from happening. If you do so, please make sure that the
unit will not slip or move accidentally.
Before using external USB storage devices
• Carefully insert the USB memory all the way in until it is firmly in
place.
• Never touch the terminals of USB memories. Also, avoid getting
the terminals dirty.
• Do not put anything that contains water (e.g. flower vases) on the
BK-5. Also, avoid the use of insecticides, perfumes, alcohol, nail
polish, spray cans, etc., near the unit. Swiftly wipe away any liquid
that spills on the unit using a dry, soft cloth.
• USB memories are constructed using precision components; han-
dle the storage devices carefully, paying particular note to the fol-
lowing.
• To prevent damage from static electrical charges, discharge any
static electricity that might be present in your body before han-
dling a USB memory.
Maintenance
• For everyday cleaning wipe the unit with a soft, dry cloth or one
that has been slightly dampened with water. To remove stubborn
dirt, use a cloth impregnated with a mild, nonabrasive detergent.
Afterwards, be sure to wipe the unit thoroughly with a soft, dry
cloth.
• Do not touch the terminals with your fingers or any metal
object.
• Do not bend or drop a USB memory, or subject it to strong
impact.
• Do not leave a USB memory in direct sunlight or in locations
such as a closed-up automobile.
• Never use benzene, thinner, alcohol or solvents of any kind, to
avoid the possibility of discoloration and/or deformation.
• Do not allow a USB memory to become wet.
• Do not disassemble or modify your external USB memories.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
r
Important notes
• When connecting a USB memory, position it horizontally with the
BK-5’s USB MEMORY port and insert it without using excessive
force. The USB MEMORY port may be damaged if you use excessive
force when inserting a USB memory.
• Do not insert anything other than a USB memory (e.g., wire, coins,
other types of device) into the USB MEMORY port. Doing so will
damage the BK-5’s USB MEMORY port.
• Never connect your USB memory to the BK-5 via a USB hub.
• Do not connect or disconnect a USB drive while it is being read
from, or written to (i.e., while the USB flash access indicator
blinks).
Handling CDs
• Avoid touching or scratching the shiny underside (encoded sur-
face) of the disc. Damaged or dirty CD discs may not be read prop-
erly. Keep your discs clean using a commercially available CD
cleaner.
Liability and copyright
• Recording, duplication, distribution, sale, lease, performance, or
broadcast of copyrighted material (musical works, visual works,
broadcasts, live performances, etc.) belonging to a third party in
part or in whole without the permission of the copyright owner is
forbidden by law.
• Do not use this unit for purposes that could infringe on a copy-
right held by a third party. Roland assumes no responsibility what-
soever with regard to any infringements of third-party copyrights
arising through your use of this unit.
About audio files
• Audio files in the following formats can be played back:
• WAV format
• 16-bit linear
• Sampling rate of 44.1kHz
• Stereo/mono
• mp3 files:
• MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3
• Sampling frequency: 8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48kHz
• Bit rate: 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/
320kbps, VBR (variable bit rate)
Supported Standard MIDI Files
• Format 0/1
• Company names and product names mentioned in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
• MPEG Layer-3 audio compression technology is licensed from Fraunhofer IIS Corporation and THOMSON Multimedia Corporation.
• Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
• Copyright © 2003 by Bitstream, Inc. All rights reserved. Bitstream Vera is a trademark of Bitstream, Inc.
• MMP (Moore Microprocessor Portfolio) refers to a patent portfolio concerned with microprocessor architecture, which was developed by Technol-
ogy Properties Limited (TPL). Roland has licensed this technology from the TPL group.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Features
2. Features
The BK-5 is a professional keyboard designed to provide everything the entertaining artist and serious amateur musician
needs on stage, in the studio, or at home.
All-in-one arranger instrument
Performance List function
The BK-5 is a superb instrument that uses Roland’s
latest technology for professional-grade sounds and
128 notes of polyphony.
This function allows you to save nearly all of the
BK-5’s settings for each song and/or rhythm you will
be using during your performances. The list that con-
tains these settings can be saved to a USB memory
and loaded from there whenever the need arises.
High-quality rhythms
Your BK-5 comes loaded with over 300 stunning
accompaniments (“rhythms”) that cover a variety of
musical genres for various geographic areas (includ-
ing Eastern Europe, Latin-America and Asia). Each
rhythm comprises 4 intros, 4 main accompaniments,
4 endings, 3 “Up” and 3 “Down” fill-ins.
Possibility to create new rhythms and to edit
existing ones
The Rhythm Composer function allows you to create
new rhythms and to edit (i.e. change) existing ones,
and then save them as “User Rhythms” to a USB
memory.
Four suitable settings for each rhythm
(One Touch)
For each rhythm, the Roland team has prepared four
sets of suitable tones, effects and other settings that
can be loaded for the realtime parts (One Touch
function).
Multi-effects for rhythms or Standard MIDI files
and real-time parts
With a view to obtaining the highest possible sound
quality, the BK-5 contains two dedicated multi-
effects processors (MFX A and B) for the Standard
MIDI Files and rhythms you play back. In addition,
there is one MFX processor for the real-time parts
(Upper 1, Upper 2, Lower).
USB-based Standard MIDI Files and rhythm
player
The BK-5 plays Standard MIDI Files and rhythms
directly from a connected USB memory.
Composite Video Out
The BK-5’s VIDEO OUTPUT socket can be connected to
an external screen, allowing your audience or fellow
musicians to follow the lyrics and chord symbols
(only SMF files) of the songs you perform.
USB-based audio player and audio recorder
The BK-5 contains an audio player function that
allows you to play back mp3 and WAV files directly
from a connected USB memory.
You can also view digital pictures in the .jpg format
you took yourself.
The BK-5 also allows you to record your perfor-
mances. The resulting WAV files (audio) can be played
back on the BK-5 itself.
16 NTA parts (Note-to-Arranger)
The BK-5 provides up to 16 MIDI parts dedicated to
Arranger control via MIDI (“Note-to-Arranger”).
Three real-time parts
The BK-5 comes with three MIDI parts (Upper 1,
Upper 2, Lower) that can be played in real time.
16 Song parts
The BK-5 also provides 16 Song parts, which are used
for Standard MIDI File playback but can also be con-
trolled via MIDI (a computer connected to the MIDI
IN socket or the COMPUTER USB port). This allows
you to use the BK-5 as a 16-part multitimbral MIDI
tone generator.
Song and Rhythm Makeup Tools for Standard
MIDI Files and rhythms
These tools allow you to modify songs in no time
without knowing the MIDI commands normally used
to perform such changes.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
r
Rename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Using the ‘Search’ function to locate songs, rhythms
Front panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
If the computer doesn’t ‘see’ the BK-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Changing the octave. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Setting the volume of the real-time parts . . . . . . . . 43
Performance/Music Assistant/Factory Songs info . . 45
Loading a Performance/‘Music Assistant’/‘Factory
Using the [UP2] or [LWR] button to select Tones . . . . . .24
Checking a Tone’s or rhythm’s MIDI address . . . . . . . . . .26
Selecting rhythms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Playing back rhythms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Saving your recording as an audio file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
General procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Internal Lyrics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
External Lyrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
File types the BK-5 can read and play back . . . . . . . . . . .34
Selecting a song or rhythm on a USB memory. . . . . 34
Playing back a song or rhythm from a USB memory35
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Freeze Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
22. MIDI Implementation Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
23. Chord Intelligence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Factory Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Selecting clips and banks on an optional MIDI Visual
Rhythm division program change numbers. . . . . . . . . .118
E-Series compatibility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Recalling a Performance memory from the loaded
Performance List via MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
r
Panel description
3. Panel description
Front panel
D
E
F
G
C
H
I
J K
L
M N
O
A
B
A
Pitch Bend/Modulation lever
Pressing and holding this button locks the current
tempo setting (see p. 54).
You can raise or lower the pitch by moving this lever
to the left or right. Push the lever away from yourself
to apply modulation (normally vibrato) to the sound.
F
TEMPO buttons
These buttons can be used to decrease or increase the
tempo of the currently selected rhythm or song.
Pressing them together recalls the rhythm’s or song’s
stored tempo value.
B
C
PHONES 1 & 2 sockets
This is where you can connect one or two pairs of
optional headphones (Roland RH-series). Doing so
switches off the internal speakers.
NOTE
VOLUME knob
You can also use the [TAP TEMPO] button E to set the
desired tempo.
Use this knob to set the BK-5’s global output volume
(all signals transmitted to the speakers and OUTPUT
sockets). The setting of this knob also determines the
volume in the headphones you may connect.
G
H
SYNC START button
This button is used to activate or switch off the
rhythm playback can be started or stopped by simply
playing a note or chord on the keyboard. See also
page 27.
D
E
RHYTHM FAMILY buttons
These buttons are used to select the family of the
next rhythm you want to use. Pressing one of these
selected family.
While a song file is selected, this button stops play-
back.
Pressing and holding this button locks the currently
selected rhythm (see p. 54).
BALANCE buttons
These buttons allow you to set the balance between
the rhythms and songs (BACKING) and the real-time
parts (PART).
TAP TEMPO button
Pressing this button several times allows you to
change the current rhythm’s or song’s tempo to the
value calculated from the speed at which the button
is pressed.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Panel description
I
AUDIO REC button
M
INTRO button
This button is used to start audio recording of your
BK-5 transmits to its OUTPUT sockets (audio signals
you control). See page 52.
When you activate this button, rhythm playback
starts with a musical introduction whose complexity
depends on which VARIATION button currently lights
(there are four different introductions per rhythm).
After selecting a song file, this button allows you to
rewind.
This button is also used to select the Rhythm Com-
NOTE
J
K
BASS INV button
This button is used to switch the Bass Inversion func-
tion on and off (page 29).
You can also press this button during rhythm playback.
N
O
ENDING button
When you activate this button, rhythm playback
stops with a musical ending whose complexity
depends on which VARIATION button currently lights
(there are four different ending phrases per rhythm).
AUTO FILL IN button
This button is used to activate the Auto Fill-In func-
tion, which causes a transition to be played before
selecting the new rhythm variation (which is selected
with the VARIATION buttons).
After selecting a song file, this button allows you to
fast-forward.
L
VARIATION 1/2/3/4 buttons
START/STOP button
These buttons are used to select a rhythm “Variation”,
i.e. a simpler or more complex arrangement of the
selected rhythm.
This button allows you to start and stop rhythm play-
back. If you select a song, it starts and temporarily
Q
V
W
e
R
S T
b
U
X
c d
a
Y
Z
P
f
P
Q
R
Display
S
T
PERFORMANCE LIST button
This button calls up the Performance List (page 45).
This display shows information related to your opera-
tion.
PERFORMANCE WRITE button
CURSOR/VALUE dial
This dial can be used to move the cursor in the dis-
play, to select parameters and to set values.
The main function of this button is to save Perfor-
mance settings. Depending on the selected display
page, it can also be used to save rhythms and songs.
ENTER/SELECT button
U
KEY button
Press this button to confirm your selection or dese-
lection of the display item where the cursor is.
This button calls up the BK-5’s transposition func-
tion. Its settings can be applied to rhythms, Songs
and the 3 real-time parts (UP1, UP2, LWR).
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5 rFront panel
If the button’s indicator doesn’t light, the rhythm,
pitch.
MELODY INTELL button
This buttons is used to add an automatic counter-
melody (second or third voice) to your solos or melo-
dies. Pressing and holding it calls up a display page
where you can view the “Melody Intelligent” parame-
ter.
Pressing and holding this button locks the key (see
p. 54).
V
TRACK MUTE/CENTER CANCEL button
e
f
NUMERIC button
Press this button if you want to use the TONE buttons
f to enter numeric values (see p. 25).
This button lets you mute the accompaniment parts
of the selected rhythm, so that only the bass and
drum parts are played back. It also lets you mute the
melody part of the selected MIDI File, or attenuate
the vocal part at the center of an audio file (WAV or
mp3), allowing you to sing or play that part yourself.
tons)
(page 24).
Pressing and holding this button calls up a display
page where you can select the Standard MIDI File or
rhythm part(s) that you don’t want to hear.
so, first activate the NUMERIC button e.
W
X
USB MEMORY button
Pressing and holding any of these buttons locks the
Tone (page 54).
Press this button to call up a list of the files stored on
the USB memory connected to the BK-5‘s USB MEM-
ORY port.
USB MEMORY port
Connect an optional USB memory here.
Note: Roland does not recommend using USB hubs, irre-
spective of whether they are active or passive. Please con-
nect only one USB memory to this port.
NOTE
Use USB memory sold by Roland. We cannot guarantee
operation if any another USB memory is used.
Y
MENU button
This button allows you to open the BK-5’s menu page
where you can view and select all available functions.
Press it together with the [EXIT] button to listen to
the BK-5’s demo songs.
Z
a
EXIT button
This button is used to return to a higher menu level.
Press and hold it to return to the BK-5’s main display
page.
SPLIT button
This button is used to activate Split mode. While its
an keyboard trigger the LWR part. Notes to the right
of the split point, on the other hand, trigger the UP1
and UP2 parts. See “Using Split mode” on p. 43.
b
c
PART LWR and UP2 buttons
These buttons are used to switch the real-time parts
(Lower and Upper2) on and off.
NOTE
The Upper1 part (UP1) is always active and cannot be
switched off.
ONE TOUCH button
This button is used to enable the recall of One Touch
memories. Pressing and holding it calls up a display
page where you can edit and save One Touch memo-
ries.
NOTE
Use the TONE buttons [1]~[4] to select or deselect a One
Touch memory (see p. 31).
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Panel description
Rear panel
A
B
C
D E F
G
H I
A
B
USB COMPUTER port
Use a USB cable to connect the BK-5 to your com-
puter via this connector (page 17).
E
F
PEDAL HOLD socket
An optional Roland DP-series or BOSS FS-5U foot-
switch connected to this socket can be used to hold
the notes of the real-time parts. (The MELODY INTELL
part can also be sustained in this way.) This function
is also referred to as “sustain” or “damper”.
AUDIO INPUT (STEREO) mini jack
This mini jack allows you to connect the audio out-
puts of an external signal source (CD/mp3 player,
synthesizer, etc.).
PEDAL SWITCH/EXPRESSION socket
DP-series), a separately available foot switch (BOSS
FS-5U) or a separately available expression pedal
C
AUDIO OUTPUT R & L/MONO sockets
These sockets transmit all audio signals the BK-5
generates as well as the signals you input to the
BK-5.
G
H
MIDI IN & OUT sockets
(page 17).
NOTE
If you can/want to use only one channel on your external
amplifier, connect the L/MONO socket to its input. For opti-
mum sound quality, we recommend working in stereo,
though.
POWER switch
Turns the power on/off (page 20).
With the factory settings, the BK-5’s power will auto-
matically be switched off 30 minutes after you stop
playing or operating the BK-5.
D
VIDEO OUTPUT socket
Connect this socket to the appropriate input of your
TV or external display.
If the BK-5’s power has been turned off automati-
BK-5 back on. If you don’t want the power to turn off
automatically, set the “Auto Off” parameter to “OFF”
NOTE
The signal format (PAL or NTSC) and aspect ratio are select-
able (page 67).
I
DC IN socket
Connect the supplied PSB-7U AC adapter here
(page 16).
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5 Srhortcut list
4. Shortcut list
Pressing and holding the following buttons (or button combinations) allows you to directly jump to a related parameter
page, which is faster than selecting the page in question via the BK-5’s menu. Some of these buttons activate a lock func-
tion (page 54).
Press and hold
Function
Locks the rhythm to keep it from changing when you select another Per-
formance memory.
RHYTHM FAMILY buttons
Locks the tempo setting to keep it from changing when you select
another Performance memory.
After activating record standby mode (the indicator flashes), pressing and
holding this button will cancel that mode (use it if you don’t want to
record after all).
Locks the key setting to keep it from changing when you select another
Performance memory.
Opens the “Rhythm Track Mute” or “Song Track Mute” page.
Opens the display page that shows which Tone is currently selected for
the Lower part.
Opens the display page that shows which Tone is currently selected for
the Upper2 part.
Simultaneously pressing the [LWR] and [UP2] buttons (without holding
them) opens the display page where you can set the volume of the
Upper1, Upper2 and Lower parts.
Opens the “One Touch Edit” page.
Opens the “Melody Intelligence” page.
In some cases, this opens the “Help” page.
Locks the Tone to keep it from changing when you select another Perfor-
mance memory.
TONE buttons
Opens the “Split” page.
Pressing and holding this button takes you back to the main page, no
matter where you currently are.
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Before you start using the BK-5
5. Before you start using the BK-5
Connecting the AC adaptor
Connecting the BK-5 to an
1. Turn the [VOLUME] knob all the way to the
amplifier, mixer, etc.
left to minimize the volume.
2. Connect the included power cord to the AC
adapter.
The BK-5 contains speakers and therefore doesn’t need
to be connected to an external amplifier.
You can, however, connect the BK-5’s OUTPUT sockets
to an external amplifier (Roland KC-series) or the audio
inputs of an external instrument (digital piano, etc.).
The indicator will light once you plug the AC adaptor
into a wall outlet.
AC adapter
Power cord
NOTE
to an AC outlet
connections.
Indicator
Place the AC adapter so the side with the indicator
(see illustration) faces upwards and the side with tex-
tual information faces downwards.
1. Turn the [VOLUME] knob all the way to the
left to minimize the volume.
2. Switch off all devices.
3. Connect the BK-5’s OUTPUT jacks to the
NOTE
Depending on your region, the included power cord may
differ from the one shown above.
inputs of your external device.
Connecting the BK-5 to an amplifier
3. Connect the AC adaptor to the BK-5’s DC IN
jack.
BK-5’s rear panel
INPUT L + R
4. Plug the power cord into a power outlet.
The indicator will light once you plug the AC adaptor
into a wall outlet
OUTPUT R +
L/MONO
NOTE
Be sure to use only the AC adaptor supplied with the unit
(PSB-7U). Also, make sure the line voltage at the installa-
tion matches the input voltage specified on the AC
adapter’s body. Other AC adapters may use a different
polarity, or be designed for a different voltage, so their use
could result in damage, malfunction, or electric shock.
For the connection to an amplifier, please choose
unbalanced (mono) cables with 1/4” plugs at one end
(for the BK-5). The connectors at the other end need
to match the input sockets of the device to which
you are connecting the BK-5.
NOTE
NOTE
When connection cables with resistors are used, the vol-
ume level of equipment connected to the audio inputs may
be low. If this happens, use connection cables that do not
contain resistors.
If you won’t be using the BK-5 for an extended period of
time, disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet.
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
r
Connecting a MIDI device
Connecting a MIDI device
Connecting the BK-5 to your
The BK-5 can transmit and receive performance data
when connected to an external MIDI device, which
enables the two devices to control each other’s perfor-
mance. For example, one device can play or switch
sounds on the other device:
computer
If you use a USB cable (commercially available) to con-
nect the COMPUTER port located on the BK-5’s rear
panel to the USB port of your computer, you’ll be able to
do the following things.
MIDI stands for “Musical Instrument Digital Interface.” It
is a universal standard for exchanging musical perfor-
mance data among electronic musical instruments and
computers.
• Use the BK-5 as a sound module.
• By transferring MIDI data between the BK-5 and your
sequencer software, you’ll be able to enjoy a wide
range of possibilities for music production and edit-
ing.
The BK-5’s MIDI connectors allow it to transmit perfor-
mance data to, and receive such data from other
devices. You can use the BK-5 in a wide range of ways
by connecting external devices to these connectors.
1. Use a standard USB cable (A‰B-type con-
nectors, commercially available) to connect
the BK-5 to your computer as shown below.
■ Connection example
Before making connections with other devices, you
must turn down the volume of all devices and turn
off the power to avoid malfunctions or speaker dam-
age.
Playing the BK-5’s sounds from your MIDI sequencer
USB cable
Computer
USB port
BK-5
MIDI sound module/
sequencer
2. Refer to the Roland website for system
requirements.
Using the BK-5 to play your MIDI sound module
Roland website: http://www.roland.com/
As an alternative, you can connect the BK-5’s MIDI
OUT and MIDI IN sockets to a MIDI interface and con-
nect the latter to your computer.
NOTE
Certain instruments, like an FR-3x V-Accordion, only have
one MIDI socket whose function (IN or OUT) needs to be set
with one of its MIDI parameters. To control the BK-5 from
such an instrument, you need to set the latter to transmit
MIDI messages (OUT).
If the computer doesn’t ‘see’ the BK-5
Normally, you don’t need to install a driver in order to
connect the BK-5 to your computer. However, if some
problem occurs, or if the performance is poor, using the
Roland original driver may solve the problem.
■ MIDI channels
MIDI provides sixteen channels, numbered 1~16.
Even if two MIDI devices are connected, you won’t be
able to select or play sounds on the other device
For details on downloading and installing the Roland
http://www.roland.com/
unless both devices are set to the same MIDI channel.
Specify the USB driver you want to use, and then install
the driver. For details, refer to “USB Driver” on p. 69.
The BK-5 is capable of receiving on all channels, 1~
16.
■ Caution
• To avoid the risk of malfunction and/or damage to
external speakers, always turn the volume all the way
down and switch off the power on all devices before
you make any connections.
• Only MIDI data can be transmitted and received via
USB. Audio data for a song recorded on the BK-5
cannot be transmitted or received.
• Switch on the power to the BK-5 before you start up
the MIDI application on your computer. Never turn
the BK-5’s power on/off while your MIDI application
is running.
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Before you start using the BK-5
Connecting a television set
Connecting an optional footswitch,
hold pedal or expression pedal
■ Footswitch or expression pedal, hold pedal
The BK-5 provides a PEDAL SWITCH/EXPRESSION jack
to which you can connect an optional footswitch
(Roland DP-series or BOSS FS-5U) or an expression
pedal (Roland EV-series).
Video cable
(Commercially available)
BK-5 rear panel
Television
VIDEO OUTPUT
Optional footswitch
(Roland DP-series,
BOSS FS-5U)
NOTE
Before you make connections to other devices, you must
turn down the volume of all devices and turn off their
power to prevent malfunctions or damage to your speak-
ers.
1. Switch off the BK-5 and the television set
you’ll be connecting.
Use a video cable (commercially available) to connect
the BK-5’s VIDEO OUTPUT jack to the television set.
Optional footswitch
(Roland DP-series, BOSS
FS-5U)
3. Switch on the BK-5 (see p. 20).
4. Switch on your television set.
—or—
(Roland EV-series)
5. (As necessary) Specify the television output
If you connect a footswitch, you can select the func-
tion it should perform (page 69). By default, the foot-
switch will control the “Start/Stop” function.
format (see p. 67).
6. Specify the aspect ratio for your television
set.
The BK-5 also provide a HOLD socket to which you
can connect a damper pedal or footswitch (Roland
DP-series or BOSS FS-5U) that allows you to hold
The aspect ratio is the proportional relationship
between the width and height of the screen. See
page 67.
Use only the specified expression pedal (Roland EV-series,
FS-5U). By connecting any other expression pedal or foot-
switch, you risk causing malfunction and/or damage the
unit.
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
r
Connecting a portable audio player
• Use headphones fitted with a stereo 1/4” phone plug.
Connecting a portable audio player
You can connect a portable audio player or any other
line-level source to the AUDIO INPUT (STEREO) socket.
Installing the music rest
1. Install the music rest as shown in the illus-
tration.
The input level of the audio source you connect can be
set with the “Audio In Level” parameter on the MENU‰
Global‰ Utility page (page 68).
AUDIO
OUT
You can also attenuate the vocal or solo part at the cen-
ter of the stereo image of the audio signals being
received. See “Audio In Center Canc” on p. 68.
NOTE
When moving the BK-5, be sure to remove the music rest
as a safety precaution.
NOTE
Listening through headphones
Do not apply excessive force to the music rest.
You can use headphones to enjoy the BK-5 without dis-
turbing those around you, such as at night.
NOTE
The music rest is not designed to accept the placement of
laptops or other heavy objects.
1. Plug the headphones into the PHONES 1 or
2 socket located on the left side of the
BK-5’s front panel.
Doing so switches off the BK-5’s speakers.
2. Use the BK-5’s [VOLUME] knob to adjust the
headphone volume.
■ Cautions when using headphones
• To prevent damage to the cord’s internal conductors,
avoid rough handling. When using headphones,
mainly try to handle either the plug or the headset.
• Your headphones may be damaged if the volume of a
device is already turned up when you plug them in.
Minimize the volume before you plug in the head-
phones.
• Excessive input will not only damage your hearing,
but may also strain the headphones. Please enjoy
music at a reasonable volume.
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Before you start using the BK-5
4. Use the [VOLUME] knob to adjust the vol-
ume.
Turning the power on/off
Once the connections have been completed, turn on the
power to your various devices in the order specified. By
turning on devices in the wrong order, you risk causing
malfunction and/or damage to speakers and other
devices.
Turning the power off
1. Turn the [VOLUME] knob all the way to the
left to minimize the volume.
NOTE
Never switch off the BK-5 while playback or recording is
running or while data are being read from, or written to, an
external USB memory.
1. Turn the [VOLUME] knob all the way to the
left to minimize the volume.
2. Switch off your external amplification sys-
tem if you are using one.
3. Press the BK-5’s [POWER] switch.
The display will go dark and the power will turn off.
NOTE
NOTE
Before turning the BK-5 on/off, always be sure to turn the
volume down. Even with the volume turned down, you
might hear some sound when switching the BK-5 on/off.
However, this is normal and does not indicate a malfunc-
tion.
the [POWER] switch, then unplug the power cord from the
power outlet. Refer to “Connecting the AC adaptor” on
p. 16.
2. Press the [POWER] switch to turn on the
power.
Energy saving function
NOTE
The BK-5 has an Auto Off function, which auto-
matically switches off the power after a certain
amount of time has passed without any buttons
being operated.
Shortly before the BK-5 shuts down automatically,
the display starts counting down the seconds. If you
want to keep using the BK-5 at this stage, press any
button.
You can also disable the “Auto Off” function. For
more about the Auto Off function, refer to p. 69.
When the BK-5 is turned off by the “Auto Off” func-
tion, the [POWER] button’s position doesn’t change,
which means that you need to press it once, wait a
few seconds, then press it again to switch the BK-5
back on.
The power will turn on, an opening message will
appear in the BK-5’s screen, and then the main page
will appear.
After a brief interval, the BK-5 will be ready to pro-
duce sound.
NOTE
This unit is equipped with a protection circuit. A brief inter-
unit will operate normally.
3. Switch on your amplification system or con-
nect a pair of headphones (see p. 19).
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BDKe-m5orof the BK-5
Demo of the BK-5
Your BK-5 contains a demo that introduces all of its
highlights. It might be a good idea to try it out now. The
demo is self-explanatory, so we’ll just show you how to
start and stop it.
NOTE
You will need to connect an external display to take advantage
of the BK-5’s demo function. See “Connecting a television set”
on p. 18.
1. Simultaneously press the [MENU] and [EXIT]
buttons.
The BK-5 plays back a song and the external display
introduces the BK-5’s features.
2. Press the [EXIT] button to leave the demo
function.
NOTE
No data for the music that is played back will be output
from MIDI OUT.
NOTE
All rights reserved. Unauthorized use of this material for
purposes other than private, personal enjoyment is a viola-
tion of applicable laws.
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Basic operation of the BK-5
6. Basic operation of the BK-5
The setting field of the selected parameter is dis-
played in reverse.
About the display and cursor
operation
This section introduces the information that appears on
the main page in the BK-5’s display and how to navi-
gate the menu.
Main page
Current measure or
remaining time
Tempo setting or time
stretching
Time signature
Current “Key”
setting
Selected file type:
Rhythm, .SMF,
.WAV, .mp3
In our example, we want to assign a different Tone to
the Upper1 (UP1) part.
Name of the
selected rhythm
(or loaded file)
Recording time
3. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to change
One Touch mem-
ory indication
Name of the last
chord you played
the value.
4. Press the [ENTER/SELECT] button again to
Lock status of
these parameters
Real-time part field:
UP1, UP2, LWR. The
black field refers to
the selected real-
time part.
deselect the “UP1” field.
The parameter’s setting field once again appears on a
white background and the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial can
once again be used to select another parameter.
Octave settings of
the real-time
parts.
Selected sounds
Moving between windows
Moving the cursor and setting parameter values
The display cursor can only be moved to the fields that
contain numeric values.
Here is how to navigate the menu to select the setting
you want to change.
1. Press [MENU] button.
1. Rotate the dial to move the cursor to the
parameter whose value you want to change.
The display changes to:
2. Press the [ENTER/SELECT] button to confirm
your selection.
This page allows you to select the function group
that contains the setting you want to change.
NOTE
In some cases, the [MENU] button may recall a special edit
menu window instead of a main menu page.
2. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
the entry of the desired function group.
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
r
Basic operation of the BK-5
For this example, we will select “Global”.
3. Press the [ENTER/SELECT] button to go to
the “Global” function group.
The display changes to:
On this display page, “Display Contrast”, “Display
Brightness” and “Tuning” can be changed directly.
The remaining entries provide access to additional
display pages.
4. Try to select other “Menu” functions by pro-
ceeding as follows:
(a) Press the [EXIT] button once to return to the “Menu”
page.
(b) Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select an entry,
then press the [ENTER/SELECT] button to go to the
corresponding function group or setting.
(c) Press and hold the [EXIT] button to return to the
BK-5’s main page.
The [EXIT] button stops flashing.
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Playing the BK-5’s real-time parts
7. Playing the BK-5’s real-time parts
Your BK-5 contains three real-time parts that can be controlled via MIDI: UP1, UP2 and LWR. Feel free to use only UP1 or
to control all three simultaneously. You can assign the desired sounds (or “Tones”) to each of these parts. See page 119
for a list of the available sounds.
2. If the Tone you need belongs to another
Switching the UP2 and LWR parts
family (see p. 119), press another Tone but-
ton.
on and off
3. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
The UP1 part is always active. The UP2 and LWR parts,
however, can be switched on or off.
the desired Tone, then press the [ENTER/
SELECT] button to confirm your selection.
1. Press the [UP2] or [LWR] button to switch
the corresponding part (Upper2 or Lower)
on (indicator lights) or off (indicator goes
dark).
4. Press [EXIT] to leave the Tone selection
page.
NOTE
If you switch on one of these parts, the cursor on the
main page automatically jumps to the “UP2” or
“LWR” field. If [UP2] and [LWR] are both switched off,
the cursor jumps to the “UP1” field.
You can only listen to Tones for the Upper2 or Lower part if
the [UP2] or [LWR] button lights.
NOTE
Tones can also be selected by simply pressing the
[NUMERIC] key and entering their number.
Selecting Tones for the real-time
parts
Selecting a Tone on the main page
1. If the main page is not displayed, press and
hold the [EXIT] button until it appears.
The numbers and names of the Tones assigned to the
three real-time parts are displayed in the lower half
of the display:
On the BK-5, the sounds you can assign to the real-time
parts are called “Tones”. The BK-5 allows you to assign
any of the available Tones to any of the three real-time
parts. Tone selection always applies to the part (UP1,
UP2, or LWR) whose field is currently displayed in
reverse.
Tones can be selected in two ways:
Using the [UP2] or [LWR] button to select Tones
1. Press and hold the [UP2] or [LWR] button.
The display now shows a list of Tones where the cur-
rently selected sound is displayed in reverse:
The highlighted numeric field refers to the part
whose Tone assignment can be changed. To select a
different part, move the cursor to its numeric field
and press the [ENTER/SELECT] button.
2. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
the desired numeric field, then press the
[ENTER/SELECT] button.
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5 r
Selecting Tones for the real-time parts
The numeric field is displayed in reverse.
Using the ‘Numeric’ function to select Tones,
Rhythms and Performances
The “Numeric” function can be used to enter the number
of the Tone, Rhythm or Performance memory you want
to use, which is faster than scrolling with the
[CURSOR÷VALUE] dial.
This function is automatically activated when you call
up a display or mode where using it makes sense. Below
please find an example that shows you how to use the
“Numeric” function for selecting Tones.
3. Rotate the dial to select the desired Tone.
If necessary, use the TONE buttons to select a differ-
ent family.
NOTE
For Tone selection, it would be a good idea to check on the
main page which real-time part is currently selected to ensure
that you don’t select a Tone for the wrong part.
To select a different Tone for the Upper2 or Lower part, you
can simply press and hold the [UP2] and [LWR] button while
using the following procedure.
In the following example, we will assign a different
sound to the Upper1 part.
The display now shows a page similar to the follow-
ing:
1. Press the button of the Tone family that
contains the Tone you want to select
([PIANO/E.PIANO], for example).
You can also use the “Numeric” function (see below)
to select the desired Tone. In that case, you need to
confirm your selection by pressing the BK-5 button.
Pressing the same TONE button several times allows
you to select the first sound of the various categories
within that family (“NaturalPiano”‰ “Vintage EP1”‰
“Clav-1”…).
4. Press [EXIT] to leave the Tone selection
NOTE
page.
the lock function for Tone selection, which means that
Tones no longer change when you select Performance
memories (page 54).
The display returns to the main page where the name
of the newly selected Tone is shown.
On the main page, you can also use the “Numeric”
function to select Tones. The procedure is as follows:
The display changes to:
(a) Use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the numeric
field of the part you wish to assign a different Tone
to.
(b) Press the [NUMERIC] button (a pop-up window is dis-
played).
(c) Use the [0]~[9] button to enter the number of the
Tone you want to use.
(d) Press the [ENTER/SELECT] button to confirm.
NOTE
You can also select the BK-5’s Tones via MIDI. Be aware,
however, that if the BK-5 receives a sound select cluster
(bank select + program change message) for which there is
no Tone, the display shows “---” instead of a Tone name
and the real-time part in question no longer sounds.
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Playing the BK-5’s real-time parts
2. Press the [NUMERIC] button to open the
following window:
2. Press and hold the [NUMERIC] button to call
up a pop-up window.
(Tone selection window)
(Rhythm selection window)
The TONE buttons light.
3. Press the TONE buttons that correspond to
the figures you want to enter ([0]~[9]).
For Tones, you can enter up to 4 digits. To select Tone
6, for instance, simply pressing the [6] button is
enough (the display will show “0006”).
3. Press the [EXIT] button (or press [NUMERIC]
again) to return to the previous page.
Using the ‘Help’ function
Whenever the display shows a “? hold NUMERIC” mes-
sage, the BK-5 can provide some explanations about the
parameters currently shown in the display. To view this
information, proceed as follows:
NOTE
If you make a mistake, the quickest way to correct it is by
pressing the [0] button four times (to enter “0000”) and
then restarting.
For Rhythms and Performance memories, up to 3
digits can be entered.
NOTE
If you try to enter more digits than possible for the current
item, a warning is displayed (“Tone doesn’t exist”).
4. Press the [ENTER/SELECT] button to confirm
your entry.
The “Numeric” pop-up disappears and the display
jumps to the Tone (and family) you selected.
1. Select a page where the above field is dis-
played, then press and hold the [NUMERIC]
button.
5. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main
page.
Checking a Tone’s or rhythm’s MIDI address
Tones and rhythms can also be selected via MIDI. To this
effect, they use an “internal” address, which is not usu-
ally displayed. For MIDI applications involving sequenc-
ers or external controllers, knowing the “official” address
may come in handy. The BK-5 has a handy system that
provides this information instantly—there is thus no
need to look up the MIDI address in the tables at the end
of this manual.
A pop-up window similar to the following appears:
1. Select the Tone or Rhythm whose MIDI
address you need to know.
2. Press the [EXIT] button (or press [NUMERIC]
again) to close the “Help” window.
(Tone selection window)
(Rhythm selection window)
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BRKh-y5thmrfunctions
8. Rhythm functions
The BK-5 contains a function that plays back automatic accompaniments called “rhythms”. This section explains how to
take advantage of the BK-5’s accompaniments.
Volume balance between the
Using rhythms
The “interactive” aspect about the rhythms is that you
can change the key of the accompaniment simply by
playing different notes or chords. Additionally, you can
select different variations (more or less complex
arrangements) for the active rhythm. The BK-5 provides
several buttons for this.
backing and the real-time parts
If the rhythm accompaniment is too loud or too soft
with respect to the real-time parts you are using, you
can change the balance with the [BACKING] and [KEY-
BOARD] buttons:
■ START/STOP
When the [BACKING] or [KEYBOARD] button is pressed,
the “BALANCE” pop-up window appears, showing the
current setting:
This button is used to start and stop rhythm playback.
While a rhythm is running, the button’s indicator
flashes red on the first beat of each bar, and green on
the remaining beats.
NOTE
You can also start (and stop) rhythm playback simply by
playing on the keyboard. See the next function. (The Start/
Stop function can also be assigned to an optional foot-
switch.)
■ SYNC START
After about 3 seconds, the pop-up window disappears
again.
About the rhythms
The BK-5 can generate interactive accompaniments
based on the rhythm you select. Each rhythm is a typical
accompaniment for a given musical genre. The BK-5
comes with over 300 internal rhythms divided over 6
families (see the RHYTHM FAMILY section on the front
panel).
This button activates and switches off the “Sync
Start” or “Sync Start/Stop” function. Pressing it sev-
eral times allows you to select one of the following
options:
The melodic accompaniment parts of the selected
rhythms follow the chords you play on the keyboard.
[SYNC START]
indicator
Function
Explanation
Sync Start
Lights red Rhythm playback can be
started by playing a note or
chord. Press [START/STOP] to
stop rhythm playback.
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Rhythm functions
■ INTRO
[SYNC START]
Function
Explanation
indicator
Sync Start/ Lights green Rhythm playback can be
Stop
started by playing a note or
chord. Playback will stop when
you release all keys.
—
Dark
Rhythm playback needs to be
started and stopped using the
[START/STOP] button (or the
assigned optional footswitch).
Selects an introduction, which is usually used at the
beginning of a song. You can, however, also select
this pattern for other song sections. The behavior of
the Intro pattern depends on when you press the
[INTRO] button:
■ VARIATION [1], [2], [3], [4]
[INTRO]
Behavior
Pressed before
The indicator lights.
starting rhythm When you start rhythm playback, the
playback
Arranger first plays a musical intro-
duction. (This pattern is played back
only once).
Pressed during
rhythm playback the INTRO pattern will begin on the
next downbeat.
The indicator flashes to signal that
These buttons are used to select the complexity
(number of parts) of the rhythm’s arrangement:
When the intro is finished, the BK-5
returns to the previously selected
VARIATION pattern.
VARIATION Explanation
[1]
The simplest accompaniment pattern. A
good choice for the first of the songs you
play.
There are, in fact, four different INTRO patterns, that
can be selected using the VARIATION [1], [2], [3] and
[4] buttons. Again, the VARIATION buttons determine
the complexity of the intro arrangement.
[2]
[3]
[4]
A slightly more complex pattern you may
want to use for subsequent verses.
This pattern would be a good choice for
the first chorus.
■ ENDING
This is the most complex arrangement.
Consider selecting it for the bridge or the
final chorus sections of a song.
Note that the VARIATION patterns are repeated
(played back in a loop) until select a different pattern
or stop rhythm playback.
This button allows you to end your songs with a suit-
able closing section if you don’t want to simply stop
playback. The behavior of the Ending pattern depends
on when you press the [ENDING] button:
[ENDING]
Behavior
Pressed before
The indicator lights.
starting rhythm When you start rhythm playback, the
playback
Arranger plays a musical ending. At
the end of the phrase, playback stops.
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BSKe-le5ctirng rhythms
[ENDING]
Behavior
Selecting rhythms
Pressed during
rhythm playback the ENDING pattern will begin on the
next downbeat.
The indicator flashes to signal that
1. Press a RHYTHM FAMILY button to select
the rhythm family.
When the ending is finished, rhythm
playback stops.
There are four different ENDING patterns, that can be
selected using the VARIATION [1], [2], [3] and [4] but-
tons. Again, the VARIATION buttons determine the
complexity of the arrangement.
NOTE
the lock function for rhythm selection, which means that
rhythms no longer change when you select Performance
memories (see p. 54).
■ BASS INV
The display shows a list of the rhythms that belong to
this family. If the currently selected rhythms belongs
to the family whose button you pressed, its name is
displayed in reverse and the indicator of the button
you pressed lights:
This button is used to switch the “Bass Inversion”
function on or off. While the button is dark, the
rhythm’s bass part always plays the fundamental of
your notes or chords. Example: if you play a chord
consisting of the notes C, E and G (which is recog-
nized as a C major chord), the bass part plays a C.
If you press a different RHYTHM FAMILY button, the
display shows the beginning of the associated list
(but the indicator of the associated family button
doesn’t light):
If the [BASS INV] button lights, the rhythm’s bass
part uses the lowest notes of the chords you play.
Example: if you play a chord consisting of the notes
E, G and C (still a C major chord), the bass part plays
an E. This function therefore gives you more artistic
licence.
■ AUTO FILL IN
2. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
the desired rhythm, then press [ENTER/
SELECT] to confirm your selection.
The indicator of the selected family button lights.
When this button lights, the BK-5 plays a transition
before switching to the newly selected VARIATION
pattern. Example: if the VARIATION [1] pattern is run-
ning, pressing the [4] button will not switch to that
pattern right away—the BK-5 first plays a fill-in to
announce the new song section.
NOTE
like. See “Fill In Half Bar” on p. 63. You can also speed up or
slow down playback during a fill-in. See “Fill Ritardando”
on p. 63.
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Rhythm functions
The main page displays the name of the last chord
the BK-5 recognized:
NOTE
The “Help” function is available in this environment (see
p. 26). You can also press and hold [NUMERIC] to check the
MIDI address of the selected rhythm (see p. 26).
Playing back rhythms
of the BK-5’s rhythms and at how to use them.
1. Switch on the BK-5 (see p. 20).
2. Set the BK-5’s [VOLUME] knob to a reason-
8. Press the [START/STOP] button to start
rhythm playback.
able level (about 1/4).
The [START/STOP] indicator lights and the BK-5 starts
playing back the introductory phrase.
3. Press the [SPLIT] button if you want to play
in Split mode.
9. Play different chords on the keyboard and
listen to the effect this has on the rhythm.
10. Switch on the [AUTO FILL IN] button (it
lights).
This means that when you select a different VARIA-
TION pattern, the BK-5 will play a transition (fill-in)
before switching to the new pattern.
11. Press a VARIATION [1], [2], [3] or [4] button
to select a more complex or a simpler
accompaniment.
4. Select the rhythm you want to use (see
p. 29).
5. Press the [INTRO] button (it lights) to start
rhythm playback with an introduction.
• If you press it before the last beat of the current
measure, the fill-in starts immediately and lasts until
the end of the current measure, then the newly
selected VARIATION pattern is played back.
• If you press the desired VARIATION button on the last
beat of a bar, the fill-in starts at the next downbeat
and lasts an entire bar. Only then will the BK-5 switch
to the newly selected VARIATION pattern.
6. Press the VARIATION [1], [2], [3] or [4] but-
ton to select the complexity of the INTRO
pattern.
7. Play a chord on the keyboard.
12. If necessary, you can change the rhythm’s
tempo:
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
r
Using the ‘One Touch’ function
• Press the TEMPO [√] or [®] button to decrease or
increase the tempo.
Using the ‘One Touch’ function
The ONE TOUCH memories help you select Tones for the
real-time parts that match the atmosphere of the cur-
rent rhythm. There are four such ONE TOUCH memories
per rhythm.
1. Select the desired rhythm.
See page 29.
2. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main
page.
3. Switch on the [ONE TOUCH] button (its indi-
cator lights).
• Press the [TAP TEMPO] button at least three times at
the desired tempo.
If you haven’t selected any ONE TOUCH memory
since switching on the BK-5, the indicators of TONE
buttons [1], [2], [3] and [4] flash. Otherwise, the BK-5
automatically recalls the last ONE TOUCH memory
you selected.
The BK-5 calculates the intervals between your
presses and sets the corresponding tempo value.
NOTE
Simultaneously press the TEMPO [√] and [®] buttons
(“STANDARD”) to return to the rhythm’s preset tempo.
The main page displays “ONE TOUCH --” (or the num-
ber of the last ONE TOUCH memory).
NOTE
You can press and hold the [TAP TEMPO] button to lock the
tempo setting (see p. 54).
13. Press the [ENDING] button to end rhythm
You could also stop playback simply by pressing the
[START/STOP] button or by releasing all keys on the
keyboard (see “Sync Start/Stop” on p. 28).
While rhythm or SMF song playback is stopped, the
[TAP TEMPO] button flashes to indicate the selected
tempo.
The indicators of TONE buttons [1]~[4] flash.
4. Press the flashing TONE button assigned to
the desired ONE TOUCH memory ([1]~[4]).
indicators of the remaining three buttons still flash.
5. Start playback of the rhythm.
See page 30.
6. Play a melody on the keyboard.
7. Now press another TONE ([1]~[4]) button
than the one that is currently active.
8. Again play a melody on the keyboard.
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Rhythm functions
The newly selected ONE TOUCH memory has recalled
a different sound for the melody part. Note that the
ONE TOUCH function also recalls other settings, like
the tempo, INTRO/ENDING, etc.
After a few seconds, the display shows the contents
of the USB memory. This page is of no importance
here.
The BK-5 has a function that allows you to exclude certain
settings when a new ONE TOUCH memory is selected. See
“One Touch Hold” on p. 66.
9. Press a different TONE [1]~[4] button to
recall the associated ONE TOUCH memory.
Tone selection for the real-time parts as well as other
settings change in accordance with the newly
selected ONE TOUCH memory.
2. Press and hold the [ONE TOUCH] button.
The display changes to:
10. To switch off the ONE TOUCH function and
return to the Tones that were selected
before you activated the ONE TOUCH func-
tion, press the TONE [1]~[4] button whose
indicator lights steadily.
Its indicator flashes along with the other three TONE
buttons.
11. Press the [ONE TOUCH] button to leave ONE
TOUCH memory selection mode.
The TONE buttons stop flashing. (Only the indicator
corresponding to the last Tone family you selected
lights steadily.) You can now select different Tones
for real-time parts without actually leaving the ONE
TOUCH function (if it is still on).
This “One Touch Edit” page can also be selected via
the BK-5’s menu.
3. Use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the
ONE TOUCH memory you want to change,
and confirm with the [ENTER/SELECT] but-
ton.
■ How can you tell whether the ONE TOUCH
function is on or off?
The display changes to:
If the “ONE TOUCH” field on the main page is fol-
lowed by a number (1~4), the ONE TOUCH function is
currently on. If the “ONE TOUCH” field is followed by
a dash (“–”), the ONE TOUCH function is off.
(Here, ONE TOUCH memory 1 has been selected for
editing.)
NOTE
The ONE TOUCH function is off.
The ONE TOUCH function is on (and
memory 1 is selected).
You can also select the desired ONE TOUCH memory by first
pressing the [ONE TOUCH] button and then one of the
flashing TONE buttons [1]~[4].
Programming your own ONE TOUCH settings
(One Touch Edit)
The BK-5 allows you to save your own ONE TOUCH set-
tings, which may come in handy for CUSTOM rhythms
for which there are no “presets”. The following opera-
tion saves the rhythm and its (new) ONE TOUCH settings
to the “My Rhythms” folder on the USB memory con-
nected to the USB MEMORY port.
1. Connect an optional USB memory to the
BK-5.
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
r
Using the ‘One Touch’ function
To overwrite the old rhythm file (replacing it with
your new settings), use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to
select “Yes”, then press the [ENTER/SELECT] button.
4. Change the required settings.
As soon as you change any setting, the display alerts
you to the fact that the contents of the selected
memory no longer corresponds to the current set-
tings (“EDIT”):
If you don’t want to overwrite the existing rhythm
file, select “No” and press [ENTER/SELECT] to return to
the “One Touch Edit” .
8. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main
page.
5. Use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the
memory where you want to save your new
settings.
6. Press the [WRITE] button (its indicator
flashes).
The display changes to:
7. To save your ONE TOUCH changes, rotate
the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select “Yes” and
press [ENTER/SELECT].
The display shows the “Executing” message and then
“Operation Complete”.
Select “No” and press [ENTER/SELECT] if you don’t
want to save your changes after all.
NOTE
The above message is only displayed the first time you
press [WRITE] after editing a ONE TOUCH memory.
■ If the “My Rhythms” folder on the USB mem-
ory already contains a rhythm file of the same
name…
In that case, the display shows the following message
when you select “Yes” and press [ENTER/SELECT] (see
above):
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Using the BK-5 as a USB player
9. Using the BK-5 as a USB player
This section explains how to playback MIDI (SMF) and audio songs stored on an optional USB memory. Note that it is also
possible to select rhythms on that device and to use them in the same way as the internal rhythms. New song and rhythm
files can be copied to the USB memory using your computer as you purchase them.
File types the BK-5 can read and play back
Getting ready to use the BK-5 as a
Extension
.stl
Format
USB player
1. On your computer, copy the new song and
rhythm files to an optional USB memory
Rhythms
Standard MIDI
Files (SMF)
.mid
0 or 1
.kar
NOTE
VIMA TUNES files Connect an optional CD-ROM drive to
(on CD-ROMs pro- the BK-5’s USB MEMORY port to be
Use USB memory sold by Roland (M-UF-series). We cannot
guarantee operation if any other USB memory is used.
duced for the
VIMA series)
able to play back commercially avail-
able CD-ROMs made for VIMA-series
instruments (“VIMA TUNES”). While a
song plays, you can view a slide show
suitable for the character of that song
on an external display or television.
2. Connect the USB memory to your BK-5.
.mp3
• MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3
mp3+CDG • Sampling frequency:
44.1kHz
• Bit rate: 32/40/48/56/
64/80/96/112/128/160/
192/224/256/320kbps,
VBR (variable bit rate)
Audio files
NOTE
Carefully insert the optional USB memory all the way into
the port until it is firmly in place.
.wav
• 16-bit linear
• Sampling frequency:
44.1kHz
NOTE
• Stereo/mono
The BK-5 supports USB memories with a capacity of up to
2TB.
Selecting a song or rhythm on a
USB memory
1. Connect an optional USB memory to the
BK-5.
After a few seconds, the display shows the contents
of the USB memory.
Press the [USB MEMOMRY] button if you inserted the
USB memory at an earlier stage and now want to
return to this display page.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PlayinBg abacckkiansgonKgeoyrbrhoytahrmdfBroKm-a5USB memory
r
The icons to the left of the file names indicate the file
type:
The [®÷π] button’s indicator lights and song playback
starts.
3. If necessary, you can change the song’s
Icon
STL
Explanation
Rhythm file
SMF file
playback tempo:
• Press the TEMPO [√] or [®] button to decrease or
increase the tempo.
SMF
MP3
WAV
JPG
Audio mp3 file
Audio WAV file
Picture file
Folder
2. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
the file you want to play back or display.
3. Press the [ENTER/SELECT] button to load the
NOTE
file.
If you set a tempo value close to the upper or lower limit
for an mp3 or WAV file, playback may sound a little
strange.
The [USB MEMORY] button now lights to indicate
that you selected a file on the USB memory.
If the file you need is located inside a folder, you
must first select that folder, press the [ENTER/SELECT]
button to see its contents and then select the file. If
you opened a folder by mistake, press the [EXIT] but-
ton to return to a higher level.
• Press the [TAP TEMPO] button at least three times at
the desired tempo. (This function is not available if
you selected an audio file (WAV or mp3).)
NOTE
Press and hold the [EXIT] button to return to the main
page.
If you selected a rhythm, see “Playing back rhythms” on
p. 30, because operation is the same as for internal
rhythms.
The BK-5 calculates the intervals between your
presses and sets the corresponding tempo value.
NOTE
In the following, we will therefore only show you how to
play back song files located on a USB memory.
Simultaneously press the TEMPO [√] and [®] buttons
(“STANDARD”) to return to the rhythm’s preset tempo.
NOTE
4. Press the [®÷π] button again to pause song
playback.
The BK-5 has no internal memory where you could store SMF
or audio files.
The [®÷π] button goes dark.
1. Select a song (SMF or audio file) on the USB
5. Press [®÷π] yet again to resume playback.
memory.
6. Press the [SYNC START] button (ª) to stop
See page 34.
playback
2. Press the [START/STOP] button to start play-
back.
You can use the following buttons to control song
playback (see the gray legends):
This button is also labeled [®÷π].
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Using the BK-5 as a USB player
To return to the BK-5’s menu, press and hold the
[EXIT] button. While the contents of the connected
USB memory is displayed, pressing [MENU] takes you
to the “USB Memory Edit” page where you can select
“Rename”, “Delete” or “Search”.
Button
[®÷π]
[ª]
Explanation
Starts or pauses song playback.
Stops song playback.
Rewinds the song.
[º]
NOTE
If you press [MENU] while an empty folder is selected, the
message “No item selected” is displayed to alert you to the
fact that you cannot make any changes.
[‰]
Fast-forwards the song.
4. Press the [ENTER/SELECT] button to call up
the following display page:
Renaming or deleting files/folders
on a USB memory
Rename
Here is how to change the name of a file or folder on
the connected USB memory.
1. Connect an optional USB memory to the
BK-5.
After a few seconds, the display shows the contents
of the USB memory.
5. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
the desired character, then use the TONE
buttons.
You can press the [NUMERIC] button to switch
between upper- and lower-case characters as well as
numbers. The [LWR] button can be used to delete the
selected character. The [UP2] button allows you to
insert a character.
Press the [USB MEMORY] button if you inserted the
USB memory at an earlier stage and now want to
return to this display page.
6. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
the next character position you want to
change, then use the TONE buttons again.
2. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
7. Repeat steps (5) and (6) above to complete
the file or folder you want to rename.
the name.
3. Press the [MENU] button to jump to the
8. Press the flashing [WRITE] button to con-
firm.
“USB Memory Edit” page.
Delete
Files or folders on the connected USB memory that
you no longer need can be deleted as follows.
1. Connect an optional USB memory to the
BK-5.
After a few seconds, the display shows the contents
of the USB memory.
The display changes to:
Press the [USB MEMORY] button if you inserted the
USB memory at an earlier stage and now want to
return to this display page.
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the ‘Search’Bfuancctkioinn gtoKloecaytbeosoanrgds, rBhKyt-h5ms or pictures
r
2. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
Using the ‘Search’ function to
the file or folder you want to delete.
locate songs, rhythms or pictures
3. Press the [MENU] button.
The BK-5 provides a “Search” function that allows you
to search the connected USB storage device for the files
you need. This function is available even while the BK-5
is playing back a song or rhythm, allowing you to pre-
pare the next song or picture without keeping your
audience waiting.
1. Connect an optional USB memory to the
BK-5.
After a few seconds, the display shows the contents
of the connected USB storage device.
NOTE
If you press [MENU] while an empty folder is selected, the
message “No item selected” is displayed to alert you to the
fact that you cannot make any changes.
4. Use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
“Delete”.
2. If you know the folder where the file is
located, select it by rotating the
[CURSOR÷VALUE] dial and then pressing the
[ENTER/SELECT] button.
If you are not sure about the location, do not select a
folder to avoid that the “Finder” function only looks
in that folder.
5. Press the [ENTER/SELECT] button.
The display changes to:
3. Press the [MENU] button.
The display changes to:
NOTE
If you selected a folder in step (2) above, the display
also contains a warning: “The folder may contain
files. Do you want to delete it?”
6. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
“YES” (delete) or “NO” (don’t delete).
7. Press the [ENTER/SELECT] button to confirm
your selection.
If you press [MENU] while an empty folder is selected, the
message “No item selected” is displayed to alert you to the
fact that you cannot make any changes.
4. Use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
“Search”.
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Using the BK-5 as a USB player
The BK-5 searches the USB storage device for files
whose names match the character string you entered
and displays them. The title bar shows the path of the
folder that contains the selected files.
5. Press the [ENTER/SELECT] button.
The display changes to:
The first character position is already selected (“A”).
6. Use the TONE buttons to select a different
character.
NOTE
The “Search” function can find and display 100 files at a
time.
7. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
the next character position you want to
change, then use the TONE buttons again.
10. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
the song or rhythm you want to play back,
then press the [ENTER/SELECT] button to
confirm your selection.
11. Press the [EXIT] button to close the list.
12. Press the [START/STOP] button to start play-
back of the selected song or rhythm.
You can press the [NUMERIC] button to switch
selected character. The [UP2] button allows you to
insert a character.
8. Repeat steps (6)~(7) to complete the char-
acter string you are looking for.
9. Press the [ENTER/SELECT] button to start
the search.
Activating the ‘Play All Songs’
parameter for the USB memory
The “Play All Songs” parameter allows you to play back
all audio songs (WAV and mp3) or SMF songs on the
connected USB memory.
1. Connect an optional USB memory to the
BK-5.
After a few seconds, the display shows the contents
of the USB memory.
NOTE
If you decide that you don’t want to use the “Search” func-
tion, press [EXIT] instead of [ENTER/SELECT].
Press the [USB MEMORY] button if you inserted the
USB memory at an earlier stage and now want to
return to this display page.
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
r
Loop function (MARK A/B)
2. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
the folder that contains the audio files you
want to listen to.
Deactivating the ‘Play All Songs’ function
The “Play All Songs” function needs to be deactivated if
you no longer need it. To do so, proceed as follows:
3. Press the [ENTER/SELECT] button to open
1. If the display doesn’t currently show the
contents of the connected USB memory,
press the [USB MEMORY] button.
the folder.
4. Use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the
audio file where you want playback to start.
2. Press the [USB MEMORY] button (again) to
5. Press [ENTER/SELECT] to confirm your selec-
change the
icon back to
.
tion.
Pressing the [®÷π] button now will only start playback
6. Press the [USB MEMORY] button to activate
the playback function of the selected and all
subsequent songs.
of the selected song.
Loop function (MARK A/B)
The Loop function can be used to specify a passage,
such as the chorus of a song, that will be repeated sev-
eral times. This function is available for both audio and
SMF songs. You can also use it to practise difficult song
passages.
Setting and using the loop positions
1. Select the song you want to play back.
2. Press the [START/STOP] button to start play-
NOTE
back.
.STL and .JPG files contained in the selected folder will be
ignored when you start playback (see below).
The icon in the lower left corner of the display page
changes as follows:
3. When the BK-5 reaches the beginning of
the passage you want to play back in a loop,
press the VARIATION [3] button.
7. Press the [®÷π] button to start playback of
all audio songs.
NOTE
the USB memory (to check its contents, for example). The
“Play All Songs” function continues to play back the files of
the folder you selected in step (2) above.
If you select a different file while navigating (by pressing
[ENTER/SELECT]), the “Play All Songs” function is switched
off and the following message appears:
The VARIATION [3] button flashes to indicate that the
position has been set.
8. Press the [π] button to stop sequential play-
back.
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Using the BK-5 as a USB player
4. Wait until you reach the end of the passage
to be played back in a loop, then press the
VARIATION [4] button.
The VARIATION [4] button lights, while VARIATION [3]
keeps flashing. The loop’s start and end positions
have been set and can be used.
Here is what you have set so far (this is only an
example):
Flashes
Lights
[3]
[4]
5. Press the VARIATION [3] button (it lights) to
activate the loop.
The passage selected above is now played back over
and over.
Lights
[3]
:
:
6. Press the VARIATION [3] button again (it
flashes) to deactivate loop playback.
This does not delete the loop positions. The song is
once again played back in the usual way (i.e. until the
end).
7. Press VARIATION [3] yet again (it lights) to
return to the loop start position and activate
the loop.
NOTE
The marker positions are deleted when you start playback
of another song or switch off the BK-5.
8. To delete the first and second marker posi-
tions, press the VARIATION [4] button.
The VARIATION [3] and [4] buttons go dark and your
loop setting is deleted.
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
r
Other important functions
10. Other important functions
This section presents other important functions you may need regularly.
Changing the key
Changing the octave
This function allows you to transpose the BK-5’s pitch in
semi-tone steps. Depending on the mode setting, this
transposition applies to all sections or just a specific
setting.
This function allows you to transpose the real-time
parts (UP1, UP2 and LWR) up or down in octave steps.
1. If necessary, press the [EXIT] button to
return to the main page.
NOTE
If you choose to transpose the real-time parts, rhythm play-
back is also transposed.
1. Press [KEY] button.
The display shows the current octave setting (“OCT”)
for all 3 real-time parts.
2. Use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the
“OCT” parameter of the real-time part
whose setting you want to change.
The display changes to:
3. Press the [ENTER/SELECT] button.
The selected “OCT” field is displayed in reverse.
4. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
the desired setting.
“Octave” setting
–4~0~+4
5. Press the [ENTER/SELECT] button again.
The “OCT” field is no longer selected and the
[CURSOR÷VALUE] dial can be used to select other
fields.
The current “KEY” setting (transposition interval) is
displayed and already selected.
NOTE
NOTE
Pressing and holding the [KEY] button locks the “Key” set-
ting.
You can also change the octave setting using [MENU] but-
ton‰ “Performance Edit”‰ “Tone Part View”‰ “Octave
Shift” (page 59).
2. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
the desired “Key” setting.
“Key” setting
–6~0~+5 (semitone units)
If the “Key” setting differs from “0”, the [KEY] indica-
tor lights.
After a few seconds, the “KEY” pop-up window disap-
pears. Press the [EXIT] button to close it immediately.
NOTE
If you also need to change the “Mode” setting, see p. 62.
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Other important functions
1. Select a rhythm or an SMF song.
Using ‘Track Mute’ and ‘Center
Cancel’
2. Press and hold the [TRACK MUTE] (CENTER
CANCEL) button.
This function can also be selected using [MENU] but-
ton ‰ “Global” ‰ “Rhythm/SMF Track Mute”.
You can use this function to mute tracks of rhythms or
the melody part of the selected Standard MIDI File
(SMF). After selecting a WAV or mp3 audio file, you can
attenuate the vocal part at the center of the stereo
image (“Center Cancel”). The Mute function’s behavior
depends on the selected file type.
Depending on the file type, the display changes to…
1. Select a song (SMF or audio) or a rhythm.
2. Press the [START/STOP] button to start play-
back.
3. Press the [TRACK MUTE] (CENTER CANCEL)
button (its indicator lights).
…or:
The “Track Mute” or “Center Cancel” function will
turn on. This depends on the file type you selected:
When you start playback, you will notice that active
parts are indicated by moving bar graphs that simu-
late level meters. The bar graphs of muted parts do
not move.
File Type
Function
Explanation
Rhythm
Track Mute
The specified rhythm
track(s) is muted (Default:
AC1~AC6).
3. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to move
the cursor to the track you want to mute.
SMF
Track Mute
The specified Standard MIDI
file track is muted (Default:
channel 4).
4. Press the [ENTER/SELECT] button to high-
light the corresponding parameter.
5. Rotate the dial to change the setting and
press [ENTER/SELECT] to confirm you set-
ting.
Audio
(mp3,
Wav)
Center Cancel Sounds in the center (the
melodic portion of the
sound) will be minimized.
The possibilities are:
Display indication
NOTE
For some audio songs, the vocal sound may not be elimi-
nated completely.
<no indication> The associated track is played back.
M
The associated track is no longer
played back (muted).
4. Press the [TRACK MUTE] (CENTER CANCEL)
button again to make its indicator go dark.
This switches the “Track Mute” or “Center Cancel”
function back off.
track(s) that should be muted for any
rhythm or SMF file you play back, see “Save
Global” on p. 70.
Selecting the track(s) to mute for rhythms
or SMF songs
The following procedure allows you to specify the track
of the selected Standard MIDI File that should be muted
when you switch on the [TRACK MUTE] button.
7. If there is no need to save your settings,
press and hold the [EXIT] button to return to
the main page.
NOTE
This function is not available for audio files.
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BaUcskininggtheK‘eMyebloodayrIndteBll(Kig-e5ncer)’ function
split point can be used to play melodies using the
UP1 and/or UP2 part.
Using the ‘Melody Intell(igence)’
function
In Split mode, the “Type” parameter (see p. 62) is
The Arranger can add a counter-melody to the notes
you play with the Upper1 part (UP1). Those automatic
harmonies are based on the chords you play in the
chord recognition area.
NOTE
See page 24 for how to select the real-time parts you want
to use.
The counter-melody is played by the MELODY INTELL
part. There are 18 harmony types to choose from.
NOTE
1. Press the [MELODY INTELL] button (so that
it lights).
You can activate a “Hold” function for the LWR part. See
“Lower Hold” on p. 62.
2. Press the [SPLIT] button again.
The BK-5 leaves Split mode, the [SPLIT] indicator goes
dark and chord recognition (see “Type” on p. 62) is set
to “Pianist2”.
Setting the volume of the real-time
parts
The BK-5 provides an easy way to change the volume
balance of the Upper1, Upper2 and Lower parts.
This adds a harmony to the notes you play.
2. Press the [MELODY INTELL] button again (its
indicator goes dark) to switch off the
counter-melody.
1. Simultaneously press the [LWR] and [UP2]
buttons to call up the “Parts Volume” page.
NOTE
Press and hold the [MELODY INTELL] button to open the
window where you can change the “Melody Intelligence”
settings (see p. 64).
Using Split mode
In Split mode, the BK-5’s keyboard transmits notes
played to the left of the split point to the Arranger parts.
The notes to the right of the split point, however, are
played back by the real-time parts..
The “Volume” value of the last part you selected (on
the main page) is already highlighted.
NOTE
In most cases, the default setting for the split point is note
number 60 (C4). You can change the split point to a different
note (see “Split Point” on p. 61).
1. Press the [SPLIT] button (its indicator
lights).
2. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to set the
desired volume for that part (0~127).
3. Press the [UP2] button to select the “UP2
Volume” value.
Pressing it again selects the “UP1 Volume” value.
4. Repeat step (2) above.
5. Press the [LWR] button to select the “LWR
Volume” value.
The BK-5 is now in Split mode: note numbers below
the split point (see “Split” on p. 56) are used to trans-
pose rhythm playback in real-time and to play the
6. Repeat step (2) above.
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Other important functions
NOTE
You can also select the desired volume value by pressing
the [ENTER/SELECT] button, rotating the [CURSOR÷VALUE]
dial and pressing [ENTER/SELECT] again.
7. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main
page.
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BPKe-rf5orrmance Lists
11. Performance Lists
The display now shows all Performance Lists it found
on the USB memory. (The internal “Music Assistant”
and “Factory Songs” lists are always displayed in the
top line.)
Performance/Music Assistant/
Factory Songs info
ence to the desired rhythm or song and all settings you
want to load along with that rhythm or song (see “‘Per-
formance Edit’ parameters” on p. 56), including settings
like INTRO/ENDING status, selected VARIATION, etc.
The Performance memories you create are saved to the
selected “Performance List”. This allows you to prepare
one set of Performance memories for weddings, another
for corporate events, a third for anniversaries, etc. Per-
formance Lists always reside on a USB memory.
NOTE
It is perfectly possible to program several Performance
memories for one song. Selecting a Performance mem-
ory is a lot faster than calling up one of the BK-5’s func-
tions, modifying the settings, etc., while playing. You
could program one Performance memory for the first
part of a song, another for the bridge and a third one for
the closing section. Doing so allows you to “play” with
the effect settings of the various processors, for exam-
ple.
If you already loaded a Performance List, the display imme-
load a different Performance List from the USB memory,
press the PERFORMANCE [LIST] button again and proceed
with step (4) below.
The “LIST” icon at the bottom means that you can
press the [LIST] button to alternate between the list
of Performance List files (see the illustration above)
and the contents of the currently selected list (see
the illustration below).
NOTE
The BK-5 is supplied with one Performance List called “Music
Assistant” and a second called “Factory Songs” that contains 5
SMF files. These lists cannot be deleted or edited.
Loading a Performance/‘Music
1. Switch on the BK-5.
See page 20.
NOTE
2. Connect an optional USB memory to the
If the USB memory contains no Performance List files, or if
the memory is not connected (properly), the BK-5 only dis-
plays the “Music Assistant” and “Factory Songs” list.
BK-5.
This step is unnecessary if you want to use the “Music
Assistant” or “Factory Songs” list, because these lists
reside in the BK-5’s internal memory.
4. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
the Performance List you want to use.
3. Press the PERFORMANCE [LIST] button.
5. Press the [ENTER/SELECT] button to confirm
your selection.
(In our example, we selected the “Music Assistant”
list.) The display changes to:
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Performance Lists
You can now select a Performance memory (see
below).
During playback of that rhythm or song, you can
already select a new Performance/“Music Assistant”/
“Factory Songs” memory.
3. If you need to return to the main page,
If you need to load another Performance List, press
the PERFORMANCE [LIST] button again.
press the [EXIT] button.
To return to the page that lists the memories, press
PERFORMANCE [LIST] again.
Recalling a Performance/‘Music
Assistant’/‘Factory Songs’ memory
Here is how to select a Performance/ “Music Assistant”/
“Factory Songs” memory from the last list you loaded
(see p. 45).
BK-5’s “Numeric” function. See “Using the ‘Numeric’
function to select Tones, Rhythms and Performances”
on p. 25 for details.
1. If the display doesn’t yet show a list of Per-
formance/“Music Assistant”/“Factory Songs”
memories, press the PERFORMANCE [LIST]
button.
Saving your settings as a
Performance
1. Select a rhythm or song.
2. Select all settings you would like to use for
this rhythm or song.
You can, for instance, assign the desired Tones to the
real-time parts, switch on the [INTRO] button, modify
the “Performance Edit” settings, etc.
In this example, we loaded the “Music Assistant” List.
3. Press the [WRITE] button to jump to the
“Write Performance” page.
2. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
the memory whose settings you want to use,
then press the [ENTER/SELECT] button to
confirm your selection.
The [WRITE] indicator flashes and the display changes
to:
The PERFORMANCE [LIST] button lights to signal that
the BK-5 is now using the settings of the selected
Performance memory. The name of that memory is
highlighted.
By default, the BK-5 assigns the name of the selected
rhythm, song or of the last Performance you loaded
to the Performance settings you are about to save. If
you agree with that name, proceed with step (7)
below.
The selected memory also refers to a rhythm or song,
which can be started in the usual ways ([START/STOP]
button, [SYNC START], etc.).
4. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
the desired position.
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
r
Other Performance List functions
5. Use the TONE buttons to enter the desired
characters.
4. Press the [MENU] button.
6. Repeat steps (4) and (5) to enter the
remaining characters.
NOTE
The display now changes to a page with the follow-
ing options:
You can press the [NUMERIC] button to switch between
upper- and lower-case characters as well as numbers. The
[LWR] button can be used to delete the selected character.
The [UP2] button allows you to insert a character.
7. Press the [WRITE] button to save your set-
selected Performance List (see “Loading a Perfor-
mance/‘Music Assistant’/‘Factory Songs’ List” on
p. 45).
Function
Explanation
NOTE
Rename*
Allows you to rename the selected Perfor-
mance List.
If you haven’t loaded any Performance List since switching
on the BK-5, a new Performance List is created, and your
Performance memory becomes its first entry.
Delete*
Deletes the selected Performance List.
Make New
formance List.
Other Performance List functions
[*] Not available if you selected the “Music Assistant” or “Factory
Songs” list in step (3) above.
1. Connect a USB memory with at least one
Performance List to the BK-5.
5. Rotate the dial to select the desired option,
then press the [ENTER/SELECT].
If you select ‘Rename’
The display changes to:
2. Press the PERFORMANCE [LIST] button.
The display now shows all Performance Lists on the
connected USB memory.
This page allows you to change the name of the
1. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
You can press the [NUMERIC] button to switch
numbers. The [LWR] button can be used to delete the
selected character. The [UP2] button allows you to
insert a character.
3. Rotate the dial to select the desired Perfor-
mance List.
2. Use the TONE buttons to enter the desired
characters.
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Performance Lists
3. Repeat steps (1) and (2) above to complete
the name.
the desired character, then use the TONE
4. Press the [WRITE] button to save the Perfor-
You can press the [NUMERIC] button to switch
numbers. The [LWR] button can be used to delete the
selected character. The [UP2] button allows you to
insert a character.
mance List under the new name.
The display briefly confirms the operation and the
returns to the page with all Performance List files on
your USB memory.
the next character position you want to
change, then use the TONE buttons again.
If the USB memory already contains a file of the
name you have entered, the display asks you whether
it is OK to overwrite the other Performance List file.
3. Repeat steps (1) and (2) above to complete
In that case, select “YES” to replace the other Perfor-
mance List file with the one whose name you
changed. (Select “NO” to return to the page where
you can change the name.) Then, press the [ENTER/
SELECT] button.
the name.
4. Press the [WRITE] button to create the new
Performance List, which is currently empty.
If the USB memory already contains a file of the
name you have entered, the display asks you whether
it is OK to overwrite the other Performance List file.
If you select ‘Delete’
In that case, select “YES” to replace the other Perfor-
mance List file with the one you want to create.
(Select “NO” to return to the page where you can
change the name.) Then, press the [ENTER/SELECT]
button.
The display changes to:
The display returns to the page where the Perfor-
mance Lists are displayed, and the newly created list
is highlighted.
NOTE
The new Performance List file is saved to the “My Perfor-
mances” folder on the USB memory. If this folder doesn’t
yet exist, it will be created automatically.
This page allows you to delete the selected Perfor-
mance List.
1. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
“YES”, then press the [ENTER/SELECT] but-
ton to delete the Performance List.
Select “NO” if you do not want to delete the Perfor-
mance List after all.
Editing Performance memories
Whenever the display shows all Performance memories
to which the selected List refers, you can press the
[MENU] button to edit the memories. The “Edit” option
allows you to do the following:
The display briefly confirms that the selected Perfor-
mance List has been deleted and then returns to the
page with all Performance List files on your USB
memory.
If you select ‘Make New List’
The display changes to:
Operation
Explanation
Delete
Performance
Deletes the selected Performance
memory from the active list.
Move Performance Allows you to change the order in
which the Performance memories
appear in the selected Performance
List.
List whose name is selected automatically by the
BK-5. If you are happy with that name, proceed with
step (4) below. Otherwise…
Save Performance Allows you to save the edited list.
List
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
r
Editing Performance memories
If you did not save the Performance List, the BK-5
now signals that you need to save it to preserve your
changes.
Delete Performance
1. Select the Performance memory you want to
remove from the list.
2. Press the [MENU] button.
9. Rotate the dial to select “YES” to save your
changes to the USB memory (or “NO” if you
wish to keep the previous version).
3. If necessary, rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE]
dial to select “Delete Performance”, then
press the [ENTER/SELECT] button.
The display changes to:
10. Press the [ENTER/SELECT] button to confirm
your selection.
■ Move Performance
1. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
the Performance memory you want to move
to a different position inside the list.
2. Press the [MENU] button.
4. Rotate the dial to select “YES” to delete the
Performance memory (or “NO” if you wish to
keep it).
5. Press the [ENTER/SELECT] button to confirm
your selection.
The display briefly confirms that the Performance
memory has been deleted.
3. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
“Move Performance”, then press the [ENTER/
SELECT] button.
If you like, you can now select another Performance
to confirm and repeat from step (3).
The display changes to:
To save your edited Performance List, proceed with
step (6). If you don’t want to save it, skip to step (8).
Saving the edited Performance List
6. Press the [MENU] button.
7. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
“Save Performance List”, then press the
[ENTER/SELECT] button.
4. Rotate the dial to move the selected Perfor-
mance memory to the desired position, then
A message confirms that the data have been saved.
8. Press the [EXIT] button.
you want to move, press the [MENU] button to con-
firm and repeat from step (3).
See “Saving the edited Performance List” if you want
to save the edited list.
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Adding pictures to the music
12. Adding pictures to the music
You can connect an external display or a television to the BK-5, and use it to watch a slide show, a notation, or video
footage from another device connected to the BK-5.
NOTE
Displaying photos automatically
When you press the [SYNC START] (■) button to stop song
The BK-5 can display photos in succession. You can
have the photos switch automatically, somewhat like
watching a movie. In addition, you can choose a picture,
which will be used as background on an external screen.
playback, the slideshow also stops. When you load another
“VIMA TUNES” song, the previous slideshow stops and the
display shows the first picture for the new song.
Enjoying a slide show of your own pictures
You can watch a slide show while listening to a song on
a USB storage device.
Enjoying a VIMA TUNES slide show
You can watch a slide show while listening to a song on
an optional “VIMA TUNES” CD-ROM (produced for the
VIMA series).
NOTE
The slide show only starts if the folder that contains the
desired pictures has the same name as the song file you
within the USB memory’s file hierarchy.
Songs on “VIMA TUNES” CD-ROMs provide slide show
images suitable for each song, making it easy for you to
enjoy a slide show without having to provide your own
photos.
1. Use a graphic program on your computer to
prepare the pictures you want to use.
Image data that can be displayed:
1. Connect an external screen to the BK-5 (see
p. 18).
2. Connect an optional CD player to the BK-5’s
Size
Recommended: 512 x 384 or 1024 x 768
pixels.
USB MEMORY port.
3. Insert the desired “VIMA TUNES” CD-ROM
into the CD drive.
(Images of 4096 x 3072 pixels or smaller
and 4MB or less are supported).
Note: If you use images that are larger
than the recommended size, it may take
longer to switch images.
NOTE
“VIMA TUNES” songs are sold on CD-ROMs available from
your Roland dealer.
Format
JPEG format (.JPG)
The BK-5 now displays a list of the songs on the
CD-ROM. If you don’t see that list, press the
[USB MEMORY] button.
2. Connect the USB memory to your computer
and create a folder named “Amazing Grace”
(for example) on the USB storage device.
4. Select the song you want to play back by
first rotating the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial and
then pressing the [ENTER/SELECT] button to
confirm your selection.
3. Copy the pictures you want to display for
this song to the “Amazing Grace” folder.
4. Copy the song “Amazing Grace” to the same
level as the folder of the same name.
Do not put the song file inside the folder.
The [USB MEMORY] button’s indicator lights.
5. Press the [START/STOP] (®÷π) button to play
back the song.
5. Disconnect the USB memory from your com-
puter in accordance with the standard pro-
cedure for the operating system you are
using.
A slide show suitable for the character of the song
will be shown on the external display or television set
connected to the BK-5.
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
r
6. Connect your USB memory to the BK-5’s
USB MEMORY port.
3. To revert to the colored background or logo,
Mode” parameter (see p. 68).
If you once again select a .JPG picture (see above),
the “Background Mode” parameter is again set to
“User”.
Even after selecting a new background picture
(“User”), you can still take advantage of the BK-5’s
slide show functionality (see p. 50).
If you select a song for which there is no picture
folder on the same file level as the song file, however,
your “User” background is displayed.
The BK-5 automatically shows the contents of the
USB memory you inserted.
7. Select the song you want to play back
(“Amazing Grace” in our example) by first
rotating the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial and then
pressing it to confirm your selection.
8. Press the [®÷π] button to play back the song.
The slide show of the pictures inside the “Amazing
Grace” folder begins.
■ Picture display and song lyrics
played back remain on the external screen while they
are no longer needed, switch off the “External Lyrics”
function (see p. 55) to make them disappear.
NOTE
a different song that has no associated slide show to cause
the background or logo to be displayed (see “Using one of
your own pictures as background”).
Using one of your own pictures as
background
The BK-5 allows you to use one of your own pictures as
screen background, allowing you to customize your per-
formances.
1. Connect the USB storage device that con-
tains the picture you want to use to the
BK-5’s USB MEMORY port.
The display shows a list of the files on the USB stor-
age device.
2. Select the .JPG file you want to use.
connected).
This picture will be considered your “User” setting
and the “Background Mode” parameter (see p. 68)
will be set to “USER”.
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Recording your performance as audio data
13. Recording your performance as audio data
Your BK-5 allows you to record everything it can transmit to its outputs, i.e. rhythm or song playback, your playing, your
singing, and any audio signal transmitted to the BK-5. (The metronome signal is not recorded.)
Feel free to connect the master outputs of an external
5. Press the [START/STOP] button.
mixing console to the BK-5’s AUDIO INPUT (STEREO)
socket if you want to record your band or the signals of
an accordion, additional synthesizers, pianos, drum
machines, etc., as well.
The resulting audio file is stored in the WAV format (not
mp3), which allows you to burn your recordings onto a
CD using your computer.
NOTE
You will need a USB memory to record your performance.
The indicators of the [AUDIO REC] and [START/STOP]
buttons light and the BK-5 starts playing back the
selected rhythm or song and recording. Everything
you play on the keyboard is recorded.
Recording
NOTE
6. At the end of the song, press the
The following is based on the assumption that the “Rec Audio
[AUDIO REC] or [START/STOP] button to stop
Sync” parameter (page 68) is active.
recording.
1. Connect the USB memory to which you wish
Rhythm or song playback and recording stop. The fol-
lowing message appears:
NOTE
Use USB memory sold by Roland (M-UF-series). We cannot
guarantee operation if any other USB memory is used.
2. Prepare everything you want to record:
• Select the rhythm or song you want to use as accom-
paniment
• Set the levels and effects, etc.
the BALANCE buttons.
You can now…
(a) Save the song under a new name.
You may also want to set the “Audio In Level” param-
eter (page 68).
‰ “Saving your recording as an audio file” on p. 53
(b) Save the song under the name suggested by the BK-5
(“My recording001”).
4. Press the [AUDIO REC] button (its indicator
flashes).
‰Press the [WRITE] button. After a few seconds, the
display will return to the main page. In this case, your
audio file is saved in the “My Recordings” folder.
(c) Decide to discard your recording, because you are
unhappy with it.
‰ Press the [EXIT] button. The display changes to:
NOTE
If you pressed the [AUDIO REC] button by accident, press
and hold it until its indicator goes dark again.
‰ Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select “YES”,
then press [ENTER/SELECT] to erase your recording.
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording
You can press the [NUMERIC] button to switch
selected character. The [UP2] button allows you to
insert a character.
NOTE
Selecting “NO” here takes you back to the state where you
can choose between options (a) and (b).
4. Repeat steps (2) and (3) to complete the
Listening to your recording
name.
If you selected (a) or (b) above, you can listen to your
recorded performance:
5. Press the [WRITE] button (its indicator
flashes) to save your recording under the
new name and to return to the main page.
If the USB memory already contains a file of that
name, you will be asked whether you want to over-
write it:
back of your recording.
want to change the setting of the “Rec Audio Level”
parameter ([MENU] button ‰ “Global“‰ “Utility”‰
“Rec Audio Level” on p. 68).
NOTE
you to start recording before the song you selected
([MENU] button ‰ “Global“‰ “Utility”‰ “Rec Audio Sync”
on p. 68).
Saving your recording as an audio file
When you stop recording (see above), the display shows
the following message:
In this case, select “YES” by first rotating the
[CURSOR÷VALUE] dial and then pressing the [ENTER/
SELECT] button to replace the old file with the new
one (the old file will be lost).
Otherwise, select “NO” and press [ENTER/SELECT] to
return to the page where you can change the name,
and enter a different name, then press the [WRITE]
button.
When you press the [WRITE] button, your audio file is
saved to the “My Recordings” folder on the USB
memory.
NOTE
The name suggestion displayed here depends on the first
number.
1. If you want to name your new song, proceed
with step (2).
If you are happy with the name suggested by the
BK-5, simply press the [WRITE] button (see step (5)
below).
2. Use the TONE buttons to select a different
character.
3. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
the next character position you want to
change, then use the TONE buttons again.
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Lock functions
14. Lock functions
The BK-5 allows you to lock (protect) several settings to ensure that they no longer change when you select a different
Performance memory.
The BK-5’s locks are data filters that allow you to use
your Performance memories more efficiently, because
you can ignore settings that may be fine for one song
(the one you prepared the Performance memory for),
but not for another.
The lock status of the functions that provide this protec-
tion is also displayed on the main page:
Here is an example: Suppose you select a Performance
memory that assigns the “French Horns” sound to the
Upper1 part, which you want to keep for the entire song
(or set). In this case lock (i.e. protect) the Upper1 part
after selecting this memory to ensure that subsequent
Performance memories you recall modify all of the
BK-5’s eligible settings—except the Upper1 part (which
goes on using the “French Horns” sound).
Switching the locks on and off
All settings that can be protected are indicated by
means of the legend “Hold to LOCK”.
In the example shown here, you will learn how to
exclude rhythm changes from Performance selections.
The same procedure (albeit with different buttons) also
applies to the tempo (press and hold [TAP TEMPO]) and
“Key” (press and hold [KEY]) settings as well as to Tone
NOTE
The “Performance Hold” settings are linked to these buttons
and therefore adopt the on/off status you select on the BK-5’s
front panel.
NOTE
1. Connect the USB memory and load a Perfor-
mance memory (page 45) or a rhythm
(page 29).
Unlike the other lock parameters, the protection of the tempo
setting (see [MENU] button‰ “Performance Edit”‰ “Arranger
Setting” ‰ “Tempo”, page 63) also applies to rhythm selection.
Each rhythm has a preset tempo value that is recalled when
you select it. While the tempo setting is locked, the tempo no
2. Press and hold one of the RHYTHM FAMILY
buttons.
NOTE
The “Save Global” parameter (page 70) also saves the lock (and
hence the “Performance Hold”) settings.
A “Rhythm” pop-up window appears with a closed
lock (see left). (If you repeat step (2), the pop-up win-
dow will display an open lock to inform you that the
lock function has been cancelled.)
Whenever you switch a lock function on or off, the dis-
play briefly informs you about this:
3. Start playback of the selected rhythm.
4. Select a different Performance memory.
If the lock next to “RHYTHM” on the main page is
closed, recalling another Performance does not
change the rhythm.
5. Again press and hold any RHYTHM FAMILY
button to unlock the “RHYTHM” function.
The Upper1 part no longer changes
Tones.
The Upper1 part will change Tones
when you select a different Perfor-
mance memory.
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
r
Menu options
15. Menu options
The BK-5’s [MENU] button provides access to the available parameters and functions.
Function group Explanation
Mastering Tools These functions allow you to set the
General procedure
1. Press the [MENU] button (its indicator
p. 71).
lights).
The display changes to:
Makeup Tools
These functions allow you to edit the
selected rhythm or SMF song in an
about the underlying MIDI parameters.
See page 74.
Rhythm
Composer
This function group allows you to cre-
ate new rhythms or to edit existing
ones.
MIDI
This function group allows you to edit
the BK-5’s MIDI parameters (see
p. 102).
2. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
the desired function group.
Factory Reset
BK-5’s factory settings (see p. 111).
Format USB
Device
This command allows you to format an
optional USB memory (see p. 111).
3. Press the [ENTER/SELECT] button to go to
the display page where you can edit the
parameters of the selected group, or to exe-
cute the selected command.
The following function groups are available:
Function group Explanation
Internal Lyrics
The BK-5’s display can show the lyrics of Standard MIDI
television set” on p. 18), unless you set the “External Lyr-
ics” parameter to “Off” (see below).
Internal Lyrics
Allows you to activate the display of
lyrics data on the BK-5 itself. (Only for
SMF and mp3 files for which there are
lyrics data.)
External Lyrics
Allows you to cancel (“Off”) or activate
(“On”) the display of song lyrics on an
external screen.
Sometimes, however, it may be wiser to orient the exter-
nal screen in such a way that the audience can easily
follow the lyrics, which may then mean that you no
longer see what is displayed. If you need to see the lyr-
ics, you can follow them on the BK-5’s internal display:
Performance
Edit
This function group allows you to
select different Tones and effects set-
tings for the keyboard parts, the
selected rhythm, to set the Arranger’s
behavior, the split point, etc. All set-
tings of this group can be saved to a
2. Select the “Internal Lyrics” command (see
3. Press the [ENTER/SELECT] button.
Global
This function group contains parame-
ters that apply to all sections of the
BK-5 (see p. 65).
One Touch Edit This functions allows you to edit the
ONE TOUCH memories (and to save
your changes).
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Menu options
The internal display now shows the lyrics of the
selected song (4 lines at a time) and the chords of the
song (only for SMF files).
Parameter/Group Explanation
Save As Default This function allows you to save all “Per-
formance Edit” settings as the new
defaults that will be loaded each time
‘Tone Part View’ parameters
This function group can be selected using [MENU] but-
ton ‰ “Performance Edit” ‰ “Tone Part View”.
4. At the end of the song, press and hold the
[EXIT] button to return to the main page.
NOTE
The internal display always shows four lines of lyrics and
the chord symbols (this cannot be changed).
1. Use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial and [ENTER/
SELECT] button to select the keyboard part
you want to edit (LWR, UP2, UP1).
The display shows the settings for the selected key-
board part.
External Lyrics
This is, in fact, a switch that allows you to cancel (“Off”)
or activate (“On”) the display of song lyrics on an exter-
nal screen.
2. Use the dial to select and set the desired
parameter(s).
‘Performance Edit’ parameters
The following parameters are available:
The following parameters can be set for each Perfor-
mance memory:
Tone
Allows you to select a different Tone. See page 119
Parameter/Group Explanation
for a list of available Tones and Drum Sets. While
selecting a Tone, you can press a Tone selection but-
ton to select a different family.
Tone Part View
This is where you can edit settings
Tone Part MFX
Contains the effects parameters for the
page 60.
Parameter
Explanation
Tone
The number of Tones depends on the
selected family.
Rhythm Parts
Split
This group contains all parameters of the
rhythm parts. See page 61.
Volume
Adjusts the volume of the selected keyboard part.
Selecting “0” means that the part is question is no
longer audible.
split point, i.e. the separation between
the lower and upper keyboard zones. See
page 61.
Parameter
Setting
Key
Allows you to transpose the BK-5 in
semi-tone steps up or down. See
page 41.
Volume
0~127
Reverb Send
Use this parameter to set the reverb send level (i.e.
the amount of effect that should be added).
Arranger Setting This function group allows you to specify
should scan the note messages gener-
tion. See page 62.
Parameter
Setting
Reverb Send 0~127
Melody Intelligent Allows you to set the “Melody Intelli-
gence” function. See page 64. This page
can also be selected by pressing and
Chorus Send
Use this parameter to set the chorus send level (i.e.
the amount of effect that should be added).
holding the [MELODY INTELL] button.
Parameter
Setting
Chorus Send 0~127
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
r
‘Performance Edit’ parameters
Panpot
Parameter
Setting range
Explanation
Use this parameter to change the stereo placement
of the selected keyboard part. “L63” means “hard left”
and “R63” represents “hard right”. Choose “0” if the
sound should be at the center of the stereo image.
“Low”: Select this set-
ting if you are used to
playing on an elec-
tronic organ or if you
do not want velocity
changes to bring
Parameter
Setting
Panpot
L63~0~R63
about major volume
changes.
Key Touch (velocity sensitivity)
“Fixed”: Select this
The BK-5’s keyboard is velocity sensitive, allowing
setting if all notes you
play on the keyboard
velocity value. When
you set this parame-
ter, the “Fixed value”
field can be edited
you to control the timbre and volume of the key-
board parts by varying the strength with which you
strike the keys.
1. If you want to edit this setting, you have to
press the [ENTER/SELECT] button to select
the “Key Touch” page.
Min Value
Max Value
1~127
1~127
This parameter allows
you to set the smallest
velocity value with
which you can trigger
the selected part.
This parameter allows
you to set the highest
velocity value with
which you can trigger
the selected part.
2. Use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select and
set the desired parameter, then press the
[ENTER/SELECT] button and rotate the
[CURSOR÷VALUE] dial.
Fixed value* – 1~127
Allows you to set the
value when “Curve” is
set to “Fixed”.
[*] This parameter can only be edited if the “Curve” parameter is
set to “Fixed”.
The following parameters are available:
Parameter
Setting range
Explanation
Eq Part Edit
Curve
High, Medium,
Low, Fixed*
“High”: Select this set-
ting for maximum
expressiveness. Even
small variations of the
force with which you
strike a key produce
audible changes. The
trade-off is, however,
that you have to strike
the keys forcefully to
reach the maximum
volume.
1. If you also want to edit the parameters of
the equalizer, you have to rotate the
[CURSOR÷VALUE] dial and press the [ENTER/
SELECT] button to select the “Eq Edit Part”
page.
“Medium”: Medium
velocity sensitivity.
The keyboard
responds to velocity
changes, but the max-
imum volume can be
obtained more easily
than with “high”. (This
is the default setting.)
2. Use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the
desired parameter and press the [ENTER/
SELECT] button.
3. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to set the
desired value.
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Menu options
The following parameters are available:
Expression Pedal
Select “Off” if you don’t need pedal expression for the
Parameter
Setting range
Explanation
selected part. This means that the keyboard part in
question no longer responds to an expression pedal
you may have connected to the SWITCH/EXPRESSION
socket.
Switch
Off, On
This parameter allows
you to switch the
equalizer on and off.
High Freq
High Gain
1500Hz, 2000Hz, Allows you to set the
3000Hz, 4000Hz, cutoff frequency of
6000Hz, 8000Hz, the high band (this is
Parameter
Setting
Expression Pedal
Off, On
12000Hz
a shelving filter).
Pedal Exp Down/Up
The expression pedal allows you to control the vol-
ume of all parts by foot.
–15~+15dB
Use this parameter to
set the level of the
selected “High” fre-
quency. Positive val-
ues boost (increase
the volume of) that
frequency band, neg-
ative values cut
“Up” and “Down” refer to the volume that is used
when the expression pedal is pressed (“Up”, highest
volume) or in the upright position (“Down”, lowest
volume).
You do not need to specify “0” for the “Down” posi-
tion. Selecting any other values will reduce the vol-
ume of the selected part up to the “Down” value.
Likewise, you do not need to specify “127” as maxi-
mum value for “Up”.
(attenuate) it.
Mid Freq
Mid Gain
Mid Q
200~8000Hz
–15~+15dB
Allows you to set the
cutoff frequency of
the middle band (this
is a peaking filter).
NOTE
The expression pedal sends MIDI Expression commands
(CC11).
Use this parameter to
set the level of the
selected “Mid” fre-
quency.
It is perfectly possible to set the “Down” value to
“127” and the “Up” value to “0”, so that the selected
part only sounds when the expression pedal is in the
upright position. This can be used for some clever
and Upper2 parts by varying your velocity (which
requires a considerable amount of “striking preci-
sion”, see “Min Value” and “Max Value” on p. 57), you
could invert UP2’s response to the expression pedal,
so that UP1 doesn’t sound when UP2 does, and vice
versa.
0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, Use this parameter to
8.0
specify the width of
the “Mid Frequency”
band that you want to
boost or cut. Smaller
values mean that
neighboring frequen-
cies above/below that
value are also
affected.
Parameter
Setting
Low Freq
Low Gain
90, 150, 180, 300, Allows you to set the
360, 600Hz
cutoff frequency of
the low band (this is a
shelving filter).
Pedal Exp Down/Up
0~127
Hold Pedal
This parameter allows you to specify whether and
how a hold/damper pedal you connect to the PEDAL
HOLD socket should respond to Hold messages
(CC64).
–15~+15dB
Use this parameter to
set the level of the
selected “Low” fre-
quency.
Parameter
Setting
4. Press the [EXIT] button to leave the “Eq Part
Edit” page.
Hold Pedal
Auto, On, Off
“Auto” means that the part in question only responds
to Hold messages if it is assigned to the right half
(Split) or the entire keyboard.
Mfx
The BK-5 contains one multi-effects processor
(“Mfx”) that can be used to process the desired key-
board part(s). Select “Off” for parts that don’t need to
be processed by this Mfx.
“On” means that the part in question always responds
to Hold messages, even if it is assigned to the left half
of the keyboard.
Parameter
Setting
“Off”, finally, means that the part does not respond to
Hold messages.
Mfx
Off, On
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
r
‘Performance Edit’ parameters
Octave Shift
Bender Range
Allows you to transpose the selected keyboard part in
This parameter sets the pitch interval, i.e. the value
that will be used when the BENDER/MODULATION
lever is pushed all the way to the left or right.
octave steps.
Parameter
Setting
Parameter
Setting
Octave Shift
–4~0~+4
Bender Range
0~+24
Coarse Tune
Changes the pitch of the selected keyboard part in
semi-tone steps.
Modulation Assign
This parameter allows you to specify for each key-
board part how it should respond to Modulation
messages (CC01).
Parameter
Setting
Coarse Tune
–24~0~+24
Parameter
Setting
Fine Tune
Modulation Assign Auto, On, Off
Changes the pitch of the selected part in steps of 1
cent (1/100 semi-tone).
Auto: The keyboard part only responds to backward
movements of the BENDER/MODULATION lever when
no split setting causes it to be to the left of other
keyboard parts. In other words: parts you can play
with your left hand after selecting a split no longer
respond to modulation messages. But they will while
the keyboard is not split.
Parameter
Setting
Fine Tune
–100~0~+100
Portamento Mode
You can set the selected part to mono(phonic) mode.
“Mono” means that you can only play one note at a
time. You could select this mode to play a trumpet or
woodwind part in a more natural way.
On: The keyboard part always responds to backward
movements of the BENDER/MODULATION lever.
“Poly”, on the other hand, means that you can play
Off: The part in question does not respond to back-
chords using the selected part.
ward movements of the BENDER/MODULATION lever.
Parameter
Setting
Cut Off
This filter parameter allows you to make the selected
Portamento Mode Poly, Mono
sound darker or brighter. Positive settings mean that
more overtones will be allowed to pass, so that the
sound becomes brighter. The further this value is set
in the negative direction, the fewer overtones will be
allowed to pass and the sound will become softer
(darker).
Portamento Time
“Portamento” means that the pitch doesn’t change in
clearly defined steps: it produces glides from one
note to the next. Use the this parameter to specify
the speed at which those glides are carried out. The
higher the value, the slower the transitions.
Characteristics of a low-pass filter
Setting
Parameter
Setting
Portamento Time
0~127
Frequency
Bender Assign
Cutoff frequency
This parameter allows you to specify for each key-
board part how it should respond to Pitch Bend mes-
sages.
NOTE
For some sounds, positive (+) Cutoff settings will cause no
noticeable change because the preprogrammed Cutoff
parameter is already set to its maximum value.
Parameter
Setting
Bender Assign
Auto, On, Off
Parameter
Setting
Auto: The keyboard part only responds to left/right
movements of the BENDER/MODULATION lever when
no split setting causes it to be to the left of other
keyboard parts. In other words: parts you can play
with your left hand after selecting a split no longer
respond to pitch bend messages. But they will while
the keyboard is not split.
Cut Off
–64~+63
Resonance
When the Resonance value is increased, the over-
tones in the area of the cutoff frequency will be
emphasized, creating a sound with a strong charac-
ter.
On: The keyboard part always responds to left/right
movements of the BENDER/MODULATION lever.
Parameter
Setting
Resonance
–64~+63
Off: The part in question does not respond to left/
right movements of the BENDER/MODULATION lever.
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Menu options
C1
NOTE
The function of this parameter depends on the sound
For some sounds, negative (–) “Resonance” settings may
produce no noticeable change because the Resonance is
already set to the minimum value.
you assigned to the selected part. It may influence
the filter and resonance setting, switch between the
organ samples with the fast and slow Rotary modu-
lation, etc.
Attack (only for Tones)
This parameter adjusts the onset of the sound. Nega-
tive values speed up the attack, so that the sound
becomes more aggressive.
Parameter
Setting
C1
Parameter
Setting
Attack
–64~+63
‘Tone Part MFX’ parameters
contains a multi-effects processor that can be used for
processing any keyboard part you like. See “Mfx” on
p. 58. (There are also 3 Mfx processors for the rhythm/
song parts).
Decay
This parameter adjusts the time over which the
sound’s volume and cutoff frequency fall from the
highest point of the attack down to the sustain level.
Parameter
Setting
Mfx Switch
Decay
–64~+63
Select “Off” if you don’t need the Mfx processor.
Parameter
Setting
NOTE
Percussive sounds usually have a sustain level of “0”. Piano
and guitar sounds are in this category. Holding the keys for
a long time will have little effect on the duration of the
notes you are playing, even if you select a high value here.
Mfx Switch
Off, On
Mfx Type
The BK-5 provides 84 different multi-effect types,
some of which are combinations of two effects for
added flexibility. This parameter allows you to select
the desired type. The available types are:
Release
This parameter adjusts the time over which the sound
will decay after the note is released until it is no
longer heard. The cutoff frequency will also fall
according to this setting.
1. Thru
2. Stereo EQ
3. Overdrive
4. Distortion
5. Phaser
6. Spectrum
7. Enhancer
8. Auto Wah
9. Rotary
10. Compressor
11. Limiter
29. OD‰ Delay
30. DST‰ Chorus
31. DST‰ Flanger
32. DST‰ Delay
33. EH‰ Chorus
34. EH‰ Flanger
35. EH‰ Delay
36. Chorus‰ DLY
37. Flanger‰ DLY
38. CHO‰ Flanger
39. CHO/DLY
57. VK Rotary
58. 3D Chorus
59. 3D Flanger
60. 3D Step Flgr
61. Band Chorus
62. Band Flanger
63. Band Step Flg
64. VS Overdrive
65. VS Distortion
66. GT Amp Simul
67. Gate
68. Long Delay
69. Serial Delay
70. MLT Tap DLY
71. Reverse DLY
72. Shuffle DLY
73. 3D Delay
Parameter
Setting
Release
–64~+63
Vibrato Rate
This parameter adjusts the speed of the pitch modu-
lation. Positive (+) settings make the preset pitch
modulation faster and negative (–) settings make it
slower.
12. Hexa-Chorus
13. Trem Chorus
14. Space-D
40. Flanger/DLY
41. CHO/Flanger
42. Isolator
Parameter
Setting
Vibrato Rate
–64~+63
15. St. Chorus
16. St. Flanger
17. Step Flanger
18. St. Delay
19. Mod. Delay
20. 3 Tap Delay
21. 4 Tap Delay
22. Time Delay
23. 2 Pitch Shifter
24. FBK Pitch
25. Reverb
43. Low Boost
44. Super Filter
45. Step Filter
46. Humanizer
47. Speaker Sim
48. Step Phaser
49. MLT Phaser
50. Inf Phaser
51. Ring Modul
52. Step Ring
53. Tremolo
Vibrato Depth
This parameter adjusts the intensity of the pitch
modulation. Positive (+) settings mean that the
“wobble” becomes more prominent, while negative
(–) settings make it shallower.
74. Long Time DLY
75. Tape Echo
76. LoFi Noise
77. LoFi Comp
78. LoFi Radio
79. Telephone
80. Phonograph
81. Step Pitch
82. Sympa Reso
83. Vib-Od-Rotary
84. Center Canc
Parameter
Setting
Vibrato Depth
–64~+63
26. Gate Reverb
27. OD‰ Chorus
28. OD‰ Flanger
54. Auto Pan
55. Step Pan
56. Slicer
Vibrato Delay
This parameter adjusts the time required for the
vibrato effect to begin. Positive (+) settings increase
the time before vibrato will begin and negative set-
tings shorten the time.
NOTE
Some of the names shown above may be abbreviated in the
display.
Parameter
Setting
Vibrato Delay
–64~+63
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
r
‘Performance Edit’ parameters
Mfx Edit
Volume
If you also want to edit the parameters of the
Adjusts the volume of the selected rhythm part.
Selecting “0” means that the part is question is no
longer audible.
selected effect type, press the [ENTER/SELECT] button
to jump to the “Mfx Edit” page. You can then use the
[CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to edit the available parame-
ters.
Parameter
Setting
Volume
0~127
The first two parameters for each Mfx type are “Cho-
rus Send” (0~127) and “Reverb Send” (0~127). They
allow you to specify whether—and to what
extent—the Mfx signal should be processed by the
Chorus and/or Reverb effect.
Exp. Pedal
Select “Off” if you don’t need pedal expression for the
selected part. This means that the rhythm part in
question no longer responds to an expression pedal
you may have connected to the SWITCH/EXPRESSION
socket.
‘Rhythm Parts’ parameters
This function group can be selected using [MENU] but-
ton ‰ “Performance Edit” ‰ “Rhythm Parts”.
Parameter
Setting
Exp. Pedal
Off, On
Exp. Pedal All Parts On
If you are not sure which rhythm parts still receive
expression messages, and if you want all to receive
them, you can select this field and press the [ENTER/
SELECT] button.
Exp. Pedal All Parts Off
If you are not sure which rhythm parts still receive
expression messages, and if no rhythm part should
receive them, you can select this field and press the
The parameters of this function group apply to the eight
Arranger parts (i.e. the parts used to play back the
selected rhythm).
Split
1. Use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial and the
[ENTER/SELECT] button to select the rhythm
part you want to edit (ADrum, ABass, Acc1,
Acc2, Acc3, Acc4, Acc4, Acc5, Acc6).
This page allows you to set two keyboard-related
parameters. It can be selected using [MENU] button ‰
“Performance Edit” ‰ “Split”.
The display shows the settings for the selected part.
2. Use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the
desired parameter(s), then press the [ENTER/
SELECT] button.
3. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to set the
value.
The following parameters are available:
Mute
Allows you to mute the selected part, so that it is no
NOTE
longer audible.
This page can also be selected by pressing and holding the
[SPLIT] button.
Parameter
Setting
Split Point
Mute
Off, On
The “Split Point” parameter allows you to set the split
point.
Solo
Allows you to solo the selected part, which means
that all other rhythm parts are switched off.
Parameter
Setting
Split Point
C#2~B6
Parameter
Explanation
Solo
Off, On
NOTE
After pressing the [ENTER/SELECT] button, you can set the
split point either by rotating the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial or
by simply pressing the corresponding key on the keyboard.
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Menu options
Lower Hold
‘Arranger Setting’ parameters
This function group can be selected using [MENU] but-
ton ‰ “Performance Edit” ‰ “Arranger Setting”.
This parameter allows you to set the Hold function
for the LWR part.
Parameter
Setting
Lower Hold Off, On
If you set this parameter to “On”, the notes of the
LWR part go on sounding until you play other notes
in the left keyboard area. (This function is only avail-
able while the [SPLIT] button lights.)
If you select “Off”, the LWR part stops sounding as
soon as you release all keys in the left area.
The parameters of this function group apply to the
Arranger as a whole and allow you to fine-tune its
behavior.
Key
This function allows you to transpose the BK-5’s pitch in
semi-tone steps. Depending on the mode setting, this
tion. It can be selected using [MENU] button ‰ “Perfor-
mance Edit” ‰ “Key” or by pressing the [KEY] button. See
“Changing the key” on p. 41.
Arranger
Select “Off” if you only need the drum part of the
selected rhythm and no melodic accompaniment
parts (ABass, ACC1~6).
Parameter
Setting
NOTE
Arranger
Off, On
Pressing and holding the [KEY] button locks this parameter
and keeps it from changing when you select Performance
memories.
Zone
When you press the [SPLIT] button, the selected
rhythm pattern is controlled by the chords you play
in the left half of the keyboard.
You can also tell the Arranger to scan another part of
the keyboard for usable chords. Though “Left” is
probably the most popular setting, you could select
“Right” to have the Arranger scan the right half of
the keyboard.
scan the entire keyboard (“Whole”).
The range of the left and right keyboard areas
depends on the “Split Point” setting (page 61).
Key
Allows you to set the desired transposition interval.
Each value represents a semi-tone step. Select “0” if
no transposition is required.
Parameter
Setting
Zone
Off, Left, Right, Whole
Parameter
Setting
Type
Key
–6~+5
Another important choice is how you want to trans-
Mode
Allows you to specify which sections should be trans-
posed by the “Key” parameter.
Parameter
Setting
Type
Standard, Pianist1, Pianist2, Intelligent,
Easy
Parameter
Setting
Mode
Song, Keyboard, Song+Keyboard
NOTE
Song: Only song playback is transposed.
If the “Arr Type” parameter (page 66) is set to “On”, this
“Type” setting has no effect.
Keyboard: Only the notes you play on the keyboard
are transposed. (This also affects the chord informa-
tion transmitted to the Arranger.)
Standard: This is the normal chord recognition
mode.
Song+Keyboard: Both song playback and the key-
board parts are transposed. Rhythm playback is also
transposed.
Pianist1: In this mode, the BK-5 only recognizes
chords that consist of at least three notes. Playing
only two notes will not cause the rhythm’s key to
change.
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
r
‘Performance Edit’ parameters
Pianist2: Same as “Pianist1” while the Hold pedal is
not pressed. If you press the Hold pedal, the BK-5
even recognizes “chords” when you press only one
note. If the hold pedal is still pressed, chord recogni-
tion continues up to a maximum of 5 played keys.
The setting of this parameter is neither saved to the Perfor-
mance memories, nor to the Global area (see “Save Global”
on p. 70). The “Lock” setting can also be activated by press-
ing and holding the [TAP TEMPO] button.
Intelligent: Select this option when you want the
chord recognition function to supply the missing
notes of the chords you play.
Fill In Half Bar
When this parameter is “On”, the length of the Fill-
Ins, which are played when the [AUTO FILL IN] button
lights, is halved.
Easy: This is another “intelligent” chord fingering sys-
tem. It works as follows:
Parameter
Setting
Major chords
Minor chords
Press the key that corresponds to the
chord’s fundamental.
Fill In Half Bar
Off, On
Certain pop songs in 4/4 contain bars that only last
two beats. The usual place for such a bar is between
the first and the second verse. Another favorite posi-
tion for “halved” bars is at the end of a chorus or the
bridge. Your BK-5 allows you to faithfully reproduce
these “anomalies” using this function. This does not
change rhythm playback right away. Only when a fill-
in or another VARIATION pattern starts will the “Fill-
in Half Bar” function be activated and play half the
number of beats of the accompaniment pattern you
selected.
Fundamental + any black key to the
left of the fundamental.
Seventh chords Fundamental + any white key to the
left of the fundamental.
Minor seventh
chords
Fundamental + any black key to the
left + any white key to the left.
Arranger Hold
This function sustains the notes you play in the chord
recognition area (“Zone”). Select “Off” if you want the
accompaniment to stop as soon as the keys in that
zone are released. This parameter is switched “On” by
default.
The FILL RIT function is suitable for ballads. It causes
the next Fill-In to slow down (“ritardando”). See
“Tempo Change Fill Rit” below for how to set how
Parameter
Setting
Arranger Hold
Off, On
Parameter
Setting
Tempo
Each rhythm has a preset tempo that is recalled
when a rhythm is selected. This parameter allows you
to specify if and when the BK-5 should ignore the
preset tempo and go on using the tempo of the pre-
viously selected rhythm.
Fill Ritardando
Off, On
As the name implies, it is only available while the
[AUTO FILL-IN] button lights.
Parameter
Setting
Tempo
Preset, Auto, Lock
Here is what these three options mean:
Selecting a new rhythm
Setting
Playback is stopped
Playback is running
Preset
Auto
The rhythm's preset tempo is loaded.
(a) Set “Fill Ritardando” to “On”.
(b) Start Arranger playback.
(c) Press a VARIATION [1]~[4] button.
The BK-5 plays a Fill-In. The tempo slows down while
the fill is being played. At the end of the fill, the
rhythm returns to the previously set tempo (this is
called “a tempo”).
The BK-5 loads the
preset tempo of the
new rhythm
The BK-5 doesn’t load
the preset tempo of
the new rhythm. The
new rhythm is played
at the current tempo.
Lock
The BK-5 doesn’t
load the preset
tempo of the new
rhythm. It is played
at the current
tempo.
(d) Press and hold the [EXIT] button to return to the
main page.
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Menu options
Tempo Change Accel/Ritard, CPT, Fill Rit
The “Termpo Change Acceler/Ritard” parameter
‘Melody Intelligent’ parameters
This function group can be selected using [MENU] but-
ton ‰ “Performance Edit” ‰ “Melody Intelligent” or by
pressing and holding the [MELODY INTELL] button.
tempo by the amount you set here. To use these
functions, you must assign them to an optional foot-
switch (see p. 70).
There are three Ritardando functions: one for all
rhythm patterns, one for Ending patterns and one for
fill-ins (see “Fill Ritardando” above). They all use the
“Tempo Change” settings on the following page.
The following parameters are available:
Switch
Select “On” if you want to add a MELODY INTELL part.
This part is triggered by the chord recognition of the
BK-5’s Arranger and plays automatic harmonies that
are added to the melody that you are playing using
the UP1 part. You can choose from among 18 har-
mony types (see below).
Parameter
Setting
Tempo Change Accel/Ritard 5%~92%
Parameter
Setting
Tempo Change Fill Rit
5%~92%
Switch
Off, On
Tempo Change Accel/Ritard: Allows you to set the
degree (ratio) by which the tempo changes when the
“Acceler” or “Ritard” function is triggered. Example: if
means that the tempo drops to q= 80 or rises to q=
120.
NOTE
This “Switch” parameter can also be assigned to an optional
footswitch (see p. 69).
Type
Allows you to select one of the 18 harmony types:
Tempo Change CPT: Use this parameter to specify
most cases, 480 CPT (i.e. one measure) is probably the
most musical choice.
Parameter
Setting
Type
1:Duet, 2:Organ 3:Combo, 4:Strings,
5:Choir, 6:Block, 7:Big Band, 8:Country,
9:Traditional, 10:Brodway, 11:Gospel,
12:Romance, 13:Latin, 14:Country Guitar,
15:Country Ballad, 16:Waltz Organ,
17:Octave Type1, 18:Octave Type2
Tempo Change Fill Rit: This parameter allows you to
specify to what extent fill-in playback should be
slowed down when the “Fill Ritardando” function is
on.
2nd Tone
Depending on the selected “Type” setting, a second
harmony is added to the “Melody Intelligent” part. If
you like, you can select the desired Tone for the sec-
ond harmony voice using this parameter.
■ Using the Ritardando/Accelerando functions
ceed as follows:
• Assign the “Arr Rit” or “Arr Acc” function to an
optional footswitch (see p. 70).
• Press the [START/STOP] button to start rhythm play-
back.
Parameter
Setting
2nd
The Tone of the selected family.
Intell Threshold
This value represents the lowest velocity value
• Press the assigned footswitch.
(between “0” and “127”) of the UP1 part that triggers
the “Melody Intelligent” part. If you don’t need this
switching function, select “0”.
Parameter
Setting
Intell Threshold
0~127
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
r
‘Global’ parameters
Level
Allows you to set the level of the “Melody Intelligent”
‘Global’ parameters
part to ensure that the harmonies blend in with the
rest.
The settings of the “Global” parameters can be saved to
changes are lost when you switch off the BK-5.
Parameter
Setting
See “Save Global” on p. 70 for how to save these set-
tings.
Level
0~127
Expression Pedal
This parameter allows you to specify whether or not
the “Melody Intelligent” part should respond to
movements of the optional expression pedal you
Parameter
Setting
Expression Pedal
Off, On
Hold Pedal
This parameter allows you to specify whether or not
the “Melody Intelligent” part’s notes can be held with
Display Contrast
This parameter can be selected using [MENU] button
‰ “Global” ‰ “Display Contrast”.
Parameter
It is used to change the contrast of the BK-5’s display
in case you find it difficult to read.
Hold Pedal
Auto, On, Off
Parameter
Setting
Display Contrast
1~10
Display Brightness
Save As Default
This parameter can be selected using [MENU] button
‰ “Global” ‰ “Display Brightness”.
This function allows you to save the current “Perfor-
mance Edit” settings as default settings. These set-
tings are loaded each time you switch on the BK-5.
It is used to change the brightness of the BK-5’s dis-
play in case you find it difficult to read.
Parameter
Setting
Display Brightness 0~10
Tuning
This parameter can be selected using [MENU] button
‰ “Global” ‰ “Tuning”.
1. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
“YES”, then press the [ENTER/SELECT] but-
ton to define the current settings as the
default state.
The display shows a confirmation message.
the default state, rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to
select “NO”, then press the [ENTER/SELECT] button.
The BK-5 then returns to the “Performance Edit”
page.
This parameter allows you to tune your BK-5 to
acoustic instruments that cannot be tuned. The
default is 440.0Hz.
Parameter
Setting
Tuning
Rhythm/SMF TrackMute
See “Using ‘Track Mute’ and ‘Center Cancel’” on p. 42.
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Menu options
Scale Tune Switch
This parameter can be selected using [MENU] button
One Touch Hold
This parameter can be selected using [MENU] button
‰ “Global” ‰ “Scale Tune Switch”.
‰ “Global” ‰ “One Touch Hold”.
The parameters on this page allow you to filter cer-
tain “One Touch” settings. Select “On” for the settings
you do not want to load along with the remaining
One Touch settings when you press a ONE TOUCH
button.
Parameter
Value
Explanation
Upper
Off, On
Select “On” if the “Scale
Tune” settings (see below)
should apply to the
Upper1, Upper2 and Mel-
ody Intell parts.
Parameter
Tempo
Setting
Off, On
Off, On
Off, On
Off, On
Off, On
Lower
Off, On
Off, On
Select “On” if the “Scale
Tune” settings (see below)
should apply to the Lower
part.
Tone Part
Intro/Ending
Variation
Rhythm
Select “On” if the “Scale
Tune” settings (see below)
should apply to the
rhythm parts.
Expression Pedal
Performance Hold
This page can be selected using [MENU] button ‰
“Global” ‰ “Performance Hold”.
Scale Tune
This parameter can be selected using [MENU] button
‰ “Global” ‰ “Scale Tune”.
The parameters on this page allow you to filter cer-
tain Performance settings. Select “On” for the set-
tings you do not want to load along with the remain-
ing settings when you select a Performance memory.
This parameter allows you to change the tuning of all
notes of one octave, which may come in handy to
create oriental tunings.
Parameter
Value
Explanation
Parameter
Rhythm*
Tempo*
Setting
Off, On
Off, On
Off, On
Off, On
Off, On
Off, On
Off, On
Off, On
Off, On
Off, On
C~B
-64~0~+63 Changes the pitch of
the notes C~B in steps
of 1 cent. The value
that you specify is
(each note can
be set individu-
ally)
Expression Pedal
Tone*
applied to all notes of
the same name. If you
change the tuning of
the “C”, that value is
added to, or subtracted
from, all Cs (C1, C2, C3,
etc.). (“–50” means that
the note in question is
tuned a quarter tone
down.)
Tone Part
Split
Lower Octave
Arr Type
Key*
Bass Inversion
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
r
‘Global’ parameters
[*] These parameters can also be switched by pressing and hold-
ing the assigned buttons on the front panel. (See the “Hold to
LOCK” legends.)
Parameter
Setting
Explanation
Count In
Off, 1bar, 2bar This parameter allows
you to switch the
Metronome
Count-In function on
(“1bar” or “2bar”) or
off. When on, the met-
ronome will count in
the specified number
of measures (bars)
These parameters can be selected using [MENU] but-
ton‰ “Global” ‰ “Metronome”.
before the rhythm or
SMF song starts play-
ing. (This setting is not
available for audio
songs.)
[*] This setting is not memorized when you use “Save Global”.
Video Settings
The BK-5 is equipped with a metronome that can be
used in various situations.
These parameters can be selected using [MENU] but-
ton‰ “Global” ‰ “Video Settings”.
NOTE
While rhythm or SMF song playback is stopped, the
[TAP TEMPO] button flashes in red to indicate the selected
tempo.
(a) Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the
“Metronome” field.
(b) Press the [ENTER/SELECT] button to highlight the
setting.
(c) Rotate the dial to select “On”.
The metronome starts counting.
The following table shows the Video Setting parame-
ters.
NOTE
The metronome is not available while an audio song file
(mp3 or WAV) is selected.
Parameter
Setting
Explanation
Video Mode
PAL, NTSC
Select the setting that
corresponds to the for-
mat used by the con-
nected screen.
The metronome parameters you can set are:
Parameter
Setting
Explanation
Aspect Ratio
Full, Center
Specify the appropri-
ate aspect ratio for the
screen you are using.
Metronome*
Off, On
Select “On” to activate
the metronome.
Volume
0~127
Sets the metronome’s
level.
NOTE
If you work with a TV set, do not forget to select the correct
channel (“AV” or something to that effect, see the manual
that came with your set).
Time Signature 1~32/16, 8,
4, 2
Specifies the metro-
nome’s time signature.
Mode
Always, Play,
Rec
Always: The metro-
nome even counts
when playback is
stopped.
Lyrics Settings
This page can be selected using [MENU] button ‰
“Global” ‰ “Lyrics Settings”.
Play: The metronome
only sounds while the
rhythm or song is play-
ing.
Rec: The metronome
only sounds during
rhythm recording
(using the “Rhythm
Composer”).
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Menu options
The following table shows the “Lyrics Settings”
parameters.
Parameter
Setting
Explanation
Perform Next
Song
Off, On
At the end of the cur-
rent song, the next
song in the Perfor-
mance List starts auto-
matically. If the
Performance List step
refers to a rhythm, the
rhythm in question is
loaded, but you will
need to start manually
by pressing the [START/
STOP] button.
Parameter
Setting
Explanation
Background
Mode
Color, Logo,
User
Color: The back-
ground is empty but
uses the selected color
(see below).
Logo: The BK-5’s logo
is shown as back-
ground.
User: The BK-5 uses
the selected .JPG pic-
ture as background.
See xx.
UP1 EQ/MFX
Link
Off, On
If you select “on”, the
BK-5 selects suitable
MFX and equalizer set-
tings for each Tone
you assign to the
Background
Color
1~8
Choose the back-
ground color.
Highlight Color 1~8
Choose the highlight
color.
Upper1 part.
Row Displaying 2, 4
Allows you to specify
the number of lines to
be used for displaying
lyrics.
–6, +0 dB
recording level for
your own perfor-
mances (see p. 52). The
setting of the [VOL-
UME] knob does not
affect the recording
level. (Default setting:
+0dB)
Chord View
Off, On
Select “On” if the BK-5
should display chord
symbols along with the
lyrics.
Utility
Rec Audio Sync Off, On
Off: Choose this set-
ting when you want to
start recording before
starting rhythm or
song playback.
The “Utility” parameters are found on the display
page that can be selected using [MENU] button‰
“Global” ‰ “Utility”.
On: Choose this set-
ting when you want to
be able to start record-
ing simultaneously
with rhythm/song
playback. When you
choose this setting,
pressing the [AUDIO
REC] button will stop
both playback and the
recorder.
The following table shows the utility parameters.
Parameter
Setting
Explanation
Audio In Level 0~127
Allows you to set the
nals received via the
INPUT (STEREO) socket.
SMF Quick Start Off, 2nd Bar,
1st Note
Off: Playback starts at
the very beginning of
the song file (which
may contain a few
silent bars).
2nd Bar: Causes play-
back to start from
measure 2 of the
selected Standard MIDI
File.
1st Note: This is basi-
cally the same as the
above, except that
playback starts on the
first note of the
Audio In Center Off, On
Canc
Select “On” if the “Cen-
ter Cancel” function
(see p. 42) should also
affect the signals
received via the AUDIO
INPUT sockets.
selected song.
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
r
‘Global’ parameters
Parameter
Setting
Explanation
The “Pedal Switch” setting is found on the display
page that can be selected using [MENU] button‰
“Global” ‰ “Pedal Switch”.
USB Driver
Generic,
Original
Generic: Choose this if
you want to use the
standard USB driver
that was included with
your computer. Nor-
mally, you should use
this mode.
Original: Choose this
if you want to use a
USB driver down-
loaded from the
Roland website
(www.roland.com).
If you do not change the factory setting, the foot-
switch is assigned to the “Start/Stop” function.
Recall MIDI Set Off, Key/
Rhythm, PK
Series, Song,
This parameter selects
the MIDI Set whose
settings are loaded
The following table shows the functions you can
assign to the footswitch.
User1, User2, when the BK-5 is
User3, User4, switched on. Select
User5, User6, “Off” if no MIDI Set
Function
Explanation
Start/Stop
Starts and stops rhythm or song
playback. Same function as the
[START/STOP] button.
User7, User8
should be recalled
when the BK-5 is
switched on.
Intro
Ending
Same functions as the [INTRO],
[VARIATION2], [VARIATION3],
[VARIATION4], [BASS INV] buttons.
See “Using rhythms” on p. 27.
Auto Off*
Off,
This parameter allows
you to cause the BK-5
to switch itself off
after the selected
number of minutes if
you are not using it.
The default setting is
“30”. Select “Off” if you
prefer not to use this
function.
10 (5)
30 (15)
240 (30)
Variation1
Variation2
Variation3
Variation4
Bass Inversion
Arranger Hold
Allows you to switch the Arranger
Hold function on and off. See
page 63.
The values in paren-
theses indicate when
the pop-up count-
down appears.
Arranger Chord
Off
Allows you to switch the Arranger’s
played.
Visual Ctrl
Mode
MVC, V-LINK
This parameter allows
you to select the visual
control mode. The
option to select
Half Bar On Fill In Allows you to switch the “Fill In Half
Bar” function on and off. See
page 63.
depends on the mes-
sages supported by the
external device: MIDI
Visual Control (MVC) or
V-LINK.
Break Mute
When you press the footswitch,
rhythm playback is muted for the
remainder of the current measure.
Reset/Start
This function allows you to have the
BK-5 start on the first beat of the
currently selected rhythm pattern
when you press the assigned foot-
switch. Use it when you are accom-
panying a singer or soloist whose
timing is a little shaky and suddenly
notice that the playback lags one or
two beats behind the singer/soloist.
Version Info
n.nn
Shows the version
number of the BK-5’s
operating system.
[*] When the BK-5 has been switched off by this function, you
need to press the [POWER] button, wait a few seconds, then
press the button again to switch the BK-5 back on. (Do not
switch it on too quickly.)
Split
gent” and “Pianist2” modes. When
the former is selected, the chord rec-
ognition area (see “Zone” on p. 62) is
automatically set to “Left”. When
you switch to “Pianist1”, the chord
recognition area is automatically set
to “Whole”.
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Menu options
• “Rename” function (see p. 47).
Function
Explanation
Parameter
Setting
Scale Upper
Allows you to assign the selected
two Upper parts.
Language
Latin, Cyrillic, East Europe
Scale Lower
Up2
Allows you to assign the selected
Scale Tune (see p. 66) setting to the
two Upper parts.
Save Global
This function allows you to save all “Global” parameter
settings to ensure that they are loaded automatically
each time you switch the BK-5 on.
Allows you to switch the Upper2
part on and off.
Perf. Next
Perf. Prev
Allows you to select the next or pre-
vious Performance.
Portamento
Pressing the footswitch activates the
“Portamento Time” setting. When
the footswitch is released, the “Por-
tamento Time” setting is not used. To
hear this effect, you need to set a
“Portamento Time” value (see p. 59).
Hold
Soft
Sostenuto
The assigned footswitch can be used
pedal).
You can select this function using [MENU] button ‰
“Global” ‰ “Save Global”.
1. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
“YES”, then press the [ENTER/SELECT] but-
ton to define the current settings as the
default state.
Lower Hold
Track Mute
AudioXfade
The footswitch is assigned to the
“Lower Hold” function (see p. 62).
Same function as the [TRACK MUTE]
button.
The display shows a confirmation message.
dial to select “NO”, then press the [ENTER/SELECT]
button. The BK-5 then returns to the “Performance
Edit” page.
The footswitch can be used to acti-
vate a crossfade between two files.
To make this work, select a different
song while the current song is being
played back and press the foot-
switch. The BK-5 creates a brief
blend between the current and the
next song. (This function is only
available between two audio songs.)
NOTE
The metronome status (On/Off, see page 67) is not saved to
the Global area.
Fade Out
This function gradually decreases
the volume until it reaches zero. At
that time, song or rhythm playback
stops automatically.
One Touch Edit
See “Using the ‘One Touch’ function” on p. 31.
Melody Intelligent Allows you to control the “Switch”
parameter of the “Melody Intelli-
gent” function (see p. 64).
MFX On/Off
Arranger Rit
Allows you to switch the MFX for the
Allows you to activate the Arranger’s
“Tempo Change Ritard” function
(page 64).
Arranger Acc
Allows you to activate the Arranger’s
“Tempo Change Accel” function
(page 64).
Language
set to be used for the following:
• Lyrics display (for files that contain lyrics)
• “Search” functions (see p. 37)
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
r
Mastering Tools
5. If none of the preset memories contains the
settings you need, press the [ENTER/SELECT]
button to select and set the following
parameters:
Mastering Tools
The BK-5 contains an effects processor that applies to
all real-time, rhythm and SMF song parts.
This processor is called “Mastering Tools”, because it
allows you to perfect the signal mix to adapt it to the
sound system you are using.
Parameter
Setting
Explanation
Level
0~127
Use this parameter to set
the compressor’s input level.
The higher the value, the
stronger the three frequency
bands are compressed.
The parameters discussed here can be selected using
[MENU] button ‰ “Mastering Tools”.
The value you set here is
added to the “Level” settings
of the three bands. Do not
set this parameter to “0” if
the compressor is switched
on, because doing so means
that the keyboard parts, the
SMF song or Rhythm parts
are no longer audible.
Gain
–12~0~
12dB
Use this parameter to cor-
rect the level at the com-
pressor’s outputs. If the
settings of the remaining
parameters lead to a signifi-
cantly lower level, select a
positive value. If your set-
tings lead to a significantly
higher level, select a nega-
the level is neither boosted
nor attenuated.
Compressor
This multi-band compressor/limiter allows you to pro-
cess three frequency ranges separately. A compressor
reduces high levels (peaks) and boosts low levels,
smoothing out fluctuations in volume.
To edit the Compressor parameters, use [MENU] button
‰ “Mastering Tools” ‰ “Compressor”.
High/Mid/Low: Because “Attack”, “Release”, “Threshold”,
“Ratio” and “Level” are the same for each band, we will
only discuss them once. As you see, each of the three fre-
quency ranges has its own set of parameters that allow
you to specify their behavior.
Attack
0~100ms Use this parameter to spec-
ify how fast the compressor
of the band in question
1. Select a keyboard part, an SMF song or a
rhythm and start playback.
should start processing the
signal once the level of that
band exceeds the “Thresh-
old” level. Choose a smaller
value if you prefer a com-
pression similar to that of
FM radio stations. Higher
values may yield a “snap-
pier” or “funkier” sound.
2. Set the “Switch” parameter to “On” to acti-
vate the compressor.
The compressor is now active. (Select “Off” to switch
the compressor back off.)
3. Use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the
“Preset” parameter, then press the [ENTER/
SELECT] button.
4. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
Release
50~
5000ms
This parameter allows you to
specify how fast the com-
pressor of the corresponding
band should stop working
when the signal level drops
below the “Threshold” value.
one of the available presets.
The available presets are:
1. Hard Comp
2. Soft Comp
3. Low Boost
4. Mid Boost
5. High Boost
6. Standard
7. User
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Menu options
The display shows a confirmation message.
Parameter
Setting
Explanation
the default state, rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to
select “NO”, then press the [ENTER/SELECT] button.
The BK-5 then returns to the “Compressor” page.
Threshold
–36~0dB
This parameter allows you to
set the level the frequency
band (“High”, “Mid” or
“Low”) must reach to trigger
its compressor. The lower
the value, the more notice-
able the compression will be.
NOTE
There is only one “User” memory for your own settings. By
saving new settings, you therefore overwrite the previous
ones.
Ratio
1:1.0~
1:INF
Use this parameter to spec-
ify how strongly the level
should be reduced when the
band’s level exceeds the
NOTE
When you switch on the BK-5, it automatically loads the
“User” settings.
“Threshold” level. “1:2.0”, for
example, means that level
values above the “Threshold”
level are halved. “1:INF” is
useful if you set “Threshold”
to “0dB” or thereabout. This
produces a limiter effect,
which means that no signal
level will ever exceed the
“Threshold” value. This may
help you protect the speak-
ers of the PA system etc.
Equalizer
To edit the Equalizer parameters, use [MENU] button ‰
“Mastering Tools” ‰ “Equalizer”.
Level
–24~
+24dB
This parameter allows you to
establish the desired mix
among the three compressor
bands. Choose a negative
value to decrease the level,
or a positive one to increase
it. Choose “0” for a band
whose level is OK as is.
The equalizer has the same function as the TREBLE, MID
and BASS knobs on a mixer: it allows you to color the
sound, or to apply tonal corrections.
Split High
Split Low
2000~
12000Hz
These two parameters spec-
ify the frequency where two
bands are separated. The
compressor has three bands,
and so there are two cross-
over frequencies you can
set: “High” between the
“Mid” and “High” ranges;
and “Low” between the
1. Select a keyboard part, an SMF song or a
rhythm and start playback.
2. Set the “Switch” parameter to “On” to acti-
vate the equalizer.
The equalizer is now active and will affect the key-
board parts and SMF song or rhythm playback.
(Select “Off” to switch the equalizer back off.)
80~800Hz
3. Use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the
“Preset” parameter, then press the [ENTER/
SELECT] button.
“Mid” and “Low” ranges.
4. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
Write User
This function allows you to save the settings you
made on the “Compressor” page.
one of the available presets.
The available presets are:
1. Flat
2. Rock
3. Pop
4. Jazz
5. Classic
6. Standard
7. User
1. Press the [WRITE] button.
2. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
“YES”, then press the [ENTER/SELECT] but-
ton to save the current settings.
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
r
Mastering Tools
5. If none of the preset memories contains the
settings you need, you can change the fol-
lowing parameters by first pressing the
[ENTER/SELECT] button and then using the
[CURSOR÷VALUE] dial.
Parameter
Setting range
Explanation
Mid Q
0.5, 1, 2, 4, 8
Use this parameter to
specify the width of the
“Mid Frequency” band
that you want to boost
or cut. Smaller values
mean that neighboring
frequencies above/below
that value are also
Parameter
Setting range
Explanation
Level
0~127
Use this parameter to set
the equalizer’s input
level. This may be neces-
sary when the level of
the input signals is so
high that the sound dis-
torts.
affected.
Mid Gain
–15~15dB
Use this parameter to set
the level of the selected
“Mid” frequency.
Low Fre-
quency
50, 80, 100,
150, 200, 250, cutoff frequency of the
300, 400Hz
Allows you to set the
NOTE
Do not set this param-
eter to “0” if the equal-
izer is switched on,
because doing so
means that the key-
board parts, SMF song/
rhythm is/are no
low band (this is a shelv-
ing filter).
Low Gain
–15~15dB
Use this parameter to set
the level of the selected
“Low” frequency.
longer audible.
Write User
This function allows you to save the settings you
made on the “Equalizer” page.
Gain
–9~0~9dB
Use this parameter to
correct the level at the
equalizer’s outputs. If
the settings of the
1. Press the [WRITE] button.
remaining parameters
lead to a significantly
lower level, select a posi-
tive value. If your set-
tings lead to a
significantly higher level,
select a negative value.
“0” means that the level
is neither boosted nor
attenuated.
2. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
“YES”, then press the [ENTER/SELECT] but-
ton to save the current settings.
High
Frequency
2000~
12000Hz
Allows you to set the
cutoff frequency of the
high band (this is a
shelving filter).
The display shows a confirmation message.
the default state, rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to
select “NO”, then press the [ENTER/SELECT] button.
The BK-5 then returns to the “Equalizer” page.
High Gain
–15~15dB
Use this parameter to set
the level of the selected
“High” frequency. Posi-
tive values boost
(increase the volume of)
that frequency band,
negative values cut
(attenuate) it.
NOTE
There is only one “User” memory for your own settings. By
saving new settings, you therefore overwrite the previous
ones.
Mid Fre-
quency
200~8000Hz
Allows you to set the
cutoff frequency of the
middle band (this is a
peaking filter).
NOTE
When you switch on the BK-5, it automatically loads the
“User” settings.
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Menu options
This menu allows you to select the following entries:
Makeup Tools (rhythms and SMF)
Menu Option Explanation
These functions allow you to actually edit the selected
rhythm or SMF song (Standard MIDI File) without pay-
ing too much attention to the underlying parameters.
Common
Select this entry to change common
parameters that affect the rhythm or song
as a whole, like the reverb or chorus
effect, the tempo, etc.
NOTE
The “Rhythm Makeup Tools” and “SMF Makeup Tools” func-
tions cannot be used to edit Standard MIDI Files that use the
XG format.
Instrument
Select this entry to change the instru-
ments used in the rhythm or song and
their parameters. See page 75.
Freeze Data Select this entry to “burn” your new set-
tings into the file. Doing so will allow you
to use your new version with any
1. Select the rhythm or SMF song you wish to
modify on the connected USB memory (see
p. 34).
sequencer (software) or compatible
Save
Select this entry to save your song or
rhythm with the “Makeup Tools” settings
You can also select an internal rhythm.
2. Press the [START/STOP] button to start play-
back of the song or rhythm.
This allows you to listen to the song or rhythm before
you start editing it. Press the [START/STOP] button
again to halt playback.
Common
To edit the Common parameters, use [MENU] button ‰
“Makeup Tools” ‰ “Common”.
NOTE
If you selected a rhythm or SMF song on the connected
USB memory, press and hold the [EXIT] button to return to
the main page.
3. Press the [MENU] button.
“Makeup Tools”, then press the [ENTER/
SELECT] button.
If you selected a rhythm in step (1), the display
changes to:
The “Common” parameters on this page apply to the
entire song or rhythm.
1. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
the desired “Common” parameter, then
press the [ENTER/SELECT] button.
If you selected an SMF song in step (1), the display
changes to:
The following parameters are available:
Reverb Type: This parameter allows you to specify
what kind of reverb effect you need. The available
reverb types are:
Setting
Meaning
Original This setting means that the song uses its own
(programmed) reverb settings.
Room1, These types simulate the reverb characteris-
Room2, tics of a room. The higher the number (1, 2 or
Room3
3), the bigger the “room” becomes.
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Makeup Tools (rhythms and SMF)
See “Saving your new rhythm or song (SMF) version”
on p. 80.
Setting
Meaning
Hall1,
Hall2
These types simulate the reverb of a small (1)
or large (2) concert hall and thus sound much
“bigger” than the Room types above.
The changes you make using the procedure described
above can be “burned” into the rhythm/song file using the
“Freeze Data” command (see p. 79). Doing so will allow you
to hear those changes on any sequencer (software) you
use. Changes you don’t “freeze” are nevertheless stored
when you save the edited rhythm/song file—but only the
BK-5 can read them.
Plate
This algorithm simulates the acoustics of a
concert hall.
Delay
A delay effect (no reverb). Works a lot like an
echo effect and thus repeats the sounds.
Pan Delay This is a stereo version of the above delay
effect. It creates repetitions that alternate
between the left and right channels.
Instrument
To edit the Instrument parameters, use [MENU] button
‰ “Makeup Tools” ‰ “Instrument”.
Chorus Type: Chorus broadens the spatial image of
the sound and creates a stereo impression. You can
choose from 8 types of chorus.
Setting
Meaning
Original
The song uses its own (programmed)
chorus settings.
Chorus
1~4
These are conventional chorus effects
that add spaciousness and depth to the
sound.
Fbk Chorus
Flanger
This is a chorus with a flanger-like effect
and a soft sound.
The display now shows all instruments used by the
selected rhythm or SMF song.
This is an effect that sounds somewhat
like a jet airplane taking off and landing.
1. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] to select the
instrument you want to change, then press
the [ENTER/SELECT] button.
ShortDly
This is a full-fledged delay effect that
can be used instead of a chorus or
flanger. As you will see, there are a lot of
parameters you can program.
ShortDlyFb
This is a short delay with many repeats.
Reverb Level & Chorus Level: These parameters
allow you to modify the output level of the Reverb
(or Chorus) processor.
Rhythm Volume/Song Volume: This parameter
allows you to set the overall volume of the selected
rhythm or song if you think it is too loud/soft.
The display changes to:
Rhythm Tempo/Song Tempo: Allows you to change
the rhythm’s or song’s tempo (q= 20~250).
Key: This parameter allows you to transpose all song
parts (except the drums) up to 12 semitones (1
octave) up or down. This value is written to the song
data and used every time you play back this song.
NOTE
This parameter is not available for rhythms.
The [MENU] button’s indicator flashes.
Undo Changes: Select this entry to cancel all
“Rhythm/SMF Makeup Tools” settings you have made
and to revert to the previously saved version.
2. Press the [MENU] button to jump to the
location where the instrument is used.
Playback starts automatically from that point.
2. If you are satisfied with your changes and
wish to preserve them, save your rhythm/
song to the USB memory.
3. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
the parameter you wish to edit, then press
the [ENTER/SELECT] button.
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Menu options
Reverb
NOTE
Use this parameter to set the reverb send level. Nega-
If you select a Drum Set in step (1) above, the parameter
list looks slightly different than for instruments that do not
use a Drum Set. “Drum Sets” are special “Tones” that assign
different sounds to most keys/note numbers, allowing you
(and the BK-5) to play realistic drum and percussion parts.
tive values decrease the current reverb send level,
positive values increase it. (This is a relative setting
that is added to, or subtracted from, the original set-
ting.)
Parameter
Setting
In the following, “(T)” refers to parameters that are only
available for regular instruments (also called “Tones”),
Drum Sets.
Reverb
-127~0~+127
Chorus
Use this parameter to set the chorus send level. Neg-
ative values decrease the current chorus send level,
positive values increase it. (This is a relative setting
that is added to, or subtracted from, the original set-
ting.)
Tone (T), Drum (D)
Allows you to select a different Tone within the
active Tone family. See page 119 for a list of available
Tones and Drum Sets.
Parameter
Setting
While selecting a Tone, you can press a TONE button
to select a different family.
Chorus
-127~0~+127
Parameter
Explanation
Panpot
Use this parameter to change the stereo placement
of the selected instrument. “0” means “no change”,
negative (–) values shift the instrument towards the
left and positive (+) values shift it towards the right.
Tone (T)
Drum (D)
The number of Tones depends on the
selected family.
Mute (T)/Drum Mute (D)
Switches the selected instrument off. The corre-
Parameter
Setting
sponding part is no longer played back. (This setting
only applies to the selected instrument and thus not
necessarily to the entire track.)
Panpot
-127~0~+127
NOTE
NOTE
In the case of Drum Sets, this setting applies to all drum/
percussion instruments. There is also a parameter that can
be set for specific drum instruments. See page 79.
In the case of the drums, you can mute two instrument
groups (“Drum Mute” and “Perc Mute”, see below) sepa-
rately.
Octave (T)
Parameter
Setting
Use this parameter to transpose the selected instru-
ment up or down by up to 4 octaves.
Mute (T)
Off, On
Drum Mute (D)
Parameter
Setting
Octave
-4~0~+4
Solo
Switches off all instruments except the selected
instrument.
Velocity
This parameter allows you to modify the velocity
range of the instrument in question. “0” means that
the recorded velocity values are left untouched, neg-
ative values reduce all velocity values by the same
amount (leaving differences between notes intact),
while positive settings increase all velocity values.
Parameter
Setting
Solo
Off, On
Perc Mute (D)
Suppresses (or adds) the percussion sounds used by
the drum part.
Parameter
Setting
Parameter
Value
Velocity
-127~+127
Perc Mute
Off, On
Cut Off
This filter parameter allows you to make the selected
sound darker or brighter. Positive settings mean that
more overtones are allowed to pass, so that the
sound becomes brighter. The further this value is set
Volume
Adjusts the volume of the selected instrument. Nega-
tive values decrease the current volume, positive val-
ues increase it. (This is a relative setting that is added
to, or subtracted from, the original setting.)
Parameter
Setting
Volume
-127~0~+127
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
r
Makeup Tools (rhythms and SMF)
in the negative direction, the fewer overtones will be
allowed to pass and the sound will become softer
(darker).
Release (T)
This parameter adjusts the time over which the sound
will decay after the note is released until it is no
longer heard. The cutoff frequency will also fall
according to this setting.
Characteristics of a low-pass filter
Setting
Parameter
Setting
Release
-127~+127
Frequency
Cutoff frequency
NOTE
Some sounds already contain natural (sampled) vibrato
whose depth or speed cannot be changed.
Parameter
Setting
Cut Off
-127~+127
Use the following three parameters if you think the
instrument in question has too much (or could use a
little more) vibrato.
NOTE
For some sounds, positive (+) “Cut Off” settings will cause
no noticeable change because the preprogrammed “Cut
Off” parameter is already set to its maximum value.
Vibrato Rate (T)
This parameter adjusts the speed of the pitch modu-
lation. Positive (+) settings make the preset pitch
modulation faster, and negative (–) settings make it
slower.
Resonance
This is a parameter one invariably associates with a
synthesizer. When the “Resonance” value is increased,
the overtones in the area of the cutoff frequency will
be emphasized, creating a sound with a strong char-
acter.
Parameter
Setting
Vibrato Rate
-127~+127
Parameter
Setting
Vibrato Depth (T)
This parameter adjusts the intensity of the pitch
modulation. Positive (+) settings mean that the
“wobble” becomes more prominent, while negative
(–) settings make it shallower.
Resonance
-127~+127
NOTE
For some sounds, negative (–) “Resonance” settings may
produce no noticeable change because the resonance is
already set to the minimum value.
Parameter
Setting
Vibrato Depth
-127~+127
The following parameters allow you to set the
sound’s “envelope”. The envelope parameters affect
both the volume (TVA) and the filter (TVF). The cutoff
frequency will rise as the envelope rises and fall as
the envelope falls.
Vibrato Delay (T)
This parameter adjusts the time required for the
vibrato effect to begin. Positive (+) settings increase
the time before vibrato will begin and negative set-
tings (–) shorten the time.
Parameter
Setting
Attack (T)
This parameter adjusts the onset of the sound. Nega-
Vibrato Delay
-127~+127
tive values speed up the attack, so that the sound
becomes more aggressive.
Mfx
The BK-5 contains 2 multi-effects processors (“Mfx”),
one reverb processor and one chorus processor that
can be used to process rhythms or Standard MIDI
Files.
Parameter
Setting
Attack
-127~+127
Decay (T)
Select “Off” for instruments that don’t need to be
processed by any Mfx.
This parameter adjusts the time over which the
sound’s volume and cutoff frequency fall from the
highest point of the attack down to the sustain level.
Parameter
Setting
Parameter
Setting
Mfx
Off, A, B
Decay
-127~+127
NOTE
If you select “A” or “B”, additional parameters can be edited
(see below).
NOTE
Percussive sounds usually have a sustain level of “0”. Piano
and guitar sounds are in this category. Holding the keys for
a long time will have little effect on the duration of the
notes you are playing, even if you select a high value here.
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Menu options
Mfx Type
Parameter
Setting
Explanation
Allows you to select the desired Mfx type, i.e. the kind
of effect you need. Each Mfx (“A” and “B”) can be
aware, however, that selecting a different type will
affect all instruments that use this Mfx processor. See
page 60 for a list of the available Mfx types.
Mid Q
0.5, 1, 2, 4, 8
Use this parameter to
specify the width of
the “Mid Freq” band
that you want to boost
or cut. Smaller values
mean that neighboring
frequencies above/
below that value are
also affected.
NOTE
Each Mfx can be assigned to as many instruments as you
like. Be aware, however, that selecting a different type will
Mid Gain
–15~1+5 dB
Use this parameter to
set the level of the
selected “Mid Freq”.
Positive values boost
(increase the volume
of) that frequency,
negative values cut
(attenuate) it.
NOTE
While the “Mfx” parameter is set to “Off”, you cannot select
a different type. In that case, the display will show the
message “---”.
Mfx Edit
If you also want to edit the parameters of the
selected effect type, press the [ENTER/SELECT] button
to jump to the “Mfx Edit” page. You can then edit the
available parameters.
Low Freq
Low Gain
90 Hz, 150 Hz, Allows you to set the
180 Hz, 300
Hz, 360 Hz,
600 Hz
cutoff frequency of
the low band (this is a
shelving filter).
Equalizer
Activate this setting if you want to change the timbre
–15~+15 dB
Use this parameter to
set the level of the
selected “Low” fre-
quency.
of the selected instrument.
Parameter
Setting
Equalizer
Off, On
Edit EQ
Drum Instrument (D)
To edit the equalizer parameters, press the [ENTER/
SELECT] button to jump to the “Edit EQ” page. You
can then edit the available parameters:
Parameter
Setting
Explanation
Equalizer
Off, On
you want to change
the timbre of the
selected instrument.
This parameter dupli-
cates the “Equalizer”
above and was added
for your convenience.
If you want to edit the settings for specific instru-
ments of the selected Drum Set, press the [ENTER/
SELECT] button to jump to the “Drum Instrument”
page.
High Freq
High Gain
1500 Hz, 2000 Allows you to set the
Hz, 3000 Hz, cutoff frequency of
4000 Hz, 6000 the high band (this is a
All instruments of the Drum Set being used are dis-
played. Use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the
instrument you want to change, then press the
[ENTER/SELECT] button.
Hz, 8000 Hz,
12000 Hz
shelving filter).
–15~+15 dB
Use this parameter to
set the level of the
You can then use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial and the
[ENTER/SELECT] button to edit the available parame-
ters.
selected “High” fre-
quency. Positive val-
ues boost (increase the
volume of) that fre-
quency, negative val-
ues cut (attenuate) it.
Parameter
Setting
Explanation
Instr.
All Drum Set
Instruments
Select the drum instru-
ment you want to edit.
Parameters for the selected instrument
Mid Freq
200~8000 Hz Allows you to set the
cutoff frequency of
Mute
Off, On
Suppress (or add) the
selected instrument.
the middle band (this is
a peaking filter).
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
r
Makeup Tools (rhythms and SMF)
Parameter
Setting
Explanation
Parameter
Setting
Explanation
Solo
Off, On
Switch off all instru-
ments except the
selected instrument.
Instr. Equalizer Global, Instr,
Off
Global: The drum
instrument uses the
equalizer settings of
the Drum Set it
Volume
Reverb
-127~+127
-127~+127
Use this parameter to
set the volume of the
selected drum instru-
ment.
belongs to.
Instr: The drum instru-
ment uses its own
equalizer settings (see
below).
Off: The drum instru-
ment is not equalized.
Use this parameter to
set the reverb send
level of the selected
effect itself can be
changed on the “Com-
mon” page.
Edit EQ
(Press the
[ENTER/
SELECT] but-
ton)
Provides access to the
currently selected
“Instr. Equalizer” is set
to “Int”). See “Edit EQ”
on p. 78 for a descrip-
tion of the available
Chorus
Panpot
-127~+127
-127~+127
Use this parameter to
set the chorus send
level of the selected
effect itself can be
changed on the “Com-
mon” page.
Undo Changes (Press the
This function allows
you to cancel the
“Drum Instrument (D)”
settings of the cur-
rently selected instru-
ment and to revert to
[ENTER/
SELECT] but-
ton)
Use this parameter to
set the stereo place-
ment of the selected
drum instrument. “0”
means “no change”,
negative values shift
the instrument
towards the left and
positive values shift it
towards the right.
song to the USB memory.
See “Saving your new rhythm or song (SMF) version”
on p. 80.
Velocity
-127~+127
This parameter allows
you to modify the
velocity range of the
drum instrument in
question. “0” means
that the recorded val-
ues are left untouched,
a negative setting
reduces all velocity
values by the same
amount (leaving varia-
tions intact). A posi-
tive setting shifts all
velocity values in a
positive direction.
NOTE
above can be “burned” into the rhythm/song file using the
“Freeze Data” command (see p. 79). Doing so will allow you
use. Changes you don’t “freeze” are nevertheless stored
when you save the edited rhythm/song file—but only the
Freeze Data
To commit your settings, use [MENU] button ‰ “Makeup
Tools” ‰ “Freeze Data”.
Pitch
-127~+127
Use this parameter to
tune the selected drum
instrument higher or
lower. “0” means that
the pitch is left
Before saving your “made-up” song to a USB memory,
you can (but you don’t have to) “commit” your changes,
thereby turning them into “regular” rhythm or song
data.
unchanged.
This may come in handy if you also want to play back
your new rhythm/song version on another arranger
instrument, sequencer or your computer. This operation
is unnecessary for files you only want to use with the
BK-5 or one of the models mentioned above.
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Menu options
If the USB memory already contains a rhythm or
song file of that name, you will be asked whether you
want to overwrite it:
Saving your new rhythm or song (SMF) version
1. If you are happy with your changes and wish
to preserve them, select the “Save” parame-
NOTE
Even rhythms or songs for which you did not perform the
“Freeze Data” command need to be saved using this proce-
dure if you want to keep the changes.
2. Use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial and the
[ENTER/SELECT] button to select a different
location if you do not want to overwrite the
original version.
In this case, select “YES” using the [CURSOR÷VALUE]
dial and press [ENTER/SELECT] to replace the old file
with the new one (the old file will be lost).
3. Press the [WRITE] button (it flashes).
Otherwise, select “NO” and press the [ENTER/SELECT]
button to return to the “Save” page and enter a dif-
ferent name.
selected rhythm or song. If you want to save the new
version under that name (and overwrite the previous
version), skip to step (7) below.
4. Use the TONE buttons to select a different
character.
5. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
the next character position you want to
change.
6. Repeat steps (4) and (5) to complete the
name.
7. Press the [WRITE] button to confirm your
desire to save the rhythm or song.
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Rhythm Composer (programming your own rhythms)
r
■ Looped vs. one-shot patterns
Rhythm Composer (programming
The BK-5 uses two kinds of patterns: looped divisions
and one-shot divisions.
Menu
your own rhythms)
Looped divisions: Looped divisions are accompani-
ments that are repeated until you select another divi-
sion or press [START/STOP] to stop Arranger playback.
The BK-5 provides four programmable looped divi-
sions (VARIATION [1]~[4]).
The BK-5 allows you to program your own rhythms.
Before explaining the details, there are a few concepts
you need to familiarize yourself with.
What are rhythms?
Looped divisions do not select other divisions when
they are finished (because they never end): they keep
playing until you select another division by hand (or
by foot).
■ Patterns (Divisions)
Rhythms are short sequences, or patterns (of four or
eight measures) you can select in real-time. Pattern-
based accompaniments usually consist of the follow-
ing elements:
One-shot divisions: One-shot patterns (or “Divi-
sions”) are only played once and then select a looped
division or stop the Arranger. The BK-5 uses the fol-
lowing one-shot divisions: INTRO [1]~[4], FILL UP [1]~
[3], FILL DOWN [1]~[3] and ENDING [1]~[4].
• The basic groove, i.e. the rhythm that is the backbone
of the song.
• Several alternatives for the basic groove that keep
the accompaniment interesting and suggest some
kind of “evolution” or “variation”.
• Fill-Ins to announce the beginning of new parts.
• An introduction and a closing section (ending).
Programming four to eight patterns for a three-
minute song is usually enough. Just use them in the
right order to make them suitable for your song.
The division type also determines how the respective
tracks are played back. Any track of a looped pattern
that is shorter than another track is repeated until
the longest track is finished. Then, a new cycle begins.
Here’s how you can take advantage of that: if the
drums play the same notes during four measures,
while the rhythm guitar or piano needs four mea-
sures to complete a cycle, recording only one drum
measure is enough, because it is automatically
repeated until the longest track is finished.
The BK-5 allows you to program 54 different patterns
per rhythm, some of which can be selected via dedi-
cated buttons (VARIATION [1]~[4], etc.). Some Pat-
terns are selected on the basis of the chords you play
in the chord recognition area of the keyboard (major,
minor, seventh).
■ Several drum tracks are possible
The Rhythm Composer allows you to assign a Drum
Set to any “Accomp” track, thereby turning it into an
additional drum track.
■ Tracks
Unlike a drum machine, a BK-5 rhythm not only con-
tains the rhythm part (drums & percussion) but also a
melodic accompaniment, such as piano, guitar, bass
and strings lines. That is why the rhythms work with
tracks – eight to be precise.
Clearing the RAM memory (Initialize Rhythm)
the Rhythm Composer.
NOTE
If necessary, you can even record a second drum track.
1. Press the [MENU] button, select “Rhythm
Composer”, then press the [ENTER/SELECT]
button.
The reason why the AccDrums part is assigned to the
first track and the ABass part to the second is that
most programmers and recording artists start by lay-
ing down the rhythm section of a song.
The display changes to:
There are exceptions to this rule, however, so feel free
to start with any other part if that is easier for the
rhythm you are programming.
NOTE
Though there are six (melodic) ACC tracks, most rhythms
only contain two or three melodic accompaniment lines. In
most cases, less means more, i.e. do not program six
melodic accompaniments just because the BK-5 provides
that facility. If you listen very carefully to a CD, you will
discover that it is not the number of instruments you use
that makes a song sound “big” but rather the right notes at
the right time.
2. Press the [MENU] button (its indicator
flashes).
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Menu options
The display changes to:
Parameter
Setting
Explanation
Expression
0~127
Temporary volume
changes (CC11).
Reverb
Chorus
Panpot
0~127
0~127
0~127
Reverb Send (CC91),
i.e. how strongly the
selected track should
be processed by the
reverb effect.
Chorus Send (CC93),
i.e. how strongly the
selected track should
be processed by the
chorus effect.
3. “Initialize Rhythm” is already selected, so
press the [ENTER/SELECT] button.
The display changes to:
The track’s stereo
placement (00[L]~64~
127[R]).
5. Press the [WRITE] button (its indicator
flashes) to confirm your settings.
The settings shown on this display page are sug-
gested as defaults for every new rhythm you pro-
gram. Feel free to change them depending on the
kind of accompaniment you want to prepare:
4. Use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial and [ENTER/
SELECT] button to edit the available param-
eters.
The display changes to:
Parameter
Setting
Explanation
Rec Track
ADrum, ABass, This parameter allows
Acc1, Acc2,
Acc3, Acc4,
Acc5, Acc6
you to select the track
whose settings you
want to change.
Inst
(Tone assigned This is where you select
to the track)
a sound (or Drum Set)
for the track marked
for recording (“Rec
Track”).
6. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
“YES” and press the [ENTER/SELECT] button.
The display returns to the “Rhythm Composer” page,
which only contains the sound assignments you have
just made.
Tempo
20~250
You can already set the
tempo here or leave
that for later.
Time Signature 1/16, 1/4~4/
4…
This value needs to be
set when you initialize
the Rhythm RAM
Select “NO” if you don’t want to initialize the rhythm
memory area.
memory (i.e. now). All
Divisions and Modes
use this time signa-
at a later stage (see
“Time Signature” on
p. 98) and specify that
VARIATION [1] should
use “4/4”, MAIN [2] “6/
8”, etc.
Getting ready for the first track
1. On the “Rhythm Composer” page, use the
[CURSOR÷VALUE] dial and [ENTER/SELECT]
button to select the “Division” parameter.
2. Use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the
Division you want to record (“Intro”, “Main”,
“Fill” or “Ending”).
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Rhythm Composer (programming your own rhythms)
r
3. Press the [AUDIO REC] button.
Parameter
Setting
Explanation
Octave
–4~+4
This parameter allows
you to transpose the
keyboard in octave
steps, which may be
convenient for
extremely high or low
notes – or for using
the special “noises” of
certain sounds.
Mode**
Major, Minor, This parameter allows
The display changes to:
7th, M=m,
M=7, m=7,
M=m=7
you to specify whether
you are about to
record the accompani-
ment for major, minor
or seventh chords. If
you listen to the
rhythm prepared by
Roland, you will notice
that there are slight
differences in the
looped patterns – and
sometimes striking dif-
ferences for Intros and
Endings, with com-
pletely different
4. If necessary, use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial
and [ENTER/SELECT] button to edit the
available parameters.
Parameter
Setting
Explanation
phrases. Such varia-
tions can be prepared
using the “Mode”
Rec Track*
ADrum, ABass, This parameter allows
Acc1, Acc2,
Acc3, Acc4,
Acc5, Acc6
you to select the track
whose settings you
want to record.
parameter.
Division*
Tempo
Intro, Main,
Fill, Ending
Select the pattern you
want to create. This
parameter is linked to
the division you select
on the main “Rhythm
Composer” page.
Inst
Key
(Tone assigned This is where you select
to the track)
a sound (or Drum Set)
for the track marked
for recording (“Rec
Track”).
20~250
The tempo value you
set here is recorded
and regarded as preset
tempo. You can
change it at any stage
in Rhythm Composer
mode, so start by
selecting a tempo that
allows you to record
the music the way you
want it to sound.
C, C#, D, Eb, E, If you want to use the
F, F#, G, Ab, A, accompaniment in a
Bb, B
musically meaningful
way, you need to tell
the BK-5 what key you
are recording in. This is
to ensure that the
chords you play dur-
ing everyday use of
your rhythm with the
BK-5’s Arranger lead to
the correct real-time
transpositions of the
selected Division.
The BK-5 allows you to
record rhythms in any
key. But do set the KEY
parameter to the right
value before recording.
The key of AccDrums
parts cannot be set
(because that doesn’t
make sense).
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Menu options
Parameter
Setting
Explanation
Parameter
Setting
Explanation
Input Quantize Off, 1/4, 1/8,
This corrects minor
timing problems. It
shifts the notes whose
timing is not exactly
right to the nearest
“correct” unit.
Always select a resolu-
tion value that is fine
enough to accept all
note values you play. If
the shortest notes of
your accompaniment
are 1/16th-note trip-
lets, set the value to
“1/16T”.
The preset value, “1/
16”, is OK for most sit-
uations. If you do not
want to quantize your
playing while record-
ing, set this parameter
to “Off”.
Rec Mode
Replace, Mix
Replace: Everything
you record replaces the
data of the selected
track. This mode is
automatically selected
when you activate the
record function for a
track that does not yet
contain data. If you
select a track that
already contains data,
this parameter is set to
“Mix” but could be
changed to “Replace” if
you wanted to over-
write the previous ver-
sion.
1/8T, 1/16,
1/16T, 1/32,
1/32T,
1/64
Mix: The data you
record are added to
the existing data of the
selected track.
[*] The AccDrums track can only use Drum Sets (only the TONE
you can use a second (or third) drum track by assigning the value
111 to control change CC00 of the Acc1~Acc6 track(s). See “Ed-
iting individual rhythm events (Micro Edit)” on p. 99. You can,
however, turn any Acc1~6 track into an additional drum track
when you start recording.
The AccBass track, however, can only be used for bass parts.
[**] You can use one clone function that allows you to record one
part and copy it to up to three Modes each. The “=” sign means
that more than one pattern will be recorded.
[***] Every rhythm pattern must have a set length. Setting the
“Measure Length” value now will help you avoid a lot of confu-
sion once you start recording.
The Arranger tends to add blank bars at the end of a track, which
is usually due to the fact that you stopped recording a little late
(i.e. after the last bar you played). This means that you often
“record” 5 measures instead of 4, for example:
You can also quantize
the track after record-
ing it (page 88).
Count In
Off, 1Meas,
2Meas, Wait
Note
Specifies how long the
count-in should be
before recording starts.
Off: No count-in.
Recording starts as
soon as you press the
[START/STOP] button
(while [AUDIO REC]
flashes).
1Meas: Recording
starts after a 1-bar
count-in.
2Meas: Recording
starts after a 2-bar
count-in.
If you press [START/STOP] after bar 4…
…your rhythm looks like this (5 bars):
Wait Note: Recording
starts as soon as you
play a note on the key-
board. (There will be no
count-in.)
Measure
Length***
Off, 1~136
Specifies the number
of bars the pattern
Furthermore, in Rhythm Composer mode, all patterns are looped
and played back until you press the [START/STOP] button. A
wrong number of measures (5 rather than 4, for example) is very
likely to put you off, so do take the time to set the pattern length
before you start recording.
should contain. The
setting range is 1~136
(or more, depending
on the time signature)
and “Off”. Select “Off”
if you haven’t decided
how long the pattern
should be. In that case,
the length is set when
you stop recording.
It is perfectly possible
to specify a different
length value for each
track and Division.
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Rhythm Composer (programming your own rhythms)
r
Recording a rhythm pattern
Auditioning your rhythm and adding more tracks
(1) Press the [START/STOP] button to listen to your
track.
1. Press the [START/STOP] button.
The main Rhythm Composer page contains two
parameters that allow you to select the pattern you
want to audition. Here’s how to select it:
Depending on the count-in setting, the metronome
now counts down, after which recording starts.
NOTE
If you need a metronome during your performance, press
page is displayed. If you also need the metronome while
listening to what you have recorded, select another metro-
nome mode (see “Mode” on p. 67).
2. Use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the
“MODE” parameter, then press the [ENTER/
SELECT] button.
3. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
“Major”, “Minor” or “7th”.
Only one mode can be selected for playback.
4. Use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial and [ENTER/
SELECT] button to select the “DIVISION”
field.
5. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
one of the Divisions (Intro 1~4, Main 1~4,
Fill Dwn 1~3, Fill Up 1~3, End 1~4).
your rhythm”. If not, record a new version (see “Get-
ting ready for the first track” on p. 82). In that case,
want to do: “Replace”= replace the previous record-
ing with new data; “Mix”= add notes you forgot to
record the first time (see p. 84).
You can also start recording using an optional footswitch
connected to the SWITCH/EXPRESSION socket. See “Start/
Stop” on p. 69.
You could start by playing only the bass drum part. If
you specified the track length before recording, the
Rhythm Composer jumps back to the beginning of
the pattern after the set number of measures. The
second time around you could add the snare drum,
the third time the HiHat, and so on.
Saving your rhythm
When recording another part (ABass~Acc6), do
everything you would do during a live performance:
add modulation, Pitch Bend and to use an optional
hold pedal connected to the HOLD PEDAL jack.
Make it a habit to save your rhythms as frequently as
possible. After all, if someone decided to switch off your
BK-5 now, you would lose everything you have pro-
grammed so far.
1. Go to the main Rhythm Composer page and
press the [MENU] button (its indicator
flashes).
2. Press [START/STOP] again to stop recording.
The display changes to:
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Menu options
Otherwise, select “NO” and press the [ENTER/SELECT]
button to return to the “Save” page and enter a dif-
ferent name.
2. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
“Save” and press the [ENTER/SELECT] but-
ton.
The display now shows the contents of the “My
Rhythms” folder on the connected USB memory.
bass. If you’d like to do the guided tour again, return to
page 82. Do not forget to set the key for the bass part
(see “Key” on p. 83).
Press the [EXIT] button if you want to select a differ-
ent folder.
NOTE
Your own rhythms can only be saved to a USB memory. If
you forgot to connect one, the display now shows the mes-
sage “USB Device not inserted”.
Once the first Division is finished, you can record other
Divisions. Use the clone functions (“=”) to record several
patterns in one go.
Do not forget to record the Fills, Intros and Endings to
complete your rhythms. There are two groups of three
fills: “Up” 1~3 and “Dwn” 1~3. “Up” fills are used when
you switch on the [AUTO FILL] button and then press a
VARIATION button of a higher number (transition from
[1] to [2], for example).
If you initialized the RAM memory before recording
your first part, the BK-5 suggests the name
“User_Rhythm”. Otherwise, it suggests the name of
the rhythm you have been editing.
“Dwn” fills are used when you switch on the [AUTO FILL]
button and then press a VARIATION button of a lower
number.
Intros are usually used at the beginning of a song and
End patterns provide professional closing sections.
NOTE
The ABass track is monophonic. You can only record single-
note patterns.
3. Use the TONE buttons to select a different
character.
4. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
the next character position you want to
change.
Help function on the main Rhythm Composer
page
1. Press and hold the [NUMERIC] button.
selected character, or the [UP2] button to insert a
character.
The display changes to:
5. Repeat steps (3) and (4) to complete the
name.
6. Press the [WRITE] button to confirm your
desire to save the rhythm.
The display briefly confirms the operation and then
returns to the main Rhythm Composer page.
If the USB memory already contains a rhythm file of
the specified name, you will be asked whether you
want to overwrite it:
This page explains how to temporarily switch off
(“Mute”) and isolate (“Solo”) specific tracks.
2. Press the [EXIT] or [NUMERIC] button to
return to the main Rhythm Composer page.
In this case, select “YES” using the [CURSOR÷VALUE]
dial and press [ENTER/SELECT] to replace the old file
with the new one (the old file will be lost).
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Rhythm Composer (programming your own rhythms)
r
Muting tracks while recording others
After programming a few tracks, you may find that cer-
tain parts tend to confuse you. That is why the BK-5
allows you to mute tracks that you do not want to hear
during recording.
Solo
If you need to listen to a track in isolation, press and
hold the [TRACK MUTE] button and start playback.
This mutes all other tracks, while the selected track is
flagged with an “S”.
1. On the main Rhythm Composer page, use
the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial and [ENTER/
SELECT] button to select the “TRACK”
parameter.
Press the [TRACK MUTE] button again to switch off
the function of the Solo function.
NOTE
If the track you solo was muted, it will be soloed like any
other track. After switching off the Solo function, the track
in question is once again muted.
The field below the “TRACK” parameter shows the
name of the Tone or Drum Set assigned to the
selected track (“TR-909” in our example).
Playback in Arranger mode
2. Press the [TRACK MUTE] button.
NOTE
Save your rhythm before trying it out with the Arranger.
If the rhythm stops unexpectedly during playback in
Arranger mode, try different chords. Chances are that
you only programmed the major pattern, so that the
Arranger selects an empty pattern when you play a
minor or seventh chord. Remember to set the Mode
parameter to “M=m=7” until you have come to grips
with the possibilities of the BK-5’s Arranger. That
way, those three patterns will sound alike, but at
least you are sure that the Arranger does not stop
when you play a minor or seventh chord.
An “M” appears next to the track you have just
muted.
3. Press the [TRACK MUTE] button again to
switch off the mute function (the “M” dis-
appears).
NOTE
This mute setting only applies to the Rhythm Composer
tain data are played back. Use the “Erase” function to
remove parts that should not appear in your accompani-
ments (see p. 89).
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Menu options
certain notes in a given time range need to be quan-
tized, you should narrow down the edit range using
the “From”/“To” parameters.
Rhythm Track Edit functions
The “Track Edit” level of the Rhythm Composer provides
12 functions: Quantize, Erase, Delete, Copy, Insert, Key,
Clock, Track Length and Time Signat. There is also a
“Micro Edit” environment that allows you to add, delete
or change individual events. See page 99 for details.
1. Return to the main Rhythm Composer page.
2. Press the [MENU] button (its indicator
flashes).
The display changes to:
Parameter
Setting
Explanation
Track
ADrums~Acc6, Allows you to select
ALL
the track you wish to
edit. You can also
select “ALL” here, in
which case the opera-
tion applies to all
tracks.
Mode
Major, Minor, Allows you to select
3. Use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
“Track Edit”, then press the [ENTER/SELECT]
button.
7th
the Mode to be edited.
Division
Intro 1~4,
Use this parameter to
Main 1~4, Fill select the Division you
Dwn 1~3, Fill want to edit.
The display changes to:
Up 1~3, End
1~4
From Bar
From Beat
From CPT
1~[last mea- Refers to the first mea-
sure of the
track or pat-
tern]
sure to be edited. By
default, the “From”
value is set to the
beginning of the
selected track(s).
1~[number of Specifies the beat posi-
beats per bar] tion. The number of
selectable beats
You can use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial and [ENTER/
SELECT] button to edit the available functions.
depends on the
selected time signa-
ture.
■ Quantize
Use this function if you chose not to quantize your
music during recording and now realize that the tim-
ing is not quite what you expected it to be. If only
0~119
Refers to the starting
CPT position. “CPT” is
short for “Clock Pulse
Time”, the smallest unit
used by the BK-5.
(There are 120 CPTs to
every beat of a 4/4
bar.) Change this set-
ting only if your edit
operation should start
after the selected beat.
To Bar
1~[last mea- This is where you spec-
sure of the
track or pat-
tern]
ify the last measure to
be edited. By default,
the “To” position is set
to the last event of the
selected track (or the
last event of the long-
est track when you
select “All”).
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Rhythm Composer (programming your own rhythms)
r
■ Erase
Parameter
Setting
Explanation
“Erase” allows you to selectively delete data either
within a specified range of measures, beats or clocks
or from the entire track(s). When “Data Type” is set to
“All”, “Erase” substitutes the required number of rests
for the data you delete, so that you end up with the
equivalent number of blank measures. If you also
want to eliminate the measures themselves, use
“Delete” (see below).
To Beat
1~[number of Specifies the beat posi-
beats per bar] tion. The number of
selectable beats
depends on the
selected time signa-
ture.
To CPT
0~119
Refers to the last clock
that should be affected
by the edit operation.
Change this setting
only if your edit opera-
tion should not end
exactly on the selected
beat.
Resolution
1/4, 1/8, 1/8T, This parameter sets the
1/16, 1/16T, 1/ resolution of the
32, 1/32T, 1/64 Quantize function. Be
sure to always select
Parameter
Setting
Explanation
the value of the short-
est note you recorded.
Otherwise, your part
no longer sounds the
way you played it,
because shorter notes
are shifted to the
wrong positions.
Track
ADrums~Acc6, Allows you to select
ALL
the track you wish to
edit. You can also
select “ALL” here, in
which case the opera-
tion applies to all
tracks.
Strength
0%~100%
Use this parameter to
specify how precise the
timing correction
should be. “0%” means
that the selected “Res-
olution” value is not
applied (“0% correc-
tion”), while “100%”
means that all notes
are shifted to the
Mode
Major, Minor, Allows you to select
7th
the Mode to be edited.
Division
Intro 1~4,
Use this parameter to
Main 1~4, Fill select the Division you
Dwn 1~3, Fill want to edit.
Up 1~3, End
1~4
From Bar
From Beat
From CPT
1~[last mea- Refers to the first mea-
sure of the
track or pat-
tern]
sure to be edited. By
default, the “From”
value is set to the
beginning of the
selected track(s).
mathematicallycorrect
positions.
From Note
To Note
0 C-~127 G9 This parameter allows
you to set the note (or
lower limit of the note
range) to be modified
1~[number of Specifies the beat posi-
beats per bar] tion. The number of
selectable beats
within the specified
“From/To” time range.
depends on the
selected time signa-
ture.
0 C-~127 G9 This parameter allows
you to set the upper
limit of the note range
to be modified within
the specified “From/To”
time range.
0~119
Refers to the starting
CPT position. “CPT” is
short for “Clock Pulse
Time”, the smallest unit
used by the BK-5.
Press the [WRITE] button (its indicator flashes) to
confirm your settings and edit the data.
(There are 120 CPTs to
every beat of a 4/4
bar.) Change this set-
ting only if your edit
operation should start
after the selected beat.
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Menu options
Parameter
Setting
Explanation
Parameter
Setting
Explanation
To Bar
1~[last mea- This is where you spec-
From Note
0 C-~127 G9 This parameter is only
displayed if “Data
sure of the
track or pat-
tern]
ify the last measure to
be edited. By default,
the “To” position is set
to the last event of the
selected track (or the
last event of the long-
est track when you
select “All”).
Type” (see above) is set
to “Note”. It allows you
to set the note (or
lower limit of the note
range) to be modified
within the specified
“From/To” time range.
To Beat
To CPT
1~[number of Specifies the beat posi-
beats per bar] tion. The number of
selectable beats
To Note
0 C-~127 G9 This parameter allows
you to set the upper
limit of the note range
to be modified within
depends on the
selected time signa-
ture.
0~119
Refers to the last clock
that should be affected
by the edit operation.
Change this setting
only if your edit opera-
tion should not end
exactly on the selected
beat.
Press the [WRITE] button (its indicator flashes) to
confirm your settings and edit the data.
■ Delete
Unlike the “Erase” function, “Delete” not only erases
the data but also the measures, beats and/or CPT
units, so that all data that lie behind the “To” position
are shifted towards the beginning of the track(s). You
cannot choose the data type to be erased.
Data Type
(select the data
to be edited)
ALL
All parameters listed
below.
Note
Only note messages.
Modulation
CC01 messages usu-
ally used for adding
vibrato (i.e. use of the
BENDER/MODULA-
TION lever).
PanPot
CC10 messages that
specify the stereo posi-
tion.
Parameter
Setting
Explanation
Expression
Reverb
CC11 messages that
are used for tempo-
rary volume changes.
Track
ADrums~Acc6, Allows you to select
ALL
edit. Select “ALL” to
edit all tracks.
Reverb Send messages
(how strongly the part
should be processed by
the reverb effect).
Mode
7th
Division
Intro 1~4,
Up 1~3, End
1~4
Use this parameter to
Chorus
Chorus Send messages
(how strongly the part
should be processed by
the chorus effect).
Program
Change
Program change mes-
sages, used to select
sounds or Drum Sets.
Note: by deleting pro-
gram change messages
you also dispose of the
related CC00 and CC32
(bank select) messages.
Press the [WRITE] button (its indicator flashes) to
confirm your settings and edit the data.
P.Bender:
Pitch Bend data (i.e.
use of the BENDER/
MODULATION lever).
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Rhythm Composer (programming your own rhythms)
r
■ Copy
This function can be used to copy individual tracks,
NOTE
The “Copy” page now displays a “USB MEMORY” field to
indicate that you can select a rhythm on the connected
USB memory.
Modes and Divisions to replace existing parts while
keeping the remaining parts of the rhythm already in
the RAM memory.
3. Press the [ENTER/SELECT] button.
1. Set “Location” to “Source”.
The following parameters are displayed:
Parameter
Setting
Explanation
Location
Source, Desti- Allows you to select
nation
the rhythm whose
tracks you wish to
copy (“Source”) to
another rhythm (“Des-
tination”).
Track
ADrums~Acc6, Allows you to select
NOTE
ALL
copy. Select “ALL” to
edit all tracks.
When you import a rhythm, the “Location” parameter is set
to “Destination”. To continue as explained below, you need
to select the “Source” setting.
Mode
Major, Minor, Allows you to select
4. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
the “Track” parameter, then press the
[ENTER/SELECT] button.
7th, ALL
the Mode to be copied.
Division
Intro 1~4,
IntroALL,
Main 1~4,
MainALL,
Use this parameter to
select the Division you
want to copy.
5. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
the track to be copied.
You can also select “ALL” to copy all tracks of a given
Mode/Division. In that case, “Destination–Track” (see
below) is also set to “ALL”.
Fill Dwn 1~3,
Fill DwnALL,
Fill Up 1~3,
Fill UpALL,
End 1~4,
6. Repeat this operation with the “Mode” and
“Division” parameters to select the Mode
(Major, Minor, 7th, ALL) and Division (Int 1~
4, Int ALL, Main 1~4, Main ALL, FDw 1~3,
FDw ALL, FUp 1~3, FUp ALL, End 1~4, End
ALL).
EndALL
From Bar~
To CPT
See page 88.
2. Select a rhythm.
7. Press the [KEY] button to listen to the pat-
Selecting a factory rhythm: Use the RHYTHM FAM-
ILY buttons and the displayed parameters to select
the desired rhythm. Skip to step (3) below.
tern you are about to copy.
Selecting an ‘external’ rhythm: You can also work
with a rhythm on a USB memory:
(a) Press the [USB MEMORY] button to jump to the
“USB Memory” page.
(b) Select the rhythm that contains the track(s) you
want to copy.
NOTE
This audition function is not available when you select
“ALL” for the “Mode” or “Division” field.
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Menu options
8. Use the “From” and “To” parameters (3
each) to specify the beginning and end of
the excerpt you want to copy.
10. Set “Copy Mode” to “Replace” or “Mix”.
In either case, the length of the destination track may
change to include all data of the source track.
By default, the “From” parameters are set to “Bar 1,
Beat 1, CPT 0”, while the “To” values are set to include
the entire track.
11. Use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial and [ENTER/
SELECT] button to set “Track” to the track
you wish to copy the data to.
NOTE
9. Set “Location” to “Destination”.
AccDrums data can also be copied to other tracks (prefera-
bly Acc1~Acc6). You can only copy ABass data to other
ABass tracks. If you selected “ALL” for “Source – Track”, this
“Track” parameter is also set to “ALL”.
The following parameters are displayed:
12. Repeat this operation with the “Mode”
(Major, Minor, 7th, ALL) and “Division”
parameters (Intro 1~4, Main 1~4, Fill Dwn
1~3, Fill Up 1~3, End 1~4, ALL).
NOTE
If you selected “ALL” for “Source – Mode” or “Source – Divi-
sion”, this “Mode” or “Division” parameter is also set to
“ALL”.
Parameter
Setting
Explanation
Location
Source, Desti- Allows you to select
13. Use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial and [ENTER/
SELECT] button to select “Copy Times” and
specify the number of copies you need.
Select “1” to copy the excerpt only once.
nation
the rhythm whose
tracks you wish to
copy (“Source”) to
another rhythm (“Des-
tination”).
14. Press the [KEY] button to audition the desti-
nation track.
Track
ADrums~Acc6, Allows you to select
SELECT] button to specify the target posi-
ALL
the track you wish to
edit. Select “ALL” only
16. Press the [WRITE] button (its indicator
flashes) to confirm your settings and edit
the data.
Mode
7th, ALL
Division
Intro 1~4,
Use this parameter to
Dwn 1~3, Fill want to edit.
Up 1~3, End
1~4
■ Insert
“Insert” allows you to insert space and shift data that
lie behind the “From” position further towards the
end of the track (this is the exact opposite of
“Delete”). The empty measures you create can be
“filled” using the “Copy” function or by recording new
phrases in that area.
Into Bar
Into Beat
Into CPT
The” Into” position indicates where the
beginning of the source excerpt will be
after the copy operation. To copy the
source data to the beginning of the
destination track, select BAR= “1”,
BEAT= “1” and CPT= “0”.
Copy Mode
Replace
The data in the
selected range of the
source track overwrite
the destination track.
Mix
The data in the
selected range of the
source track are added
to the data on the des-
tination track.
Copy Times
1~999
Allows you to to spec-
ify the number of cop-
ies to be made. Select
“1” to copy the excerpt
only once.
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Rhythm Composer (programming your own rhythms)
r
■ Key (transposition)
NOTE
This function allows you to transpose the notes of
the selected track (non-note data obviously cannot
be transposed).
This function provides no “To” pointer. Instead, you need to
specify the length of the insert using the “For” values.
Parameter
Setting
Explanation
Parameter
Setting
Explanation
Track
ADrums~Acc6, Allows you to select
ALL
Track
ADrums~Acc6, Allows you to select
ALL
the track you wish to
edit. You can also
tion applies to all
tracks.
the track you wish to
edit. You can also
tion applies to all
tracks.
Mode
Mode
7th
7th
Division
Intro 1~4,
Up 1~3, End
1~4
Use this parameter to
Division
Intro 1~4,
Up 1~3, End
1~4
Use this parameter to
From Bar~
From CPT
See page 88.
From Bar~
To CPT
See page 88.
For Bar,
For Beat,
Specifies how many bars, beats and
Value
–127~127)
This is where you set
the transposition
interval in semi-tone
steps. Select “2”, for
example, to transpose
a pattern in “C” to “D”.
Be careful when apply-
ing “Key” to the
Press the [WRITE] button (its indicator flashes) to
confirm your settings and edit the data.
AccDrums track. Trans-
posing all notes of this
track leads to dra-
matic changes.
From Note
0 C-~127 G9 This parameter allows
you to set the note (or
lower limit of the note
range) to be modified
within the specified
“From”/“To” time
range.
To Note
0 C-~127 G9 This parameter allows
you to set the upper
limit of the note range
to be modified within
Press the [WRITE] button (its indicator flashes) to
confirm your settings and edit the data.
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Menu options
■ Change Velo
Parameter
Setting
Explanation
The “Change Velo” function allows you to modify the
dynamics (called “velocity”) of a track or excerpt. Only
note events can be changed.
Magnify**
0~200%
This parameter works
like a “Compander”
effect (a dynamics pro-
cessor that simulta-
neously acts as
compressor and
expander), although it
processes MIDI data:
by selecting a value
above “100%” you
increase the differ-
ences between high
and low velocity values
in the selected range.
Values below “64” are
lowered, while values
above “64” are
increased. The result is
therefore that the dif-
ference between pia-
nissimo and fortissimo
becomes far more pro-
nounced.
Parameter
Setting
Explanation
Track
ADrums~Acc6, Allows you to select
ALL
the track you wish to
edit. You can also
tion applies to all
tracks.
Mode
7th
From Note/
To Note
0 C-~127 G9 “From Note” refers to
the lower limit of the
note range you want
to change. “To Note”
represents the upper
limit.
Division
Intro 1~4,
Up 1~3, End
1~4
Use this parameter to
[*] Even the highest positive or negative value doesn’t allow you
to go beyond “1” or “127”. There is a reason why “0” is impossi-
ble: that value is used to indicate the end of a note (note-off).
“127”, on the other hand, is the highest velocity value the MIDI
standard can muster. Adding a high positive velocity value may
thus lead to all notes being played at “127”.
they push all velocity towards the imaginary center of “64”, thus
reducing differences in playing dynamics.
From Bar~
To CPT
See page 88.
Bias*
–99~99)
Allows you to specify
by how much the
velocity values should
change. Select a posi-
tive value to increase
the velocity (the value
is added to the velocity
value of the affected
notes) or a negative
value to decrease the
velocity values (that
value is subtracted).
Select “0” if you prefer
to work with the
Press the [WRITE] button (its indicator flashes) to
confirm your settings and edit the data.
■ Change Gate Time
This function allows you to modify the duration of
the notes in the selected time (“From”/“To”) and note
(“From Note”/“To Note”) ranges. We recommend you
only use this function to shorten notes that suddenly
of the notes here, which makes editing the data “en
bloc” a little bit hazardous. See “Editing individual
rhythm events (Micro Edit)” on p. 99 for how to
change the duration of individual notes.
“Magnify” parameter
(see below).
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Rhythm Composer (programming your own rhythms)
r
After selecting a sound with a slow release (i.e. a
sound that lingers on after all notes have been
released), however, “Change Gate Time” will help you
cut the notes down to size and thus avoid undesir-
able overlaps.
Parameter
Setting
Explanation
From Note/
To Note
0 C-~127 G9 “From Note” refers to
the lower limit of the
note range you want
to change. “To Note”
Press the [WRITE] button (its indicator flashes) to
confirm your settings and edit the data.
■ Global Change
This function allows you to make quick changes to
certain settings. The changes always apply to entire
tracks (you cannot use “Global Change” for just a few
measures). You can apply global changes to the four
editable rhythms track parameters (“Express”,
“Reverb”, “Panpot” and “Chorus”) when you notice
that the effect is too prominent or not strong
enough.
Parameter
Setting
Explanation
Track
ADrums~Acc6, Allows you to select
ALL
the track you wish to
edit. You can also
which case the opera-
tion applies to all
tracks.
You can also use it to “upgrade” older rhythms to
ensure that they use the BK-5’s new sounds.
Mode
7th
Division
Intro 1~4,
Use this parameter to
Up 1~3, End
1~4
From Bar~
To CPT
See page 88.
Parameter
Setting
Explanation
Bias
–1920~1920 This parameter sets the
amount by which the
duration (or gate time)
of the selected notes is
to change. The shortest
possible “Gate Time”
Track
ADrums~Acc6, Allows you to select
ALL
the track you wish to
edit. You can also
tion applies to all
tracks.
value is “1” (used for all
drum notes), so that
selecting “–1000” for
notes with a “Gate
Time” value of “1” in
the specified time
Mode
7th, ALL
the Mode to be edited.
Division
Intro 1~4,
IntroALL,
Main 1~4,
Fill Dwn 1~3,
Fill Up 1~3,
End 1~4, ALL
Use this parameter to
select the Division you
want to edit.
range still leaves you
with the same value.
Magnify
0~200%
Use this parameter
rather than “Bias” to
produce proportional
changes to the
Alteration
Mode*
Nearest,
Degree, —
This message type is
only available for
affected “Gate Time”
values. Values below
“100%” decrease the
duration, while any-
thing above “100%”
increases it. Select
“100%” if you prefer to
work with the “Bias”
parameter (see above).
melodic rhythm tracks
(i.e. not for ADrums or
ABass tracks). Rhythm
tain it. See also “About
‘Alteration Mode’ mes-
sages” on p. 100.
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Menu options
Press the [WRITE] button (its indicator flashes) to
confirm your settings and edit the data.
Parameter
Setting
Explanation
Nearest**: Refers to a
more musical system
for real-time shifts of
the recorded rhythm
notes during Arranger
playback.
■ Shift Clock
Degree: This setting
refers to the “old” sys-
tem for real-time con-
information during
rhythm playback. See
page 100.
Select “---” if the
selected pattern
should ignore this set-
ting.
“Shift Clock” allows you to shift the notes within the
selected “From”/“To” range. It can be used for two
things:
• To correct “slow” notes due to a slow(er) attack.
You may want to use “Shift Clock” after assigning a
sound to a track that has a considerably slower
attack than the sound you used for recording the
part in question. This technique is frequently used in
pop music to “time” 1/16-note string arpeggios
played with a “slow” pad sound. Rather than have the
notes begin at the mathematically correct time (e.g.
2-1-0), you could shift them to the left (e.g. to 1-4-
115), so that the peak volume of the attack is reached
on the next beat:
From/To…
CC00,
CC32,
PC
Enter the original data
value (i.e. the value
that is being used right
now by the selected
track(s)) for “From”. For
“To”, specify the new
value that should
replace the “From”
value. These are what
we call “absolute”
changes: you don’t add
or subtract values, you
replace them with
other values. This sys-
tem is only available
for messages that
allow you to select
sounds or sound
---, 0~127,
ALL
1~128
Original positions (slow attack, tim-
ing seems off)
Shift= –5
(timing sounds OK)
• To correct the timing of notes recorded via MIDI
without quantizing them.
banks.***
You can use external sequences as raw material for
your songs. Recording such excerpts via MIDI may
cause a slight delay (e.g. 5 CPT). If that is not accept-
able, use “Shift Clock” to “push” the recorded data to
the left (select “–5”). That allows you to preserve any
irregularities the original may contain because it was
not quantized. After selecting a sound with a slow
release (i.e. a sound that lingers on after all notes
have been released), however, “Change Gate Time”
will help you cut the notes down to size and thus
avoid undesirable overlaps.
Inc/Dec…
Expression,
Reverb,
–127~127
These parameters
allow you to add (+) or
subtract (–) a given
value to/from the cur-
rent Expression, Pan,
Reverb Send or Chorus
Send values. This may
come in handy if the
real-time changes you
recorded turn out to
be too high or too low.
Chorus,
Panpot
Parameter
Setting
Explanation
[*] This parameter is not available for: ADrums and ABass tracks,
Intro3 & 4 and End3 & 4 patterns.
Track
ADrums~Acc6, Allows you to select
[**] The notes of the melodic rhythm tracks are compared against
the chords played in the recognition area. If the next chord you
play contains the note the selected part is already sounding
(based on the previous chord), that note is maintained.
If the new chord does not contain that note, the rhythm part in
question uses the closest (“Nearest”) note. This produces a more
musical behavior than any other system on the market.
[***] CC00 messages are the so-called “MSB” bank select messag-
es. They allows you to select the Capital Tone (select “0”) of a
sound address. Select “---” if the current setting must not
change. The CC32 control change is the so-called “LSB” bank se-
lect message. Use the PC parameter to change the address, a.k.a.
program change number, of a sound (e.g. from “1” to “2”).
ALL
the track you wish to
edit. You can also
tracks.
Mode
Major, Minor, Allows you to select
7th the Mode to be edited.
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Rhythm Composer (programming your own rhythms)
r
Parameter
Setting
NOTE
There is no way to recall the previous version, so be sure to
save your rhythm before continuing (see p. 85).
Division
Intro 1~4,
Use this parameter to
Up 1~3, End
1~4
From Bar~
To CPT
See page 88.
Data Type
See page 90.
Value (CPT)
–4800~4800 This parameter sets the
amount by which the
notes are shifted. The
value refers to CPT
Parameter
Setting
Explanation
units (one CPT= 1/120
q). Notes on the first
beat of the first bar
cannot be shifted fur-
ther to the left,
because that would
mean shifting them to
the “0” measure, which
doesn’t exist.
Track
ADrums~Acc6, Allows you to select
ALL
the track you wish to
edit. You can also
which case the opera-
Division
Intro 1~4,
Use this parameter to
From Note,
To Note
0 C-~127 G9 “From Note” allows
you to set the note (or
lower limit of the note
range) to be modified
within the specified
“From”/“To” time
Dwn 1~3, Fill want to edit.
Up 1~3, End
1~4
Length Bar
Use the
[CURSOR÷VALUE] dial
and the [ENTER/
range.
SELECT] button to set
the length of the
selected pattern(s) in
steps of one bar. You
can also make an exist-
ing track longer by
specifying a “Bar”
value that lies beyond
the last notes.
“To Note” allows you to
set the upper limit of
Press the [WRITE] button (its indicator flashes) to
confirm your settings and edit the data.
■ Track Length
Length Beat
Length CPT
1~[number of Specifies the beat posi-
beats per bar] tion. The number of
selectable beats
This function allows you to modify the length (num-
ber of bars, beats and clocks) of a pattern after
recording. Data that lie outside the range you
decided to keep are discarded. Obviously, you only
need to change the settings of the Mode whose
length you want to modify.
depends on the
selected time signa-
ture.
This parameter allows
you to “fine-tune” the
length. In most cases,
you will probably work
with multiples of q
notes (i.e. 120CPT)
because 120CPT repre-
sent one beat of an X/4
bar (1/4, 2/4, 3/4, 4/4,
etc.).
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Menu options
Parameter
Setting
Explanation
Parameter
Setting
Explanation
Variation 1, 2, 3,
4
Mode
Major, Minor, Choose the Modes to
On, Off
Use these parameters
to select the pattern
you want to change. If
you set “Division” to
“Fill Dwn” or “Fill Up”,
there are only three
button icons. You can
switch on several or all
button icons if you like.
7th, which the new length
Major+Minor, setting should apply.
Major+7th, You can also switch on
Major+Minor+ two or all three button
7th,
Minor+7th
icons. If you set “Track”
to “ALL”, all three
Modes are selected
automatically (and
Press the [WRITE] button (its indicator flashes) to
confirm your settings and edit the data.
Press the [WRITE] button (its indicator flashes) to
confirm your settings and edit the data.
■ Time Signature
The “Time Signature” parameter allows you to check
and set the time signature of the patterns. The major,
minor and seventh Modes of a pattern must always
use the same time signature, which is why you can-
not edit them separately.
Use this parameter to specify the time signature of
the selected pattern (“Division”, see below). The
MAIN, INTRO and ENDING instances comprise four
variations, which is why there are four “Time Signa-
tures” values you can select using the VARIATION
[1]~[4] button icons. When you select “Fill Up” or “Fill
Dwn” for “Division”, only three “Time Signature”
instances can be edited.
The most commonly used time signatures are: 2/4, 3/
4, 4/4, 6/8 and 12/8. Other values (such as 7/4, 13/8,
etc.) are also possible.
NOTE
When you change the time signature of an already
recorded pattern, its notes and events are “reshuffled”, so
that you may end up with incomplete measures. None of
your data are deleted, however.
Parameter
Setting
Division
Intro, Main,
Use this parameter to
FillDwn, FillUp, select the Division you
End, ALL
want to edit.
Time Signature 1/16~32/2
This parameter allows
you to set the time sig-
nature.
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Editing individual rhythm events (Micro Edit)
r
■ General notes about ‘Micro Edit’
Editing individual rhythm events
(Micro Edit)
Select this mode if you need to change just one aspect
of an otherwise perfect rhythm.
In this section, we will use the word “event” for any kind
of message. An event is thus a command (or instruction)
for the Arranger.
You can only view and edit one track at a time. There-
fore, be sure to check the “Track” setting before editing
the events displayed on this page.
Position indications: Sequencers only register
“events” whose positions and distances specify when
the notes are to be sounded or when they should
change (i.e. their “sequence”).
1. Return to the main Rhythm Composer page.
2. Use the “Track”, “Mode” and “Division”
parameters to select the pattern you want
to edit.
Each event is executed at a given point in time, which
is why they all have a position indication
(“1-01-119”, for example). The first figure refers to
the bar, the second to the beat within that bar and
the third to the clock (CPT) between the current beat
and the next. Each beat of a 4/4 bar comprises 120
clocks.
3. Press the [MENU] button (its indicator
flashes).
The display changes to:
Monitoring note events: The Rhythm Composer can
play back the note events you select. This may help
you identify the occurrence you want to edit. When
you move the cursor to a note event, it is played back.
General procedure
To change information already available on the selected
track, proceed as follows:
4. Use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
“Micro Edit”, then press the [ENTER/SELECT]
button.
1. Use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the
list entry you want to edit.
The display changes to:
2. Press the [ENTER/SELECT] button to select
the first value.
In the following examples, we selected the CC00
message (left) and the first parameter of a note event
(right):
You can use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial and [ENTER/
SELECT] button to edit the available functions.
NOTE
pattern (“ADrum – Major – Intro1” in our example). Be sure
to select the correct button before calling up the “Micro
Edit” page (see step (2) above).
3. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to set the
value.
4. Press the [ENTER/SELECT] button to select
the next value and edit it.
5. When you’re done, press the [EXIT] button
to return to the Rhythm Composer page,
then save your rhythm (page 85).
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Menu options
■About the ‘Note’ messages
■ Parameters you can change
As stated above, note messages comprise a note
number, a velocity value and a Gate Time value.
● Note velocity and gate time messages—These
messages always come in pairs. The first value
(“42:F#2”, for example) refers to the note itself and
the second (“72”) to the velocity (playing dynamics).
The range for note numbers is “0 (C–)”~“127 (G9)”.
Velocity messages can be set anywhere between “1”
(extremely soft) and “127”. The value “0” cannot be
entered, because it would effectively switch off the
note.
The “Micro Edit” page adds a third message to that
pair. It describes the duration of the note in question.
You may remember this value from the “Track Edit”
environment, where it is called “Gate Time”.
About ‘Alteration Mode’ messages
● CC—These messages usually add something to the
notes being played, like modulation, a different vol-
ume, a new stereo position… The BK-5 recognizes
(and allows you to edit) all control change numbers
the Arranger uses (CC01, 10, 11, 91, 93) and displays
their “official” name.
This message type is only available for melodic
rhythm tracks (i.e. not for ADrums or ABass tracks)
and needs to be inserted by hand (using “Create
Event”). Rhythm tracks you only just recorded do not
contain it.
It allows you to use a revolutionary system for adapt-
ing the recorded notes to a more natural behavior
(also known as “voicing”). There are two options:
NOTE
CC64 (Hold) events generated by a footswitch connected to
the HOLD FOOTSWITCH socket are converted into the
equivalent GATE TIME values at the time of recording. You
may therefore have to change the duration of the notes
themselves.
● Degree—This setting refers to the “old” system for
real-time conversion of rhythm track information for
Arranger playback. Based on the fundamentals of the
chords you play during Arranger playback, it often
leads to odd jumps of certain parts.
● PC/Program Change—These messages are used to
select sounds within the current bank. As there are
only 128 possibilities, these messages are usually pre-
ceded by control changes CC00 and CC32. That’s why
the BK-5 inserts all three when you use the “Create
Event” function. To assign a Drum Set to an Acc1~6
track, you must create a “CC00” event with the value
“111”.
● Nearest—Refers to a more musical system for
real-time shifts of the recorded rhythm notes during
Arranger playback. Let us first look at an illustration:
Recorded strings track
Result with “Degree”
NOTE
Result with “Nearest”
The CC00 value of ADrums tracks cannot be edited.
● Pitch Bend—These messages are used for tempo-
rary changes to the pitch of the notes being played at
that time. Pitch Bend messages can be positive
(higher) or negative (lower). Setting range: –128~
128.
Chords played in the recognition area.
This new system is called “Adaptive Chord Voicing”.
The notes of the melodic rhythm tracks are compared
against the chords played in the recognition area. If
the next chord you play contains the note the
selected part is already sounding (based on the previ-
ous chord), that note is maintained.
● Alteration Mode—This event allows you to specify
how the notes recorded for a rhythm track will be
used during Arranger playback. See below for details.
NOTE
If the new chord does not contain that note, the
rhythm part in question uses the closest (“Nearest”)
note. In the example above, the “G” is closer to the
“A” sounded by the strings part than the “C”. This
produces a more musical behavior than any other
system on the market.
This parameter is not available for ADrums tracks or the
Intro3,, Intro4, Ending3, Ending4 divisions.
Editing events
■Editing Pitch Bend messages
Pitch Bend messages can be positive or negative (the
range is –128~128). The value “0” means that the
pitch of notes being played in that area is not altered.
Both “Degree” and “Nearest” allow you to specify the
note range (“Limit Low” and “Limit High”) the
selected part may play. Notes that would fall outside
that range during Arranger playback are automati-
cally transposed to values inside the selected range.
Rather than specifying two note values, you can also
choose “Std”, which means that the BK-5 decides
automatically when extremely high (or low) notes
need to be shifted down (or up) by one or several
octaves.
If a Pitch Bend occurrence is not reset to “0” at some
stage, all notes will keep sounding flat when you no
longer want them to.
■Editing control changes
These messages (CC) can be set to the desired value
(0~127) when the corresponding effect is needed –
but they also need to be reset to “0” to avoid
unpleasant surprises.
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Editing individual rhythm events (Micro Edit)
r
■Create Event
Select this function to add a new event to the
selected track.
Other edit operations
The “Micro Edit” page allows you to select several func-
tions.
If the position for which you create a new event
already contains other events, the new event is added
at the end of that group.
You can select several consecutive events and edit
them in one go: select the first event of a series, press
and hold the [ENTER/SELECT] button and rotate the
[CURSOR÷VALUE] dial.
Parameter
Setting
Explanation
1. Select the event you want to edit.
Event
Note, Control Allows you to specify
Change, Pro- the event type you
gram Change, want to add.
Pitch Bend,
2. Press the [MENU] button (its indicator
flashes).
The display changes to:
Alteration
Mode
To Bar,
To Beat,
To CPT
See page 88.
Specifies the position
where your new event
will be inserted.
The selected event is inserted with a default value:
Note: Note Number: 60 C4
On Velocity: 100
Gate Time: 60
The top line shows the event type that can be edited
(“CC00 Bank MSB” in our example) and its location
(“001:01:000”). You cannot change the event type on
this page.
Program Change: CC00 Bank Select MSB, value “0”
CC32 Bank Select LSB, value “4”
Program Change Number “1”
(The bank select messages are added
automatically: you don’t have to
worry about that.)
If you selected several events (see above), the display
looks as follows:
Pitch Bend: “0”
Alteration Mode: Nearest
Limit Low: Std
Limit High: Std
Obviously, you will then need to change the default
settings depending on the result you want to
achieve.
Press the [WRITE] button to confirm your settings
and add the new event. The BK-5 returns to the
“Micro Edit” page.
3. Use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the
desired edit function, then press the
[ENTER/SELECT] button.
■Erase Event
This function allows you to remove one or several
events without changing the positions of the
remaining events.
1. Use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the
event you want to delete.
The selected event is displayed at the center of the
display page.
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Menu options
■Place Event
NOTE
poser’s clipboard already contains events that you
copied using “Copy Event”.
To select several consecutive events, press the [ENTER/
SELECT] button while rotating the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial
towards the left (upward direction) or the right (downward
direction).
1. Select the “Place Event” function.
2. Press the [ENTER/SELECT] button icon to
remove the event you selected.
Parameter
Setting
Explanation
The BK-5 returns to the “Micro Edit” page.
To Bar,
To Beat,
To CPT
See page 88.
Specifies the position
where the first event
you copied should be
inserted.
■Move Event
This function allows you to move one or several
events.
3. Press the [WRITE] button to confirm your
1. Select the event you want to move.
2. Select the “Move Event” function.
NOTE
Events inserted with “Place Event” are added to any events
that may already exist in that area. Existing events are not
pushed towards the end of the track.
Parameter
Setting
Explanation
To Bar,
To Beat,
To CPT
See page 88.
Specifies the position
to which the first
event (in chronologi-
cal order) of the
MIDI parameters
selected group should
be shifted.
This section discusses the BK-5’s MIDI parameters and
the associated memories called “MIDI Sets”.
■ What’s MIDI
NOTE
“MIDI” stands for “Musical Instrument Digital Inter-
face.” It is a universal standard that allows perfor-
mance data to be exchanged among electronic musi-
cal instruments and computers. The BK-5 provides a
MIDI IN and MIDI OUT socket so that performance
data can be received from other MIDI instruments. It
is also equipped with a COMPUTER port (USB) that
can receive and transmit MIDI data from a computer.
If the position to which you move the selected event
already contains other events, the moved event is added at
the end of that group.
NOTE
Events located at “1-01-00” cannot be moved further to
the left.
4. Press the [WRITE] button to confirm your
settings and move the event.
The BK-5 returns to the “Micro Edit” page.
The MIDI parameters can be selected using [MENU]
button ‰ “MIDI”.
■Copy Event
This function allows you to copy one or several
events. Use “Place Event” to insert a copy of those
events at the desired position.
1. Select the event you want to copy.
To select several consecutive events, press and hold
the [ENTER/SELECT] button while rotating the
[CURSOR÷VALUE] dial towards the left (upward direc-
tion) or the right (downward direction).
The BK-5’s MIDI environment contains the following
options:
All events selected in this way appear on a gray back-
ground.
MIDI parameter
Explanation
group
3. Press the [ENTER/SELECT] button.
Each new selection will replace the previous one.
Local
This setting allows you to establish or
remove the connection between the
BK-5’s keyboard and the internal
tone generator.
4. Use the“Place Event” function to specify
where you want to insert the copied
event(s).
MIDI Set
Allows you to load a MIDI Set (“Key/
Rhythm”, “PK Series”, “Song”,
“User1”~“8”.
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
r
MIDI parameters
the MIDI transmit/receive channels of the real-time
and rhythm parts and to switch off MIDI transmis-
sion/reception of the song parts.
MIDI parameter
group
Explanation
Edit Rhythm Parts Here, you can edit all MIDI parame-
ters of the rhythm parts (ADrum,
NOTE
ABass, Acc1~6). See page 104.
This parameter applies to both reception (RX) and trans-
mission (TX). The BK-5 indeed allows you to set separate TX
and RX channels for each part.
Edit Tone Parts
ters related to the keyboard parts
(UP1, UP2, LWR and Mel.Intell). See
page 105.
■ PK Series
This option prepares the BK-5 for MIDI control using
a PK-series MIDI pedalboard. The most important set-
tings are: “Part Switch” is set to “Int” and “Rhythm
PcRx” is set to “On”.
Edit Song Parts
Edit System
Here, you can edit all MIDI parame-
This groups contains all MIDI param-
eters that apply to the BK-5 as a
whole. See page 106.
■ Song
This option restores the factory settings for the
BK-5’s SMF song parts and switches off the MIDI
transmission and reception of the real-time and
rhythm parts.
Local
This setting allows you to establish or remove the con-
nection between the BK-5’s keyboard and the internal
tone generator.
■ User1~8
The BK-5 also allows you to store and recall 8 differ-
ent MIDI configurations.
Parameter
Setting
NOTE
Local
On, Off (---)
Loading a MIDI Set only changes the MIDI settings and has
no effect on the remaining parameters.
If you select “On” (default), playing on the BK-5’s key-
board or playing back a song/rhythm causes the corre-
sponding notes to sound. If you select “Off”, the corre-
sponding MIDI messages are no longer sent to the
internal tone generator – but they are still transmitted
to the MIDI OUT socket (or USB COMPUTER port) and
hence to external MIDI instruments. When a parameter
is modified inside a part, the display shows “---”.
1. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
the “MIDI Set” field.
Sound source
Sound source
MIDI OUT
MIDI OUT
LOCAL ON
LOCAL OFF
2. Press the [ENTER/SELECT] button to edit the
“MIDI Set” field.
+Rhythm
+ SMF
+Rhythm
+ SMF
The “MIDI Set” field is now displayed in reverse.
3. Use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the
MIDI Set you want to load.
The BK-5 loads the selected MIDI Set.
Loading a MIDI Set
Press the [ENTER/SELECT] button if you want to edit
other parameters on this page.
The MIDI Set environment contains two options with
preset settings. All you need to do is select them to
restore the default settings for the sections or aspects in
question. In addition, there are 8 MIDI Set memories
where you can save your own settings.
Parameter
Setting
MIDI Set
Key/Rhythm, PK Series, Song,
User1~8
■ Key/Rhythm
This option recalls the factory MIDI settings for the
keyboard parts (UP1, UP2, LWR, MELODY INT) and the
rhythm parts (ADrum, ABass, Acc1~6). The most
important (and practical) use for this field is resetting
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Menu options
Filter
Setting
Explanation
Edit Rhythm Parts
The following parameters are located on the display
page that can be selected using [MENU] button‰
“MIDI” ‰ “Edit Rhythm Parts”.
Pitch Bender Off, On
Select “On” to transmit
Pitch Bend messages.
Modulation
Off, On
Select “On” to transmit
Modulation messages
(CC01).
Volume
Off, On
Off, On
Off, On
Select “On” to transmit Vol-
ume messages (CC07).
Panpot
Select “On” to transmit
Panpot messages (CC10).
Expression
Select “On” to transmit
Expression messages
(CC11).
1. Use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the
part you want to edit (ADrum, ABass, Acc1,
Acc2, Acc3, Acc4, Acc5, Acc6).
Reverb
Off, On
Off, On
Off, On
Select “On” to transmit
Reverb messages (CC91).
The display now shows the settings for the selected
part.
Chorus
Select All
Select “On” to transmit
Chorus messages (CC93).
Tx
Select “On” to transmit all
MIDI message listed above.
Select “On” if you want the selected part to transmit
MIDI data.
Rx
Parameter
Setting
Select “On” if you want the selected part to receive
MIDI data.
Tx
Off, On
Parameter
Setting
Tx Ch
Allows you to assign a MIDI transmit channel to the
selected part.
Rx
Off, On
Rx Ch
Parameter
Setting
Allows you to assign a MIDI receive channel to the
selected part.
Tx Ch
1~16
Parameter
Setting
Tx Shift
This parameter allows you to transpose the note
messages before they are transmitted to an external
MIDI instrument or computer. The maximum possible
transposition is four octaves up (+48) or down (–48).
Each step represents a semi-tone.
Rx Ch
1~16
Rx Shift
This parameter allows you to transpose the note
messages received from an external MIDI instrument
or computer. The maximum possible transposition is
four octaves up (+48) or down (–48). Each step repre-
sents a semi-tone.
Parameter
Setting
Tx Shift
–48~0~+48
Parameter
Setting
Tx Local
This is where you can disconnect the part from the
internal sound source (“Off”) – or re-establish that
connection (“On”).
Rx Shift
–48~0~+48
Rx Limit Low/Limit High
“Limit Low” and “Limit High” allow you to set the
note range to be received. If not all note messages
received on a given MIDI channel should be played by
the selected BK-5 part, narrow down the range.
Parameter
Setting
Tx Local
Off, On
Tx Event
Parameter
Setting
C–~G9
C–~G9
The “TX Event” section provides a number of filters
that allow you to specify whether the messages in
question should be transmitted (On) or not (Off).
Rx Limit Low
Rx Limit High
Filter
Setting
Explanation
Program
Change
Off, On
Select “On” to transmit pro-
gram change and bank
select (CC00, CC32) mes-
sages.
NOTE
The “Limit Low” value cannot be higher than the “Limit
High” value (and vice versa).
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
r
MIDI parameters
Rx Event
Edit Tone Parts
The “Rx Event” section provides a number of filters
The following parameters are located on the display
page that can be selected using [MENU] button‰
“MIDI” ‰ “Edit Tone Parts”.
that allow you to specify whether the messages in
question should be received (On) or not (Off).
Filter
Setting
Explanation
Program
Change
Off, On
Select “On” to receive pro-
gram change and bank
select (CC00, CC32) mes-
sages.
Pitch Bender Off, On
Select “On” to receive Pitch
Bend messages.
Modulation
Volume
Off, On
Off, On
Off, On
Off, On
Select “On” to receive Mod-
ulation messages (CC01).
1. Use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the
part you want to edit (Upper1, Upper2,
Lower, Mel.Intell).
2. Press the [ENTER/SELECT] button.
The display now shows the settings for the selected
part.
Select “On” to receive Vol-
ume messages (CC07).
Panpot
Select “On” to receive Pan-
pot messages (CC10).
Expression
Select “On” to receive
Expression messages
(CC11).
Tx, Tx Ch, Tx Shift, Tx Local, Tx Event
For the explanation of these parameters please refer
Reverb
Chorus
Hold
Off, On
Off, On
Off, On
Off, On
Off, On
Off, On
Off, On
Select “On” to receive
Reverb messages (CC91).
Rx, Rx Ch, Rx Shift, Rx Limit Low/High, Rx Event
For the explanation of these parameters please refer
Select “On” to receive Cho-
rus messages (CC93).
Select “On” to receive Hold
messages (CC64).
Edit Song Parts
Sostenuto
Soft
Select “On” to receive Sos-
tenuto messages (CC66).
The following parameters are located on the display
page that can be selected using [MENU] button‰
“MIDI” ‰ “Edit Song Parts”.
Select “On” to receive Soft
messages (CC67).
Caf
Select “On” to receive Caf-
Channel aftertouch.
RPN
Select “On” to receive Reg-
istered parameter number
messages (CC100/101).
NRPN
Off, On
Select “On” to receive Non-
registered parameter num-
ber messages (CC98/99).
1. Use the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select the
System
Exclusive
Off, On
Off, On
Select “On” to receive Sys-
tem Exclusive messages.
part you want to edit (Part 1~16).
2. Press the [ENTER/SELECT] button.
The display now shows the settings for the selected
part.
CC16
that allows you to influence
the “C1” parameter (see
p. 60). Select “On” to receive
this message type.
Tx, Tx Ch, Tx Shift, Tx Local, Tx Event
For the explanation of these parameters please refer
Select All
Off, On
Select “On” to receive all
MIDI message listed above.
Rx, Rx Ch, Rx Shift, Rx Limit Low/High, Rx Event
For the explanation of these parameters please refer
to page 104.
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Menu options
Edit System
Sync
The following parameters are located on the display
The following parameters are located on the display
page that can be selected using [MENU] button‰
“MIDI” ‰ “Edit System”.
page that can be selected using [MENU] button‰
“MIDI” ‰ “Edit System” ‰ “Sync”.
The “Edit System” group contains the following
parameters:
The “Sync” parameters allow you to specify whether
or not the BK-5 should send MIDI real-time messages
when you start rhythm or song playback. This allows
you to synchronize external instruments or (soft-
ware) sequencers with your BK-5.
Edit System Explanation
Sync
These parameters are used to synchronize
external MIDI devices. See below.
Rhythm Start/Stop Tx
If you activate this option, the BK-5 sends start or
stop messages when you start (or stop) rhythm play-
back.
Basic
The parameters of this group affect the
BK-5’s Basic channel. The Basic channel is
used to receive and transmit Program
Change and Bank Select messages for
selecting Performances as well as for the
reception and transmission of other kinds
of messages that are not directly related
to a specific MIDI channel. See page 107.
Parameter
Setting
Rhythm Start/Stop Tx Off, On
Rhythm Clock Tx
If you activate this option the rhythm playback sends
Rhythm
The parameters of this group affect the
BK-5’s Rhythm channel. The Rhythm
channel is used for receiving program
select rhythm and volume messages that
change the rhythm’s volume. See
page 108.
Parameter
Setting
Rhythm Clock Tx
SMF Start/Stop Tx
NTA
These parameters allow you to assign MIDI
channels to the BK-5’s NTA parts (Note-
to-Arranger). Only notes received on one
information that can be used to transpose
rhythm playback in real-time. See
page 108.
Parameter
Setting
SMF Start/Stop Tx
SMF Clock Tx
Parameter
Setting
Parameters This group contains MIDI parameters that
are not related to the previous groups. See
page 109.
SMF Clock Tx
Off, On
SMF Position Tx
Visual Con- Allows you to set the MIDI transmit chan-
If you switch this parameter on, the song playback
sends Song Position Pointer (SPP) messages that
trol TxCh
nel for the Visual Control function. (The
BK-5 does not receive Visual Control mes-
sages.)
Parameter
Setting
SMF Position Tx
Off, On
Sync Rx
This parameter is used to specify whether rhythm
and song playback should be synchronized by an
Parameter
Setting
Sync Rx
Off, On
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
r
MIDI parameters
Mode
Performance PC Tx
This parameter is used to enable or disable the trans-
mission of program change and bank select messages
Parameter
Mode
Setting
Internal, Auto, MIDI, Remote
Parameter
Setting
Internal: Song or rhythm playback uses BK-5 inter-
nal tempo.
Performance PC Tx
Off, On
Auto: A good setting for remote control of song or
rhythm playback (using a PK-series dynamic MIDI
pedal board, for example). If the BK-5 receives a MIDI
Start message (FA), it waits for Clock messages that
specify the tempo. If those Clock messages are not
received, the BK-5 starts playback using its internal
tempo. If, however, Clock messages (F8) follow after
the Start message, the BK-5 uses the external tempo.
Part Switch Tx
Whenever you mute or un-mute a part on the
“Rhythm Parts” page, the BK-5 transmits an NRPN
message that describes your action. Not sending this
message may be useful to keep your external
sequencer from recording it—or the receiving GS
module from muting the part assigned to that MIDI
channel.
MIDI: Song or rhythm playback can be started or
stopped with MIDI real-time messages (Start, Stop,
Clock) received from an external clock source.
Parameter
Setting
Part Switch Tx
Off, On
Remote: Song or rhythm playback waits for a start
message to start playback at its own tempo. When it
receives a stop message, playback stops. External
Rx
Switches the reception of MIDI messages on the
Parameter
Setting
Basic
Rx
Off, On
The following parameters are located on the display
page that can be selected using [MENU] button‰
“MIDI” ‰ “Edit System” ‰ “Basic”.
Rx Channel
Use this parameter to assign a MIDI transmit channel
Parameter
Setting
Rx Channel
1~16
Performance PC Rx
This parameter is used to enable or disable the recep-
tion of program change and bank select messages
Parameter
Setting
The Basic channel is used to receive and transmit
Program Change and Bank Select messages for
selecting Performances, as well as for the reception
and transmission of other kinds of messages that are
not directly related to a specific MIDI channel.
Performance PC Rx
Off, On
Master Volume Rx
Allows you to enable or disable the reception of Mas-
ter Volume messages that would change the BK-5’s
overall volume. This is an exclusive message common
NOTE
If you select another channel, messages intended for the
Basic parameters might also cause other parameters to
change when you don’t want them to.
Parameter
Setting
Master Volume Rx
Off, On
The following parameters are available here:
Tx
Part Switch Rx
Switches the transmission of MIDI messages on the
Whenever you mute or un-mute a part on the
“Rhythm Parts” page, the BK-5 transmits an NRPN
message that describes your action. You can keep the
BK-5 from responding to such messages to avoid
Parameter
Setting
Tx
Off, On
Parameter
Setting
Tx Channel
Part Switch Rx
Off, On
Parameter
Setting
Tx Channel
1~16
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Menu options
Rhythm Volume Rx
Rhythm
Allows you to enable or disable the reception of vol-
The following parameters are located on the display
page that can be selected using [MENU] button‰
“MIDI” ‰ “Edit System” ‰ “Rhythm”.
Parameter
Setting
Rhythm Volume Rx
Off, On
Rhythm Pc Rx
This parameter allows you to enable or disable the
reception of program change and bank select mes-
Parameter
Setting
Off, On
The Rhythm channel is used for receiving program
change and bank select messages that select rhythms
and volume messages that change the rhythm’s vol-
ume.
NTA
The following parameters are located on the display
page that can be selected using [MENU] button‰
“MIDI” ‰ “Edit System” ‰ “NTA”.
p. 117), whereas the program change number defines
the Division (Intro, Ending, etc.). See “Rhythm division
program change numbers” on p. 118.
Sending only a program change number selects
another Division of the currently active rhythm. Be
aware, however, that only sending CC00 and CC32
messages (without a program change) has no effect.
NTA notes are only received (from an external MIDI
instrument). What you play in the chord recognition
area of the keyboard to feed the Arranger is auto-
matically converted to the corresponding MIDI note
numbers, so that all rhythm parts transmit their
notes to external instruments. There is thus no need
to transmit the note messages of what you play in
the chord recognition area (NTA) separately.
NOTE
When you select another rhythm on your BK-5, it transmits
a CC00-CC32-PC cluster on the Rhythm channel, which
you could record using an external sequencer.
Tx
Switches the transmission of MIDI messages on the
These parameters allow you to specify on which MIDI
channels the BK-5 should receive chord information
used to change the rhythm’s key in real-time.
Parameter
Setting
Tx
Off, On
Channel
Tx Channel
Allows you to select the MIDI channel on which the
Parameter
Setting
Parameter
Setting
Tx Channel
1~16
Channel
Ch1~Ch16
Rx
Rx
Switches the reception of MIDI messages on the
This parameter allows you to specify whether (“On”)
or not (“Off”) the selected MIDI channel should be
Parameter
Setting
Parameter
Setting
Rx
Off, On
Rx
Off, On
Rx Channel
Use this parameter to assign a MIDI receive channel
Parameter
Setting
Rx Channel
1~16
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
r
MIDI parameters
Rx Octave
If you don’t select “On”, specify which velocity value
to use instead of the continuous flux. The value you
set will be used for all notes sent to MIDI OUT/USB
Use this parameter to transpose the notes received
on the selected MIDI channel (“Ch”) in steps of one
octave.
Parameter
Setting
Parameter
Setting
Rx Octave
–4~0~4
Tx Velocity
On, 1~127
Rx Global Limit Low/High
These parameters allow you to set the note range to
Tx SysEx
Use this parameter to specify whether (“On”) or not
(“Off”) the BK-5 should send SysEx messages. Such
messages are not standardized, so that each manu-
facturer can use them ad lib for temporary (or per-
manent) changes to the way a part behaves. Effects
parameters, for instance, can only be changed via
SysEx messages.
be received. If not all note messages of the selected
MIDI channel should be received by the NTA “part”,
set the range to the desired values.
Parameter
Setting
C–~G9
C–~G9
Rx Global Limit Low
Rx Global Limit High
Such messages may slow down playback on external
MIDI instruments or yield no effect at all, which is
why you have the option to switch off their trans-
NOTE
The “Limit Low” value cannot be higher than the “Limit
Parameter
Setting
Tx SysEx
Off, On
Parameters
Tx Data Change
The following parameters are located on the display
page that can be selected using [MENU] button‰
“MIDI” ‰ “Edit System” ‰ “Parameters”.
This parameter allows you to specify how the original
program changes of the songs you play back are
transmitted via MIDI. The BK-5 may change sound
addresses (usually CC00 and CC32 values) so as to
play back all songs with the best possible quality. If
you switch this parameter on, such real-time trans-
formations are also transmitted via MIDI. If you
switch this parameter off, the original sound
addresses are transmitted to the receiving device.
(But the BK-5’s tone generator continues to
Parameter
Setting
This page contains several parameters that are not
related to one another (the other MIDI pages always
concentrate on one aspect).
Tx Data Change
Off, On
Octave Tx
Part Switch
The “Octave Tx” parameter can be set to Absolute or
Relative. You may have noticed that if you assign a
bass sound to the UP1 or UP2 part in SPLIT mode, the
notes are transposed to allow you to play meaningful
bass lines using the UP1/2 part. “Relative” means that
this internal (and automatic) transposition is trans-
lated into MIDI note numbers.
This parameter allows you to specify whether or not a
Parameter
Setting
Part Switch
Internal, Int+MIDI
Internal: A muted part can no longer be played via
tinues to send MIDI messages. Selecting “Internal”
and muting a part thus has the same effect as select-
ing “Local Off” (see p. 103).
In “Absolute” mode, however, the MIDI note numbers
sent to other instruments will be the ones of the keys
Parameter
Setting
Int+MIDI: A muted part can no longer be played via
the BK-5’s keyboard or Arranger/song player and no
longer sends MIDI messages.
Octave Tx
Relative, Absolute
Rx Velocity
Your BK-5 is equipped with a velocity-sensitive key-
board and a tone generator capable of responding to
velocity messages. This parameter allows you to
switch the reception (RX) of velocity messages on or
Tx Velocity
Your BK-5 is equipped with a velocity-sensitive key-
board and a tone generator capable of responding to
velocity messages. Use this parameter to switch the
transmission (TX) of velocity messages on or off.
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Menu options
off. If you don’t need “On”, specify which velocity
value to use instead of the continuous flux. This value
The display changes to:
Parameter
Setting
Rx Velocity
On, 1~127
Rx SySex
Use this parameter to specify whether the BK-5
Parameter
Setting
3. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
the MIDI Set where you want to save your
settings (“User1”~ “User8”).
4. Press the [ENTER/SELECT] button to confirm.
A confirmation message informs you that the MIDI
Set has been saved.
Rx SySex
Off, On
Rx Transpose
Use this parameter to specify whether or not the
BK-5 should transpose the MIDI note messages it
receives.
Parameter
Setting
If you change the MIDI settings after loading a “User”
set, the BK-5 alerts you to the fact that you may
need to save the MIDI Set again (provided, you want
to keep your changes):
Rx Transpose
Off, On
Soft Thru
Select “On” if the BK-5 should transmit all MIDI mes-
Parameter
Setting
Visual Control TxCh
This parameter allows you to set the MIDI transmit
channel for the Visual Control function. (The BK-5
does not receive Visual Control messages.) By default,
Parameter
Setting
Visual Control TxCh
1~16
Save MIDI Set
This function allows you to save your changes to a
“User” memory for quick recall.
This function can be selected using the [WRITE] button
while the “MIDI” page is displayed.
1. Edit the desired MIDI parameters (“Edit
Rhythm Parts”, “Edit Song Parts”, “Edit Tone
Parts”, “Edit System”).
2. Press the [WRITE] button.
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
r
Factory Reset
Factory Reset
Formatting a USB memory
The following function allows you to recall the BK-5’s
original factory settings. This has no effect on the data
stored on a USB memory.
This function allows you to format the connected USB
memory.
USB memories using the FAT-32 file system may not
need to be formatted. We nevertheless recommend for-
matting all new USB storage devices with the BK-5.
1. Press the [MENU] button.
IMPORTANT NOTE: Formatting a USB memory means
that all files (songs, rhythms, etc.) it contains are lost.
Always check the contents of the memory before decid-
ing to format it.
1. Connect the a USB storage you want to for-
mat device to the USB MEMORY port on the
BK-5’s front panel.
2. Press the [MENU] button.
The display changes to:
3. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
the “Format USB Device” entry, then press
the [ENTER/SELECT] button.
2. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
the “Factory Reset” entry, then press the
[ENTER/SELECT] button.
4. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
“YES”, then press the [ENTER/SELECT] but-
ton to format the USB memory.
3. Rotate the [CURSOR÷VALUE] dial to select
“YES”, then press the [ENTER/SELECT] but-
ton to load the factory settings.
A confirmation message informs you that the USB
memory has been formatted.
Select “NO” to return to the previous display page
without loading the factory settings.
A confirmation message informs you that the BK-5
has been initialized.
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Menu options
■ The following folders are created on the USB
memory
Name
Value
My Performances This folder is used to save Perfor-
mance Lists. (The contents of this
folder cannot be viewed by pressing
the [USB MEMORY] button. You need
to press the PERFORMANCE [LIST]
button gain access to the files it con-
tains. The contents can be viewed on
a computer, however.)
My Recordings
This folder is used to store your audio
recordings (see p. 52).
My Songs
This folder can be used to save SMF
songs you edited with the “Makeup
Tools” functions (see p. 74).
My Rhythms
rhythms you edited with the “Makeup
Tools” or “Rhythm Composer” func-
tions (see p. 74).
NOTE
We recommend copying the contents of your USB memory
to your computer before formatting it.
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
r
Visual Control function
16. Visual Control function
The BK-5 has a powerful interface for realtime audio-and-video integration. “Visual Control” is a function that allows
music and images to be performed together. When MIDI Visual Control- or V-LINK compatible devices are connected via
MIDI, you’ll be able to easily enjoy a variety of visual effects that are linked to the expressive elements of your perfor-
mance.
For example, if you use the BK-5 with the EDIROL P-10,
you’ll be able to use the various controls on the BK-5’s
keyboard to switch and control images on the EDIROL
P-10.
The following confirmation appears:
In order to enjoy the Visual Control function with the
BK-5 and the EDIROL P-10, you’ll need to make connec-
tions using a MIDI cable (sold separately).
The display changes to:
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
Image output
Edirol P-10 Visual
Repeat this step to switch the Visual Control function
back off. The following message briefly confirms this
operation:
Sampler
Projector
NOTE
To prevent malfunction and speaker damage, you must mini-
mize the volume on all equipment and turn off their power
before you make any connections.
1. Connect the BK-5’s MIDI OUT socket to the
MIDI IN socket of the optional MIDI Visual
Control/V-LINK device.
2. Press and hold the [BASS INV] button while
pressing the [AUTO FILL IN] button.
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Visual Control function
Selecting clips and banks on an
optional MIDI Visual Control/
V-LINK device
1. Switch on the “Visual Control” function.
2. Press a key in the highest octave (C#6~C7)
to select the desired clips on the external
MIDI Visual Control/V-LINK-compatible
device.
Clip selection via MIDI Visual
Control/V-LINK
MIDI
message
Key
MIDI Visual Control/V-LINK
C#6
Control the image bank
(Bank Select)
BF 00 00
D6
Switch images (Clip 1)
CF 00
D#6
Control the image bank
(Bank Select)
BF 00 01
E6
Switch images (Clip 2)
Switch images (Clip 3)
CF 01
F6
CF 02
F#6
Control the image bank
(Bank Select)
BF 00 02
G6
Switch images (Clip 4)
CF 03
G#6
Control the image bank
(Bank Select)
BF 00 03
A6
Switch images (Clip 5)
CF 04
A#6
Control the image bank
(Bank Select)
BF 00 04
B6
C7
Switch images (Clip 6)
Switch images (Clip 7)
CF 05
CF 06
Using the black keys (Bank Select) and white keys
(PC), 5 x 7= 35 clips can be selected.
NOTE
While the Visual Control function is active, the C#6~C7
keys are temporarily unavailable for playing notes.
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
r
Troubleshooting
17. Troubleshooting
Symptom
Action
Page
Power does not turn on.
Is the included AC adaptor/power cord correctly connected to an
AC outlet and to the BK-5?
16
Do not use any AC adaptor or power cord other than the ones
included. Doing so will cause malfunctions.
No sound from the BK-5.
Did you switch the BK-5 on?
16
—
Could the [VOLUME] knob be turned down? Select a higher set-
ting.
Can you hear sound through headphones?
—
If you can hear sound through headphones, it may be that the
connection cables are broken, or that your amp or speaker has
malfunctioned. Check the cables and your equipment once again.
Could the part volume settings have been minimized?
Check the “Volume” setting of each part.
56, 61
—
Could a MIDI message received from an external MIDI device (vol-
ume message or exclusive message) have lowered the volume?
The volume level of the instrument is too low
when it is connected to an amplifier.
Could you be using a connection cable that contains a resistor?
Use a connection cable that doesn’t contain a resistor.
—
The pitch of the selected rhythm/song is incorrect. Is the “Tuning” setting appropriate?
Did you transpose the rhythm/song? Also check the “Rhythm
65
—
Scale Tune” parameter.
Can’t hear the vocal of an audio file (mp3 or WAV). If the [TRACK MUTE] (CENTER CANCEL) button is lit, the vocal
sound will be attenuated.
42
Can’t hear the melody of SMF files.
If the [TRACK MUTE] button is lit, the melody of the MIDI files will
be muted. Switch it off.
A “buzz” is heard from the external amplifier
Is the external amplifier or other device used with the BK-5 con-
nected to a different AC power outlet?
—
Connect the amplifier or other device to the same AC outlet as the
BK-5.
Can’t play an audio/mp3-format song
Is the song in a format that the BK-5 is able to read?
34
—
After connecting the BK-5’s USB COMPUTER port The BK-5 may be receiving on a MIDI channel on which the MIDI
to your computer, the BK-5 doesn’t receive MIDI controller doesn’t transmit. Correct the MIDI controller’s transmit
messages.
channel.
Unable to read from/write to USB memory.
Are you using an (optional) Roland USB memory (M-UF series)?
Reliable performance cannot be guaranteed if you use non-
Roland USB memory products.
—
Check the format of your USB memory. The BK-5 can use USB
memory that has been formatted as FAT. If your USB memory was
formatted using any other method, please re-format it using the
BK-5.
111
Can’t save to USB memory.
Could the USB memory be write protected?
—
—
—
Is there sufficient free space on the USB memory?
Audio recording won’t start or stops unexpectedly. Are you using an (optional) Roland USB memory (M-UF-series)?
Reliable performance cannot be guaranteed if you use non-
Roland USB memory products.
Is there sufficient free space on the USB memory?
—
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Troubleshooting
Symptom
Action
Page
18
The external screen remains dark.
Did you connect it to the VIDEO OUTPUT socket?
Did you switch on your TV or external screen—and did you select
the correct channel? See the TV’s or screen’s owners manual for
how to select the channel that corresponds to the video input to
which the BK-5 is connected.
—
Are you using a supported TV or monitor screen?
—
—
Thin horizontal lines flicker in the television
screen.
Thin horizontal lines may flicker on the television screen, but this
is due to the television itself, and is not a malfunction of the BK-5.
Can’t see the edge of the image on the television In some cases, the edge of the image may not be visible on the
—
—
screen
television screen, but this is due to the characteristics of the tele-
vision and is not a malfunction on the BK-5.
Lyric display is wrong.
For some types of music files, the lyrics may sometimes be dis-
played incorrectly. Some words may be incorrectly shown outside
the screen display area.
Insufficient volume from a device connected to
the BK-5’s AUDIO INPUT (STEREO) socket.
resistor? Use a connection cable that does not contain a resistor.
—
—
Check the setting of the “Audio In Level” parameter and correct it,
if necessary (page 68).
The songs won’t play.
The file type of the song is not one of the file types that the BK-5
can play.
34
It may be that the song data is damaged.
—
—
—
No Performance Lists are displayed.
The USB memory doesn’t contain any Performance List files.
For some reason the USB memory is not recognized.
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
r
Rhythm list
18. Rhythm list
No. Name
CC00 CC32
No. Name
CC00 CC32
No. Name
CC00 CC32
Pop Rock
68 Ladies Dance
69 UK Dance
70 Fire Beat
71 Housing
72 Survive Disco
73 Dancin'
74 Earth Boogie
75 DJ Groove
76 Hitmix
77 House Maillorca
78 Club House
79 DJ Techno
80 Hard Techno
81 Barry Dance
82 Poppin' Schlager
83 Folk Schlager
84 Disco Schlager
85 Latin Schlager
86 Happy Schlager
87 Party Schlager
88 Schlager Pop
89 Phunk Beat
90 Spear Beat
91 Baby Beat
92 Downtown Funk
93 Wahoo Groove
94 Rap Anthem
95 Breath Rap
96 Now Hip Hop
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
28
28
28
28
28
33
33
66
28
32
11
27
21
26
34
33
6
10
9
7
8
13
1
134 It Tango
26
17
53
34
7
18
40
7
14
119
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Flood Pop
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
71
71
71
6
6
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
7
7
4
1
117
118
120
121
122
80
81
124
125
126
0
2
1
114
110
80
3
135 Mazurca 1
136 Tarantella Disco
137 Gold Foxtrot
138 Gold Jive
139 Quick Step
140 It Fox
141 It Swing Fox
142 Gold Rhumba
143 It Beguine
144 Romantic Beguine
145 Beguine
146 Gold Cha Cha
147 It Mambo
148 Meneaito
149 Simple Cumbia
150 It Hully Gully
151 Go! Twist
152 It Bachata
153 Gold Samba
154 Gold Bossa
155 Gold Euro March
Frank's Way
Easy Ballad
Sky Beat
Home Beat
Slow Beat
Fate Beat
69
50
50
23
39
39
39
24
38
22
46
22
10
22
27
22
20
88
89
13
27
26
16
17
14
38
4
50
30
49
26
47
24
Romantic Beat
Due Beat
10 Acoustic Ballad
11 Adult Contemp
12 Gold Slow Beat
13 Time Pop
14 Gold Medium Beat
15 Sunshine Pop
16 Blue Pop
17 Euro Ballad
18 Killing Beat
19 Jessie Beat
20 Pink Beat
21 Billy Beat
22 Breakin'Beat
23 Fancy Beat
24 US Country Pop
25 Gold Beat
26 Radio Pop
27 US Shuffle
28 UK Shuffle
29 Eric Beat
30 Strummin' Pop
31 Amazing Gospel
32 Night Ballad
33 6_8 Ballad
2
46
47
44
43
42
21
22
19
17
18
13
14
16
4
5
114
115
116
117
118
101
22
23
14
11
12
5
7
9
57
2
1
Latin World1
156 Carlos Beat
157 Orchestr Cha Cha
158 That's Mambo
159 Bachata
22
24
38
22
22
22
22
59
27
27
27
27
27
22
70
22
22
22
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
45
16
13
40
43
42
41
4
24
23
9
10
25
46
2
160 Go!Salsa
4
161 Cuba Salsa
162 Cool Merengue
163 Fast Merengue
164 Orchestral Samba
165 Acoustic Samba
166 Brazilian Samba
167 Sambalegre
168 Organ Samba
169 Organ Bossa
170 Orchestral Bossa
171 Jazz Bossa
172 Club Bossa
173 Fast Bossa
174 AfroPeruana
175 Andina
176 ChaChaCha
177 Chundo
178 Cumbia Neo
179 Cumbia Nortena
180 Cumbia Radio
181 Cumbia Sonidera
182 Cumbia Trad
183 Duranguense
184 Huaracha
185 Latin Capital
186 Latin Club
187 Latin Pop
68
68
68
68
68
68
5
68
68
68
68
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Jazz Blues
97 BlueEyesBand
98 OrganSwingMedium 12
99 OrganJazzFast
100 Gold Swing
101 Swingin'
12
41
42
43
44
45
46
25
24
35
18
19
20
31
32
37
38
28
30
26
1
12
12
12
12
14
14
12
14
14
14
12
12
12
12
17
44
44
44
44
5
34 6_8 Pop
35 Love Sl Rock
36 Unplugged Pop
37 Unplugged Ballad
38 Cool Live Band
39 Acoustic Pop
40 Rolling Rock
41 Green Rock
42 Spring Rock
43 Broken Beat
44 Straight Rock
45 Joe's Rock
46 Countdown Rock
47 Cool Shuffle
48 Breaky Rock
49 JuliRock
50 LoveRock
51 Electro Rock
52 MunichRock
102 Cool Big Band
103 Breezy Swing
104 Biggest Band
105 Midnight SlSwing
106 Big Band Slow
107 Big Band Medium
108 Big Band Fast
109 Swing Medium
110 Swing Fast
111 Jz Guitar Swing
112 Pop Swing
113 Slow Jz Waltz
114 Cool Soul
115 Soul
116 Sweet Blues
117 Cool Blues
118 Over Rockin'
119 UK Rock'N
120 Baby Rock'N
121 Go! Rock'N
122 Blue Boogie
123 Rock'N Slow
8
6
1
44
16
18
83
80
81
82
72
69
76
68
73
77
62
74
(Latin Am.)
(Latin Am.)
(Latin Am.)
(Latin Am.)
(Latin Am.)
(Latin Am.)
(Latin Am.)
(Latin Am.)
(Latin Am.)
(Latin Am.)
(Latin Am.)
(Latin Am.)
(Latin Am.)
(Latin Am.)
(Latin Am.)
(Latin Am.)
(Latin Am.)
(Latin Am.)
(Latin Am.)
(Latin Am.)
(Brazil)
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
40
36
38
44
27
37
39
43
1
1
1
1
2
56
51
39
36
38
35
5
10
5
5
5
Disco Dance
53 Peas Disco
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
1
2
3
4
54 California Disco
55 Edge Disco
56 Saxo Disco
57 Broken Dance
58 Beat Generation
59 Seventies
60 Volare Gipsy
61 Night'sDance
62 Hung Disco
63 Jamiro Dance
64 Just Disco
188 Mariachi Fies
189 MariachiTrad
190 Merengue
Ball Room
5
191 Latin Ska
124 Gold Wien Waltz
125 Gold Slow Waltz
126 It Valzer
127 Moon Waltz
128 Alpenwalzer
129 Polca Disco
130 It Polca
131 Paso Doble
132 Gold Tango
133 Cool Tango
17
17
17
17
17
19
19
40
26
26
55
56
57
58
49
33
34
4
60
61
62
63
64
57
58
59
56
65
192 Son Cubano
193 Son Jarocho
194 Pop Reggae Br
195 Funk Carioca
196 MPB Funk
197 Sertanejo
198 Arrastape
199 Guarania
200 Pagode
(Brazil)
(Brazil)
(Brazil)
(Brazil)
(Brazil)
(Brazil)
(Brazil)
65 2000's Disco
66 Slow Disco
67 Gold Disco
17
15
201 Samba-Enredo
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Rhythm list
No. Name
202 Samba
CC00 CC32
No. Name
275 Punjabi
276 Roopak
CC00 CC32
E-Series compatibility
(Brazil)
(Brazil)
(Brazil)
(Brazil)
(Brazil)
(Brazil)
(Brazil)
(Brazil)
(Brazil)
(Brazil)
(Brazil)
(Brazil)
(India)
(India)
(India)
(India)
(India)
(India)
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
41
32
42
30
28
29
33
34
35
46
45
31
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
41
42
43
44
45
46
93
94
47
48
49
50
51
52
89
81
82
90
80
84
83
85
86
88
87
28
29
30
31
32
27
203 Chorinho
204 Samba-Duro
205 Brega
206 Arrocha
207 Bossa Nova
208 Forro 1
209 Forro 2
210 Forro 3
211 Xote
Rhythm Divisions
Intro
PC
83
82
81
84
85
277 Sam e Gazal
278 Sindhi Lada
279 South Indian
280 South Masti
281 Melayu
282 Pop Indonesia
283 DangdutKoplo
284 DangdutStd
285 Kolintang
286 PopKeroncong
287 PopMinang
288 PopSunda
289 ThaiChaCha
290 I'SanChaCha 1
291 I'SanChaCha 2
292 ThaiOffBeat
293 Guaracha
294 Rumwong
295 I'SanRumwong
296 Serng
297 SlowRumwong
298 TaLoong
299 SongMai
300 Chinese Blue
301 Chinese Bossa
302 Chinese Jazz Pop
303 Chinese Techno
304 Chinese Teen Funk
305 2RTechno
Fill in To Original
Fill in To Variation
Ending
(Indonesia)
(Indonesia)
(Indonesia)
(Indonesia)
(Indonesia)
(Indonesia)
(Indonesia)
(Indonesia)
(Thailand)
(Thailand)
(Thailand)
(Thailand)
(Thailand)
(Thailand)
(Thailand)
(Thailand)
(Thailand)
(Thailand)
(Thailand)
(China)
Break Mute
Recalling a Performance
memory from the loaded
Performance List via MIDI
The following bank select and pro-
gram change messages allow you
to select the desired Performance
memory from the loaded Perfor-
mance List. These MIDI messages
must be received on the BK-5’s
Basic channel.
212 Vanerao
213 Chamame
Tradit World2
214 Lazy Reggae
215 Love Reggae
216 Reggae
217 Country Flyer
218 Pop Gospel
219 Gospel Shuffle
220 Ska
8
6
8
7
8
8
16
44
44
67
67
19
16
19
17
50
50
50
5
26
33
34
4
221 Irish
3
222 Southern Twang
223 SteamtrainCountr
224 Posaunenpolka
225 Posaunenwalzer
226 Orchestr Sl Fox
227 Pop Fox
32
25
31
50
84
86
87
33
20
19
15
16
82
85
11
10
18
48
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Basic structure
CC00 122 (Fixed value)
CC32 0~7 (Page value)
(China)
(China)
(China)
(China)
228 Fox Band
229 Oldies
PC
1~128 (Value)
230 Slow Country
231 Country Ballad
232 Country Rock
233 Country Beat
234 Country Fox
235 Country Pop
236 6_8 March
237 US March
238 Country Swing
239 Orchestral Waltz
240 HU Beat
241 HU Csardas
242 HU Disco
16
16
16
16
50
50
20
20
16
17
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
(China)
Here is how to calculate which
values to assign to the CC00, CC32
and PC messages:
Rhythm division program
change numbers
CC00 122 (Fixed)
CC32 (Performance memory
number – 1) / 128
The following program change
numbers allow you to select the
mitted on the BK-5’s rhythm
channel (see “Rhythm—Rx Chan-
nel” on p. 108).
(East Europe)
(East Europe)
(East Europe)
(East Europe)
(East Europe)
(East Europe)
(East Europe)
(East Europe)
(East Europe)
(East Europe)
(East Europe)
(East Europe)
(East Europe)
(East Europe)
(East Europe)
(East Europe)
(East Europe)
(East Europe)
(East Europe)
(East Europe)
(East Europe)
(East Europe)
(East Europe)
(East Europe)
(East Europe)
(East Europe)
(East Europe)
(India)
PC
Performance memory num-
ber – (CC32 x 128)
243 HU Discofox
244 HU Latin-pop1
245 HU Latin-pop2
246 HU Mulatos
247 HU Polka
For example, to recall Performance
memory number 280, you will
need to transmit:
corrseponding CC00 and CC32
bank select values (see “Rhythm
list” on p. 117) before one of the
program changes numbers shown
below.
248 HU Ragga
CC00 122
249 HU Rock & Roll
250 HU Roma kv
251 HU Twist
252 PL Brathanki
253 PL Dance Hit
254 PL Disco Polka
255 PL Dziew 6-8
256 PL GroovRock
257 PL Laendler
258 PL Polka
259 PL Swing
260 PL Tango
261 PL WiosnaDnc
262 SRB 7-8
263 SRB 9-8
264 SRB Dvojka
265 SRB Rumba
266 SRB Tamburasi 2-4
267 Deepchandi
268 Filmy Masti
269 Garba
270 Goa Masti
271 Gujrati Pop
272 Kaharva
CC32 (280 – 1) / 128= 2
PC
280 – (2 x 128)= 24
Note: Be aware that the BK-5
transmits its Performance memory
addresses based on the system
shown above.
Rhythm Divisions
Intro1
Intro2
Intro3
Intro4
Main 1
Main 2
Main 3
Main 4
Fill Down1
Fill Down2
Fill Down3
Fill Up1
Fill Up2
Fill Up3
Ending1
Ending2
Ending3
Ending4
PC
67
68
65
66
01
02
09
10
89
100
90
97
99
98
75
76
73
74
(India)
(India)
(India)
(India)
(India)
(India)
(India)
273 Lavani Guddu
274 Marathi
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
r
Tone List
19. Tone List
No. Name
CC00 CC32 PC
No. Name
CC00 CC32 PC
No. Name
CC00 CC32 PC
Piano - E.Piano
0001 NaturalPiano
0002 SuperiorPian
0003 ClassicPiano
0004 UprightPiano
0005 Brite Piano
0006 Mild Piano
0007 MonoAcPiano
0008 European Pf
0009 Rock Piano
0010 Piano+String
0011 Piano+Choir
0012 StackedPiano
0013 RD Piano 1
0014 RD Piano 1 w
0015 Dance Piano
0016 Honky-tonk 1
0017 Honky-tonk 2
0018 Vintage EP1
0019 Vintage EP2
0020 Stage
0069 Stevie's B3
0070 Dyno Rotary
0071 Hang Twice
0072 Felix Ballad
0073 XV Organ
0074 B3 Has Come
0075 Head Up B3
0076 Br.Ballad B3
0077 Organ 1
82
82
85
84
80
88
80
81
0
0
0
2
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
2
2
17
19
18
18
19
18
17
17
17
18
19
17
17
17
17
20
20
20
20
20
21
17
19
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
19
19
19
19
19
18
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
18
17
21
17
17
17
23
23
23
23
22
22
22
22
22
24
24
24
22
22
22
22
22
22
0139 It Musette
0140 AccR16
0141 AccR8
0142 AccR8S
0143 AccR4
15
16
17
18
19
2
2
2
2
2
22
22
22
22
22
0
47
0
1
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
3
3
3
2
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
5
6
6
6
6
5
3
3
5
8
8
8
8
8
8
7
7
7
7
12
12
12
13
14
13
13
10
9
E.Guitar - Bass
2
0144 Warm Drive
0145 Clean Solid
0146 Clean Elect.
0147 Clean El Oct
0148 Clean Gt.
0149 Clean Mute
0150 Dynamic Mute
0151 Jazz Guitar1
0152 Jazz Guitar2
0153 Jazz Gt.
65
69
64
65
0
67
66
62
80
0
8
1
9
4
8
64
3
1
0
64
68
0
65
66
9
24
25
2
19
81
16
65
66
26
11
23
22
1
2
3
17
18
5
8
21
0
1
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
30
28
28
28
28
29
28
27
27
27
27
27
28
28
28
31
31
31
31
29
29
29
29
29
30
31
31
29
28
27
31
31
31
31
30
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
29
28
30
30
30
30
30
85
31
31
31
28
30
30
28
29
31
32
32
121
121
45
16
2
24
26
47
0
8
80
0
0078 Organ 2
0079 Organ 3
0080 Ful Organ 1
0081 Ful Organ 2
0082 Ful Organ 3
0083 Ful Organ 4
0084 Church Org.1
0085 Church Org.2
0086 Church Org.3
0087 Organ Flute
0088 Theater Org.
0089 Reed Organ
0090 60's Organ
0091 Org Jazz1 /9
0092 Jazz Organ 1
0093 Jazz Organ 2
0094 Jazz Organ 3
0095 Jazz Organ 4
0096 JazzOrgan RD
0097 Perc.Organ 1
0098 Perc.Organ 2
0099 Perc.Organ 3
0100 Full Perc
4
10
0
8
0154 PedalSteel
0155 Mellow Gt.
0156 JC ChrusGt
0157 JC CleanGt
0158 Chorus Gt
0159 Distortion
0160 Distort Gt1
0161 Distort Gt2
0162 Distort Gt3
0163 Dist. Mute
0164 Muted Over
0165 Muted Gt. 1
0166 Muted Gt. 2
0167 Muted Gt. 3
0168 LP OverDrv
0169 RockRhythm1
0170 RockRhythm2
0171 TC MutedGt
0172 TC Clean
0173 JGuitar Scat
0174 Power Gt.1
0175 Power Gt.2
0176 Power Gt.3
0177 Dist Rtm GTR
0178 LP HalfDrv2
0179 Mid Tone GTR
0180 LP RearAtk
0181 Clean Half
0182 OpenHard 1
0183 OpenHard 2
0184 TC RearPk
0185 TC Cln ff
8
16
24
33
0
16
83
1
3
4
5
81
32
33
34
87
86
17
16
24
8
47
8
83
24
1
81
82
80
47
44
46
17
9
0021 Pro Stage
0022 Phase EP
0023 Tremolo EP
0024 Dist E.Piano
0025 Cho. E.Piano
0026 E.Piano 1
0
0
0027 E.Piano 2
0028 FM EPiano1
0029 FM EPiano2
0030 FM+SA EP
0031 St.FM EP
0032 Hard FM EP
0033 EP Legend
0034 EP Phase
0035 St.Soft EP
0036 MIDI EPiano1
0037 MIDI EPiano2
0038 Wurly
80
81
16
16
24
10
32
8
1
2
24
1
0
17
38
16
32
2
24
8
0
0
8
1
0
0101 Fire Perc
0102 Rock Organ
0103 Rotary Org.S
0104 Rotary Org.F
0105 Rotary Organ
0106 L-Organ
0107 Chorus Or
0108 Mellow 1
0039 Clav. 1
0040 Clav. 2
0109 Cheese Organ
0110 Organ 101
0111 JX8 Organ
0112 D-50 Organ
0113 VS Organ
0041 Phase Clav
0042 JP8000 Clav.
0043 Reso Clav.
0044 Analog Clav.
0045 Harpsichord1
0046 Harpsichord2
0047 Coupled Hps.
0048 Harpsi.w
0049 Vibraphone
0050 Vibraphone w
0051 Pop Vibe.
0052 Marimba w
0053 Xylophone w
0054 Balafon
0055 Balafon SRX
0056 Glockenspiel
0057 Celesta
0058 Pop Celesta
0059 Music Box 1
0060 Music Box 2
0061 Carillon
0062 Tubular-bell
0063 Church Bell
Organ - Accord
0064 B3 Sermon
0065 Blues Perc
0066 All Skate!
30
25
28
8
0114 Trem. Organ
0115 E.Organ 16+2
0116 Organ Bass
0117 Puff Organ
0118 Hybrid Organ
0119 70's E.Organ
0120 Farf Organ
0121 Mellow Harm
0122 Hand Harm.
0123 B.Harp Basic
0124 B.Harp Suppl
0125 Acc. Master
0126 Acc. Classic
0127 Italian Folk
0128 Fr. Musette
0129 Steierische
0130 Bandoneon 1
0131 Bandoneon 2
0132 Bandoneon 3
0133 Soft Accord
0134 Accordion Fr
0135 Accordion It
0136 OrganAcc
2
40
16
27
32
19
0
51
8
9
69
68
52
53
54
8
0186 AtkCleanGt
0187 Funk Pop
0188 LP Rear
0189 Overdrv Gt
0190 Overdrive1
0191 Overdrive2
0192 Overdrive3
0193 More Drive
0194 Dance Dst.Gt
0195 Dist.Fast
0196 Dazed Gtr
0197 Attack Dist
0198 LP Rear Pk
0199 LP HalfDrv
0200 LP Chorus
0201 TCFrntPick
0202 Funk Gt.
0
17
15
0
0
1
0
1
9
0
64
3
11
4
2
5
20
10
12
16
16
8
9
11
11
15
15
15
0
8
52
25
64
8
12
13
14
12
80
82
83
81
4
4
4
4
4
17
18
18
18
19
0203 Gt.Feedback1
0204 Gt.Feedback2
0205 Gt.Harmonics
0206 Gt.Cut Noise
0207 Pick Scrape
9
0
1
6
0067 R&B B3
0068 HeavyTraffic
0137 OboeAcc
0138 ViolinAcc
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Tone List
No. Name
CC00 CC32 PC
No. Name
CC00 CC32 PC
No. Name
CC00 CC32 PC
0208 Ulti Ac Bass
0209 XV Ac.Bass
0210 AcBass 1
0211 AcBass 2
0212 AcBass 3
0
9
45
46
47
1
16
49
8
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
4
4
4
4
4
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
119
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
28
34
34
33
33
34
34
34
34
34
35
35
35
35
35
36
36
36
36
36
40
36
40
33
35
37
34
37
38
38
40
40
40
39
40
40
40
37
40
39
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
39
40
40
40
40
39
40
34
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
0283 MG Oct Bass1
0284 MG LightBass
0285 DistSynBass
0286 DistEnvBass
0287 LightSynBass
0288 PopSynthBass
0289 Sync Bass 2
0290 TeeBee V/Sw
0291 Odd Bass
0292 303Sqr.Rev
0293 Bassic Needs
0294 SynthBass101
0295 Synth Bass 1
0296 JP-4 Bass
35
39
40
38
45
46
30
44
15
43
83
1
0
3
2
10
7
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
39
40
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
103
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
32
121
121
121
121
0357 Ac.Gtr.Hrm
0358 Ac.Gt.Harmnx
0359 Gt.FretNoise
Strings - Vocal
0360 St.Strings 1
0361 St.Strings 2
0362 St.Strings 3
0363 Strings
51
16
0
4
4
4
26
32
121
16
17
18
11
0
12
2
24
7
0
17
9
10
11
10
0
1
2
8
10
9
8
1
4
5
9
8
20
3
10
7
32
33
8
3
8
0
1
80
16
17
1
0
8
16
0
0
3
1
0
34
0
2
8
16
1
0
13
12
12
81
80
3
61
4
0
0
8
9
10
1
4
4
4
5
4
5
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
4
4
5
4
4
4
4
4
2
2
4
5
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
45
46
45
50
50
49
50
50
50
45
52
50
50
49
49
49
49
49
49
52
49
49
49
49
49
46
46
46
46
41
41
41
41
41
41
46
42
43
49
43
44
49
47
47
47
47
47
48
49
49
50
51
51
51
51
52
51
52
51
51
51
51
0213 Rockabilly
0214 XV Bass+Ride
0215 AcousticBs
0216 Wild Ac.Bs
0217 TamBaStp
0218 Guitaron
0219 Chung Ruan
0220 Fingered Bs.
0221 AttackFinger
0222 5String Bs
0223 X 5String Bs2
0224 Jazz Bass 1
0225 Jazz Bass 2
0226 Rock Bass
0227 Heart Bass
0228 Baby Bass
0229 Double Pick
0230 Picked Bass
0231 Picked Bass2
0232 Picked Bass3
0233 Picked Bass4
0234 Fretless Bs1
0235 Fretless Bs2
0236 Fretless Bs3
0237 Fretless Bs4
0238 Wood+FlessBs
0239 Smooth Bass
0240 Mr.Smooth
0241 Mild Bass
0242 Mute Bass
0243 Muted PickBs
0244 Nu Slap Bs
0245 Finger Slap
0246 Slap Pop
0247 Slap Bass 1
0248 Slap Bass 2
0249 Beef FM Bass
0250 WireStr Bass
0251 X Wire Bass
0252 Drum'n'Bass
0253 RubberBass 1
0254 RubberBass 2
0255 Synth Bass 2
0256 Reso Slap
0257 Bass Invader
0258 TB Saw Bass
0259 MG Bass
0260 Modular Bass
0261 Seq Bass 1
0262 SynthBass201
0263 u/i/e/o V/Sw
0264 VocoBass
0364 Strings 1
5
0365 String Ens
0366 ChamberStr
0367 Velo Strings
0368 Mild Strings
0369 Trem Str.St.
0370 StringsSpic.
0371 SuspenseStr
0372 St.Slow Str1
0373 St.Slow Str2
0374 Slow Strings
0375 SlowStrings1
0376 SlowStrings2
0377 SlowStrings3
0378 Slow Tremolo
0379 StraightStr.
0380 Warm Strings
0381 Legato Str.
0382 Bright Str.1
0383 Bright Str.2
0384 Bright Str.3
0385 Orchestra 1
0386 Orchestra 2
0387 Orchestra 3
0388 FilteredOrch
0389 Tremolo Orch
0390 Film Octaves
0391 Oct Strings1
0392 Oct Strings2
0393 Marcato
48
24
0
6
83
83
2
3
4
5
48
4
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
8
19
5
37
84
8
80
1
1
0
1
8
11
10
82
13
16
0
0297 CS Bass
0298 Tekno Bass
0299 Echo SynBass
0300 Reso SH Bass
0301 Rubber303 Bs
0302 TB303 Bass
0303 TB303 DistBs
0304 TB303 Sqr Bs
0305 Clavi Bass
0306 Jungle Bass
0307 Square Bass
0308 Arpeggio Bs
0309 AtkSineBass
0310 OB sine Bass
0311 303SqDistBs
0312 E.Bass Harm.
0313 String Slap
0314 Bass Slide1
0315 Bass Slide
0316 DoubleSlide
A.Guitar
0317 Nylon Gt.o
0318 Nylon Gt.1
0319 Nylon Gt.2
0320 Nylon-str.Gt
0321 Nylon Harp
0322 Steel.Gt1
0323 Steel.Gt2
0324 Steel.Gt3
0325 Steel.Gt5
0326 Steel.Gt4
16
14
9
18
17
19
21
22
24
34
35
41
24
2
5
47
48
16
64
32
0
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
5
25
25
25
25
100
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
25
25
25
25
25
26
25
25
26
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
0394 St.Pizzicato
0395 Solo Pizz.
0396 PizzicatoStr
0397 Vcs&Cbs Pizz
0398 X Violin
0399 Folk Violin
0400 FolkViolinVb
0401 Violin Atk
0402 ViolnSoloSRX
0403 Slow Violin
0404 Solo Spic.
2
52
64
65
70
69
32
0
33
48
49
50
66
8
0327 Steel.Gt6
0328 Steel-str.Gt
0329 Steel + Body
0330 Ac.Guitar1
0331 Ac.Guitar2
0332 Ac.Guitar3
0333 2_Guitars
0334 12 Strings
0335 Nylon+Steel1
0336 Nylon+Steel2
0337 Mandolin
0338 Mandolin Tr.
0339 MandolinTrem
0340 Requint Gt.1
0341 Requint Gt.2
0342 Fl.Gtr 1
8
80
81
4
2
3
0405 Viola
0406 Cello
0407 Cello sect.
0408 Cello Attack
0409 Contrabass
0410 ContraBsSect
0411 Harp
9
1
67
24
26
18
40
52
48
49
51
68
8
24
10
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
0
84
83
81
82
7
80
17
18
20
47
4
0412 Harp St.
0265 Raver Bass 1
0266 Raver Bass 2
0267 MG Blip Bs
0268 SH-101 Bass
0269 SH101 Bass 1
0270 SH101 Bass 2
0271 SH101 Bass 3
0272 SH101 Bass 4
0273 JP-8 Bass
0274 MG Oct Bass2
0275 Bs+DistGT
0276 RND Bass
0277 Bubble Bass
0278 Sync Bass 1
0279 Spike Bass
0280 Pulse Mix Bs
0281 Seq Bass 2
0282 3rd Bass
0413 Uillean Harp
0414 Synth Harp
0415 Harp&Strings
0416 Timpani
0343 Fl.Gtr 2
0344 Fl.GtrRoll
0417 Str.+Flute
0418 Strings+Horn
0419 S.Str+Choir
0420 JP8 Strings1
0421 JP8 Strings2
0422 JP Strings
0423 JP Strings 1
0424 JP Saw Str.
0425 Syn.Strings1
0426 Syn.Strings2
0427 Syn.Strings3
0428 Syn.Strings4
0429 Syn.Strings5
0430 OB Strings
0345 Nylon+Steel3
0346 Ukulele
0347 Velo Harmnix
0348 Atk Steel Gt
0349 TamCoStp
0350 TamCoTrl
0351 TamBPStp
0352 TamBPTrl
0353 TamPrTrl
6
40
26
28
24
21
31
33
34
0354 TamORTrl
0355 TamORBTr
0356 Cavaquinho
120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
r
Tone List
No. Name
CC00 CC32 PC
No. Name
CC00 CC32 PC
No. Name
CC00 CC32 PC
0431 Air Strings
0432 JUNO Strings
0433 60s Strings
0434 High Strings
0435 Tron Strings
0436 Noiz Strings
0437 DistStrings
0438 Strings Hit
0439 OrchestraHit
0440 Double Hit
0441 Choir Str.
0442 Syn Vox Pad
0443 Fem Mm Srt
0444 Rich Choir 1
0445 St.ChoirAahs
0446 Jazz Scat
0447 Choir Aahs
0448 Melted Chr
0449 ChorusLahs
0450 ChorusAahs
0451 Voice Oohs
0452 Choir Hahs
0453 St.BoysChoir
0454 VoiceAah Mal
0455 Humming
0456 Silent Night
0457 Melted Choir
0458 JzVoiceBap
0459 JzVoiceDow
0460 Voice Dahs
0461 JzVox Thum
0462 JzVoiceDat
0463 SynVox
8
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
52
52
49
51
51
51
52
56
56
56
49
55
54
53
53
54
53
53
53
53
54
53
53
54
54
55
53
54
54
54
54
54
55
55
55
55
55
86
86
54
54
54
54
54
54
54
0505 St. Brass ff
0506 Africa Brass
0507 St.Orch Brs1
0508 Octave Brass
0509 FatPop Brass
0510 2Tps+Tb
0511 2Tps+Tb+Sax
0512 Fat + Reed
0513 Warm Brass
0514 Orch Brass
0515 St.Orch Brs2
0516 Brass + Reed
0517 Brass 1
3
80
36
24
14
43
44
26
2
33
38
25
0
8
9
1
2
4
5
47
16
0
5
81
4
1
5
80
47
0
8
0
4
16
3
9
16
6
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
4
4
4
4
4
5
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
2
4
4
4
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
62
64
62
62
62
62
62
62
64
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
64
62
62
63
64
63
63
64
63
62
63
63
64
64
63
63
64
64
64
59
59
59
59
59
59
58
61
61
61
61
61
58
58
58
58
58
61
61
64
58
58
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
0580 Warm Tp.2
0581 TrumpetFall2
0582 Muted Tp 1
0583 Muted Tp 2
0584 MuteTrumpet1
0585 MuteTrumpet2
0586 MuteTrumpet3
0587 Muted Horns
0588 FlugelHorn
0589 FluteVibAtk
0590 FlTraverso
0591 Flute Exp
26
17
48
49
0
2
3
8
8
52
3
2
0
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
57
62
60
60
60
60
60
60
57
74
74
74
74
74
73
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
69
69
70
71
77
77
77
76
76
79
79
76
72
72
75
80
74
40
16
24
25
6
24
0
10
11
0
82
14
8
6
0
33
24
32
48
16
13
36
40
9
0592 Flute 1
0593 Flute 2
0594 Piccolo 1
0518 Brass 2
0519 Brass 3
0
0520 SC Brt Brass
0521 Bones Sect.
0522 Quad Brass1
0523 Quad Brass2
0524 Henry IV
0595 JazzClariVib
0596 FolkClarinet
0597 FolkClarinVb
0598 Folk Clarin
0599 SoftClarinet
0600 Clarinet
0601 Bs Clarinet
0602 Oboe
0603 Oboe Exp.
0604 English Horn
0605 Bassoon
0606 BottleBlow1
0607 BottleBlow2
0608 The Bottle
0609 Pan Flute1
0610 Pan Flute2
0611 Whistle 1
0612 Whistle 2
0613 TinWhistle2
0614 Multi Wind
0615 Quad Wind
0616 Recorder
50
51
17
16
52
0
8
0
8
0
0525 Brass Fall
0526 Switch Fall
0527 Jump Brass
0528 MG Brass fst
0529 MKS Brass
0530 JUNO Brass
0531 Fat SynBrass
0532 Poly Brass
0533 PowerBrass
0534 Synth Brass
0535 Pro Brass
0
0
9
10
11
8
12
9
1
18
8
10
16
9
0
3
47
46
0
47
0
0536 P5 Brass
0537 Sync Brass
0538 Oct SynBrass
0539 SH-5 Brass
0540 OB Brass
0541 Velo Brass 1
0542 DeepSynBrass
0543 Tuba 1
1
0464 JX8P Vox
46
16
17
0
0
9
0465 Syn.Voice 1
0466 Syn.Voice 2
0467 VP330 Choir
0468 LFO Vox
0617 Ocarina
0618 Pipe & Reed
Synth
0619 Big Lead
0620 OB Saw
0469 Solo Vox
0
1
0470 Chorus Oohs2
0471 Chorus Oohs1
0472 VoiceLah Fem
0473 ChorusLahFem
0474 ChorusLuhFem
0475 VoiceUuh Fem
0476 Fem Lah&Lan
Sax - Brass
0544 Tuba 2
0545 Tuba 3
0
47
46
45
8
16
0
1
3
8
2
0
1
4
2
8
9
24
46
8
4
26
6
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
82
82
81
81
81
81
82
81
81
87
82
91
91
91
91
91
91
91
91
101
84
82
84
85
89
100
97
83
88
85
85
82
88
82
85
16
17
19
23
24
0546 Polka Tuba
0547 Folk Tuba
0548 Tuba + Horn
0549 Euphonium
0550 French Horns
0551 Fr.Horn
0552 Wide FreHrns
0553 F.Hrn Slow
0554 Horn + Orche
0555 Trombone 1
0556 Trombone 2
0557 Bright Tb
0558 V Twin bones
0559 Bs.Trombone
0560 Dual Horns
0561 F.Horn Rip
0562 SoaringHorns
0563 Truba
0621 LM Square
0622 CC Solo
4
0623 Twin Sine
0624 Dual Sqr&Saw
0625 Velo Lead
0626 MG Square
0627 Hollow Mini
0628 Phenomena
0629 Saw Wave
0630 Unison Saws
0631 Poly Saws
0632 SuperSaws
0633 Poly Key
0634 80's PolySyn
0635 Super Poly
0636 Polysynth 1
0637 Polysynth 2
0638 OB Stab
0639 Unison SawLd
0640 MG SawLead 2
0641 TB Lead
0642 Fat GR Lead
0643 D-50 Fantasy
0644 Atmosphere
0645 Ice Rain
11
23
5
1
2
0477 Tenor Sax
0
46
9
44
47
50
45
8
50
17
18
51
46
8
0
0
8
9
8
0
17
16
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
2
4
4
4
4
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
67
66
66
66
66
66
66
66
68
68
66
65
65
66
66
66
66
62
62
62
62
0478 Blowed Tenor
0479 St.Tenor Sax
0480 Latin Tenor
0481 Super Tenor
0482 TenorSaxFst
0483 Tenor Sax 1
0484 BreathyTn.
0485 BlowAltoVib
0486 Folk A.Sax
0487 Folk A.SaxVb
0488 FolkAlto
0489 AltoSax Soft
0490 AltoSax Exp.
0491 Alto Sax
0492 Baritone Sax
0493 Bari & Tenor
0494 Grow Sax
0495 Soprano Exp.
0496 Soprano Sax2
0497 Sax Section
0498 AltoSax + Tp
0499 ORSaxVib
0500 ORSaxTrl
0501 Ac.Brass
0502 Brass Sforz.
0503 Brass sfz 1
0504 Brass sfz 2
80
0
46
83
47
82
1
4
0
2
2
7
39
1
3
43
0
0
0
1
0564 TrubaStp
0565 Trumpet
9
0
0566 Trumpet2
0567 Rom/Mar Tp
0568 FolkTrumpVb
0569 MariachiTp
0570 Bright Tp.
0571 Romantc Tp
0572 Tp Mar/Shk
0573 Trumpet & Nz
0574 Warm Tp.1
0575 Dark Trumpet
0576 Tp Shake
48
51
18
50
24
49
52
4
25
3
53
47
1
0646 Syn.Calliope
0647 Big & Raw
0648 P5 Sync Lead
0649 Acid Guitar
0650 D-50 Fat Saw
0651 Euro-Dance 2
0652 OB DoubleSaw
0653 Rock Lead
16
10
11
81
12
18
3
80
81
10
12
0577 Atk Trumpet
0578 FolkTrumpet
0579 Twin Tp.
27
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Tone List
No. Name
CC00 CC32 PC
No. Name
CC00 CC32 PC
No. Name
CC00 CC32 PC
0654 Techno Saw
0655 JP DoubleSaw
0656 JP SuperSaw
0657 CS Saw
0658 MG Saw Lead
0659 Oct Saw Lead
0660 Chiffer Lead
0661 LM Pure Lead
0662 JUNO Rave
0663 LA Brass Ld
0664 Big Fives
0665 SequenceSaw3
0666 Euro-Dance 1
0667 Crispy Lead
0668 LM Blow Lead
0669 Xpressive
0670 Raver Blade
0671 Square Wave
0672 Mellow FM
0673 Shmoog
47
13
15
30
31
35
0
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
82
82
82
82
82
82
84
83
88
85
87
82
88
88
83
88
88
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
103
82
82
82
82
82
82
82
82
82
82
82
82
82
82
91
82
82
84
84
84
84
84
87
84
87
84
87
85
85
85
85
85
85
85
85
87
87
87
87
0729 Bass & Lead
0730 Fat & Perky
0731 Delayed Lead
0732 Pulse Wave 1
0733 Pulse Wave 2
0734 80'sTechLead
0735 HollowReleas
Pad - Ethnic
0736 Warm Pad
0737 LA Warm Pad
0738 Attack! Pad
0739 Human Pad
0740 Thick Matrix
0741 Sine Pad
0742 JP Soft Pad
0743 Stacked Pad
0744 Warm JP STR
0745 Warm Squ Pad
0746 JP8 Hollow
0747 Square Pad
0748 Pad With
0749 OB Soft Pad
0750 Oct.PWM Pad
0751 PWM Soft Pad
0752 JP8 Sqr Pad
0753 SoftBellPad
0754 Warm Voices
0755 Vox Pad
0
2
7
80
81
82
4
4
4
4
2
2
2
4
88
88
88
82
82
0803 Mystic Pad
0804 Echo Drops
0805 Rotary Strng
0806 Stack Pad
0807 Sweep Stack
0808 Sweep Pipe
0809 SawsSweep
0810 Stray Pad
0811 Anklung Pad
0812 Tine Pad
6
0
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
104
103
90
90
96
96
96
96
97
94
98
97
104
104
92
104
91
91
91
91
91
91
96
96
96
91
92
92
97
97
99
99
99
9
13
12
47
15
3
1
4
8
82
100
8
3
0
82
83
10
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
92
92
92
90
90
90
90
93
22
1
46
80
84
9
83
82
0
0813 Hols Strings
0814 Clavi Pad
0815 Galaxy Way
0816 Rising OSC.
0817 Noise Peaker
0818 Etherality
0819 Reso Stack
0820 Techno Stack
0821 TwinOct.Rave
0822 Happy Synth
0823 ForwardSweep
0824 ReverseSweep
0825 Warriors
0826 Shwimmer
0827 Celestial Pd
0828 Minor Rave
0829 Bamboo Hit
0830 AuhAuh
0831 Saw Impulse
0832 Strange Str.
0833 Crystal
0834 Syn Mallet
0835 Soft Crystal
0836 Round Glock
0837 Loud Glock
0838 Digi Bells
18
19
6
5
13
45
47
46
44
45
81
6
5
10
11
13
15
16
17
4
3
5
8
0674 2600 Sine
0675 KG Lead
10
17
18
19
20
21
24
26
28
29
30
31
33
35
10
2
0676 OB Square
0677 JP-8 Square
0678 Dist Square
0679 303SquarDst1
0680 303SquarDst2
0681 Pulse Lead
0682 JP8 PulseLd1
0683 JP8 PulseLd2
0684 260RingLead
0685 303DistLead
0686 JP8000DistLd
0687 HipHop Sq
0688 Flux Pulse
0689 Panning Lead
0690 Pulse Saw
0691 GR-300 Saw
0692 LA Saw
0693 Doctor Solo
0694 Fat Saw Lead
0695 FatSawLead
0696 Waspy Synth
0697 PM Lead
12
43
2
9
10
24
7
10
5
6
0
1
2
1
93
95
95
90
82
83
8
11
11
6
3
3
12
2
2
12
0
1
44
3
4
8
11
8
11
81
0
43
0
9
2
0
2
8
5
0
1
4
5
10
4
5
29
8
0
17
80
9
11
2
0756 Octave Pad
0757 Sync Brs.Pad
0758 Silky Pad 2
0759 Ambient Pad
0760 Harpvox
90
104
100
100
92
92
95
92
95
92
92
89
89
92
92
92
95
95
95
98
92
94
104
103
101
89
102
101
89
89
89
89
99
103
103
102
99
102
104
95
0761 Itopia
3
4
9
99
99
99
99
99
99
99
99
0762 Holy Voices
0763 Vox Sweep
0764 SC Heaven
0765 Tears Voices
0766 Space Voice
0767 Heaven II
0768 EP Heaven
0769 Bell Heaven
0770 Water Space
0771 Cosmic Voice
0772 Vocorderman
0773 Horror Pad
0774 Breath&Rise
0775 X-hale
0776 Soundtrack
0777 JP8Haunting
0778 Metal Pad
0779 Silky Pad 1
0780 Echo Pan 1
0781 Brightness
0782 New Age Pad
0783 LowBirds Pad
0784 D-50 Retour
0785 Fantasia 1
0786 Fantasia 2
0787 Fantasia 3
0788 Fantasia 4
0789 Music Bell
0790 Big Panner
0791 Reso Panner
0792 Big Blue
0839 Blow Bell
0840 Choral Bells
0841 Air Bells
12
16
17
18
19
23
1
80
3
8
6
7
8
9
0842 Bell Harp
0843 Gamelimba
0844 Bottom Bell
0845 Warm Atmos
0846 Vaporish
0847 Brass Star
0848 Org Bell
0849 Goblinson
0850 50's Sci-Fi
0851 Abduction
0852 Auhbient
14
16
17
24
33
36
38
40
41
9
42
43
4
5
6
99
100
91
0698 MG Saw
101
101
102
102
102
102
102
90
0699 P5 Saw Lead
0700 Natural Lead
0701 Synchronized
0702 SequenceSaw1
0703 SequenceSaw2
0704 Octave Stack
0705 Reso Saw
0706 Cheese Saw
0707 FatSolo Lead
0708 ForcefulLead
0709 Oct.UnisonLd
0710 Mad Lead
0711 CrowdingLead
0712 Space Org X
0713 Double Sqr.
0714 Chord maj7th
0715 PureFlatLead
0716 Short Chord
0717 Charang
1
2
3
4
0853 LFO Pad
5
0854 LFO Sweep
0855 Saw Strings
0856 Ambient BPF
0857 Random Str
0858 UFO FX
0859 FallinInsect
0860 LFO Oct.Rave
0861 Halo Pad
0862 Sweep Pad
0863 Oud
0864 Oud+Strings
0865 Ancestral
0866 Converge
0867 Prologue 1
0868 Prologue 2
0869 HistoryWave
0870 Echo Pan 2
0871 Pan Sequence
0872 Star Theme
0873 Echo Bell
0874 Just Before
0875 RandomEnding
0876 Random Sine
0877 Noise&SawHit
44
46
2
90
96
6
102
102
102
102
95
14
18
19
0
8
9
81
10
82
47
83
0
1
2
5
17
19
20
21
0
2
5
6
0
96
24
28
1
8
2
3
5
3
8
0
1
20
22
23
25
106
106
98
96
98
0718 Wire Lead
0719 FB.Charang
0720 Mellow GR Ld
0721 Fat SyncLead
0722 5th DecaSync
0723 Dirty Sync
0724 DualSyncLead
0725 5th Saw Wave
0726 5th Lead
0793 Vibra Bells
0794 Goblin
0795 7th Atmos.
0796 D-Mention
0797 EP Pad
98
98
103
103
104
103
102
102
102
102
97
97
94
93
94
104
0798 CP Pad
0799 Panner Pad
0800 Bowed Glass
0801 Special Rave
0802 Star Dust
0
4
3
0727 JP 5th Saw
0728 JP8000 5thFB
122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
r
Tone List
No. Name
CC00 CC32 PC
No. Name
CC00 CC32 PC
No. Name
CC00 CC32 PC
0878 DancingDrill
0879 Dirty Stack
0880 Static Hit
0881 Acid Copter
0882 260HarmPad
0883 Tambra
0884 Tamboura
0885 Rabab
0886 Gopichant
0887 Shamisen
0888 Kalimba
0889 Sanza
0890 Bagpipe
0891 UillnPipe Or
0892 Fiddle
0893 Pungi
27
28
30
32
7
10
16
8
16
0
0
8
0
11
0
8
0
1
2
3
16
0
8
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
2
4
4
4
4
5
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
102
102
102
102
89
0953 BonangGamSRX
0954 BelAngk SRX
0955 BsKalimbaSRX
0956 Kane / SRX
0957 Reyong / SRX
0958 VelAfro SRX2
0959 Yang Qin
0960 Yangqin
0961 Yangqin /3
0962 Yanqin Hrd
0963 Yanqin Trm
0964 Yanqin/Hrd
0965 Yanqin/Trm
0966 Erhu
0967 Erhu Harm
0968 Erhu/Harm
0969 Erhu/Vib
0970 SihuHorsScrm
0971 Oygur
0972 Log drum
0973 Matoquin
0974 Mizmar
0
1
2
3
4
5
24
6
7
8
5
5
5
5
5
5
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
119
5
4
5
4
4
4
4
4
5
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
2
2
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
13
13
13
13
13
13
47
13
13
13
13
13
13
41
41
41
41
1028 Rawap
8
9
10
98
100
96
5
5
5
106
106
106
1029 Rawap Trem
1030 Rawap/Trem
1031 Gamelan Gong
1032 RAMA Cymbal
1033 Bonang
119 113
119 113
119 113
97
105
106
106
107
109
109
110
110
111
112
106
106
16
16
16
16
16
16
11
74
72
72
76
76
76
76
73
78
76
73
76
76
78
73
68
68
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
78
78
78
78
78
78
78
78
78
78
78
25
25
25
25
25
11
Percuss - SFX
1034 Steel Drums
1035 Woodblock
1036 Taiko
0
0
0
10
1
9
3
8
0
8
18
0
8
8
11
1
0
0
47
5
16
8
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
115
116
117
119
122
119
118
119
118
118
118
119
117
116
126
117
115
120
113
125
114
120
120
120
120
114
125
116
116
117
117
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
128
128
128
128
128
128
125
125
126
123
124
124
124
124
124
124
124
124
122
127
9
1037 Sine Perc.
1038 Fl.Key Click
1039 Elec Perc
1040 Jazz Tom
1041 808 Tom
1042 Melo. Tom 1
1043 Real Tom 2
1044 Jungle SD
1045 Synth Drum
1046 Concert BD
1047 Castanets
1048 Perc. Bang
1049 Small Taiko
1050 Tabla+
1051 Reverse Cym.
1052 Cymbal Roll
1053 Wind Chimes
1054 Tambourine
1055 Rev.Snare
1056 Rev.ConBD
1057 Rev.Kick 1
1058 Rev.Tom
10
11
1
2
3
0894 Banjo
4
9
0895 Muted Banjo
0896 Cimbalom_F
0897 HDMallCimba
0898 Zither
49
13
13
49
12
98
13
24
0
9
0
1
16
32
7
4
5
1
9
0
8
1
8
16
9
10
8
19
24
10
8
9
0
0899 Santur
112
112
110
105
105
112
106
105
105
105
107
106
108
107
108
108
108
109
109
110
108
108
110
111
111
112
112
112
112
113
113
113
111
106
106
110
113
113
114
105
105
105
105
105
105
105
106
106
106
106
106
106
106
106
0900 Cimbalom
0901 Dulcimer
0902 Purify
0903 Tron Flute
0904 ORClaVib
0905 ORClaTrl
0906 Frula
0907 FrulaTrl
0908 Fujara
0909 Quena
0910 NAY
0911 Shakuhachi
0912 Kawala
0913 Di
0914 TinWhistle1
0915 TinWhtsle Nm
0916 ShakuBamboo
0917 Arghool
0918 BaritoneShrt
0919 BaritoneLong
0920 Bangdi
0921 Bandi Grwl
0922 Bandi/Grwl
0923 Bangdi /3
0924 Esraj&Mizmar
0925 Hulusi
0975 Mizmar Solo
0976 Uillean Pipe
0977 Sitar 1
0978 Sitar 2
0979 Hichiriki
24
0
51
2
3
0980 Pi Pa
10
11
12
9
8
0
0981 Drone Sitar
0982 Sitar/Drone
0983 Sitar 3
0984 Tsugaru
0985 San Xian
0986 Koto
0987 Syn Shamisen
0988 Gu Zheng
0989 Taisho Koto
0990 Kanoun
0991 Bodhran
0992 Bodhran Mute
0993 Didgeridoo
0994 Kanoon+Choir
0995 Oct Harp
0996 UillnPipe Nm
0997 Er Hu
17
16
25
0
1059 Agogo
1060 MC-500 Beep
1061 Finger Snaps
1062 Angklung
1063 Bebarongan
1064 Dholak
1065 Stack Hit
1066 Industry Hit
1067 Technorg Hit
1068 Rave Hit
1069 Bit Hit
1070 Bam Hit
1071 Philly Hit
1072 Dist. Hit
1073 Impact Hit
1074 Euro Hit
11
24
16
25
27
25
26
22
23
20
19
9
18
8
3
1
2
17
16
11
12
27
0
1
2
4
5
3
0
1
0
0
2
1
0
3
5
6
4
7
0
7
8
16
24
25
47
32
10
12
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
30
31
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
1
0998 Gao Hu
0999 Shanai 1
1000 Shanai 2
1001 Suona 1
1002 Suona 2
1003 Tinkle Bell
1004 Gender
1005 Pemade
1006 Rababa
1007 BOUZ_BAG_1
1008 JV Bousouki
1009 Gajde
1
0926 Hulusi2
32
33
0
1075 Bass Hit
1076 6th Hit
0927 Hulusi2/3 1
0928 Hls2 Sld Dw
0929 Hls2 Sld Up
0930 Hls2 VbMouth
0931 Hls2/3 Mono
0932 Hls2/Vb Mono
0933 Hls2/VbMouth
0934 Suona Grwl
0935 Suona/Grwl
0936 Qudi
1077 Techno Hit
1078 Lo Fi Rave
1079 Perc. Hit
1080 Shock Wave
1081 Clap Hit
1082 Gun Shot
1083 Machine Gun
1084 Lasergun
1085 Eruption
1086 Big Shot
1087 Explosion
1088 Telephone 1
1089 Telephone 2
1090 Helicopter
1091 Seashore
1092 Horse-Gallop
1093 Dog
9
15
10
21
18
11
17
20
8
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
1
2
3
4
1010 Kajar
1011 Kelontuk Sid
1012 Atarigane
1013 Guzheng
1014 Guzhng Trm
1015 Guzhng/Trm
1016 St.GuZhngSRX
1017 SitarGlisSRX
1018 Shamisen SRX
1019 Zheng Zither
1020 Pipa
1021 Pipa /4
1022 Pipa Harm
1023 Pipa Vib
1024 Pipa Trem
1025 Pipa/Harm
1026 Pipa/Vib
0937 Qudi /3
0938 Qudi Orn
0939 Qudi/Orn
0940 Taj Mahal
0941 Xun
0942 Xun Orn
0943 Xun/Orn
0944 Xiao
0945 Xiao Orn
0946 Xiao/Orn
0947 Zhongruan
0948 Zhngruan Vib
0949 Zhngruan/Vib
0950 Zhngruan Trm
0951 Zhngruan/Trm
0952 Sacred Bells
1094 Bird 1
1095 Bird 2
1096 Growl 1
1097 Growl 2
1098 Kitty
5
6
7
1099 Fancy Animal
1100 Breath Noise
1101 Small Club
1027 Pipa/Trem
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Tone List
No. Name
CC00 CC32 PC
1102 Car-Engine
1103 Seal
1104 Rain
1105 Thunder
1106 Wind 1
1107 Wind 2
1108 Stream
1109 Bubble
1110 DoorCreaking
1111 Siren
1112 Train
1113 Jetplane
1114 Starship
1115 Burst Noise
1116 Car Engine
1117 Car Horn
1118 Car-Pass
1119 Car-Stop
1120 Car-Crash
1121 Door
1
8
1
2
3
6
4
5
2
5
6
7
8
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
126
124
123
123
123
123
123
123
125
126
126
126
126
126
126
126
126
126
126
125
123
123
123
123
125
125
56
122
126
125
125
125
116
116
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
126
126
126
126
126
126
126
117
126
126
126
126
126
126
126
126
126
126
127
127
127
127
127
127
9
24
25
3
2
4
3
7
17
47
16
4
9
80
9
10
7
8
10
40
32
0
6
8
23
16
17
18
19
24
25
26
20
22
12
13
14
16
17
19
20
18
21
22
23
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
1122 Cricket
1123 White Noise
1124 Winds Hit
1125 Pink Noise
1126 Scratch 1
1127 TapeRewind
1128 ShortCircuit
1129 Trumpet Nz
1130 Calculating
1131 Scratch 2
1132 ScratchKey
1133 Phono Noise
1134 HandClapMenu
1135 909 HandClap
1136 Applause 1
1137 Applause 2
1138 ApplauseWave
1139 Voice ComeOn
1140 Voice One
1141 Voice Two
1142 Voice Three
1143 Voice Tah
1144 Voice Aou
1145 Voice Oou
1146 Voice Hie
1147 Voice Whey
1148 Voice Kikit
1149 Burner
1150 Glass & Glam
1151 Ice Ring
1152 Crack Bottle
1153 Pour Bottle
1154 Open CD Tray
1155 Audio Switch
1156 Bounce
1157 Key Typing
1158 SL 1
1159 SL 2
1160 Boeeeen
1161 R.Crossing
1162 Compresser
1163 Sword Boom!
1164 Sword Cross
1165 Stab! 1
1166 Stab! 2
1167 Laughing
1168 BabyLaughing
1169 Screaming
1170 Punch
1171 Heart Beat
1172 Footsteps
9
2
3
4
5
124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
r
Drum Sets
20. Drum Sets
PC4 [CC32= 4]
New Pop
C–1 HipHop Kick1
C#–1 Jazz Kick 1
D–1 Mex Kick
PC 18 [CC32= 4]
PC 45 [CC32= 4]
New BrushPop
HipHop Kick1
Jazz Kick 1
Mex Kick
PC 8 [CC32= 4]
New Folk
Brasil Tamburin
Marches Tamburin SeaShells
Tamorra 1
Tamorra 2
Tamorra 3
Tamorra 4
Tamorra 6
PC 47 [CC32= 4]
New Pop Perc
CowBellSide
PC 46 [CC32= 4]
NewPBrshPerc
Mambo_SW
SeaShells
PC 44 [CC32= 4]
V-JazzBrush
HipHop Kick1
Jazz Kick 1
Mex Kick
PC41 [CC32= 4]
Brush
PC 42 [CC32= 4]
Brush 2
New Rock
HipHop Kick1
Jazz Kick 1
Mex Kick
Rm Kick 1
Rm Kick 2
HipHop Kick2
TechnoKick1
BassDrumSet
HipHop Kick1
909Comp Kick
St Kick 1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Std.1 Kick1
Std.1 Kick2
Std.2 Kick1
Std2 Kick2
Kick 1
Std.1 Kick1
Std.1 Kick2
Std.2 Kick1
Std2 Kick2
Kick 1
Equat-nutshells
Equat-nutshells
Cascade_Ending
Chimes-Ending
Goathooves
GoathoovesShot
Bongo1_SW1
Bongo1_SW2
Bongo1_SW3
Bongo2_SW1
Bongo2_SW2
Bongo2_3
Congas_SW1
Congas_SW2
Congas_SW3
Congas_SW4
Tamorra 1
Tamorra 2
Tamorra 3
Tamorra 4
Tamorra 6
Tamorra 7
Tamorra 8
Tamorra Ending
Pandeiro_SW1
Pandeiro_SW2
Pandeiro_SW3
Pandeiro 5
D#–1 Rm Kick 1
E–1 Rm Kick 2
Rm Kick 1
Rm Kick 2
Cascade_Ending
Chimes-Ending
Goathooves
GoathoovesShot
Bongo1_SW1
Bongo1_SW2
Bongo1_SW3
Bongo2_SW1
Bongo2_SW2
Bongo2_3
Congas_SW1
Congas_SW2
Congas_SW3
Congas_SW4
Tamorra 1
Tamorra 2
Tamorra 3
Tamorra 4
Tamorra 6
Tamorra 7
Tamorra 8
Tamorra Ending
Pandeiro_SW1
Pandeiro_SW2
Pandeiro_SW3
Pandeiro 5
Rm Kick 1
Rm Kick 2
F–1 HipHop Kick2
F#–1 TechnoKick1
G–1 BassDrumSet
G#–1 HipHop Kick1
A–1 909Comp Kick
HipHop Kick2
TechnoKick1
BassDrumSet
HipHop Kick1
909Comp Kick
St Kick 1
HipHop Kick2
TechnoKick1
BassDrumSet
HipHop Kick1
909Comp Kick
St Kick 1
Kick 2
Kick 2
Jazz Kick 1
Jazz Kick 2
Room Kick 1
Room Kick 2
Power Kick1
Power Kick2
Elec Kick 2
Elec Kick 1
TR-808 Kick
TR-909 Kick
Dance Kick 2
Voice One
Voice Two
Voice Three
---
Jazz Kick 1
Jazz Kick 2
Room Kick 1
Room Kick 2
Power Kick1
Power Kick2
Elec Kick 2
Elec Kick 1
TR-808 Kick
TR-909 Kick
Dance Kick 2
Voice One
Voice Two
Voice Three
Jazz Kick 1
Jazz Kick 2
MC-500 Beep
MC-500 Beep
Concert Snr
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High-Q
Tamorra 7
Tamorra 8
Tamorra Ending
Pandeiro 1
Pandeiro 2
Pandeiro 3
Pandeiro 4
Pandeiro 5
Pandeiro 6
BeguineLoop3
BeguineLoop2
BeguineLoop1
JazzSnare2
JazzzSnare1
R&B Snare
RockSnare2_2
RockSnare1_2
PopSnare38 2
Snare Ghost1
PopSnare38 2
FingerSnaps2
RockSnare2_3
Roll Snare
Hand clap2
909 HandClap
Pedal Hi Hat
FolkSnareTango2
FolkSnareRoll
Pop Kick 35
Pop Kick 36
Pop Stick1
PopSnare38 1
Snare Ghost1
PopSnare40 1
Flam Tom 41
Pop Hi Hat1
Tom 43
Pop Hi Hat2
Flam Tom 45
Pop Hi Hat3
Tom 47
Flam Tom 50
Pop Cymbal2
Tom 50
Pop Ride1
Pop Cymbal
Pop Ride2
Tambourine
Splash Cym.
ChaChaCowb
CrashCymbal2
Vibraslap
RockRideCym1
HiBongo
LoBongo
10 Bb–1 St Kick 1
11 B–1 JazzKick
JazzKick
Rock Kick
JazzKick
RockKik
JazzKick
12 C0 NewRockKik
13 C#0 Cymbal Roll
14 D0 Rock Stick 2
15 D#0 Rm Snare 1
16 E0 Rm Snare 2
17 F0 St Snare1
18 F#0 St Snare2
19 G0 NewJzSn2
20 G#0 NewJzSn1
21 A0 R&B Snare
22 Bb0 RockSnare2_2
23 B0 RockSnare1_2
24 C1 PopSnare38 2
25 C#1 Snare Ghost1
26 D1 PopSnare38 2
27 D#1 FingerSnaps2
28 E1 909 HandClap
29 F1 808 Clap
30 F#1 Hand clap2
31 G1 909 HandClap
32 G#1 Pedal Hi Hat
33 A1 GospelHClp1
34 Bb1 Snare Roll 1
35 B1 Pop Kick 35
36 C2 Pop Kick 36
37 C#2 Pop Stick1
38 D2 PopSnare38 1
39 D#2 Snare Ghost1
40 E2 PopSnare40 1
41 F2 Flam Tom 41
42 F#2 Pop Hi Hat1
43 G2 Tom 43
44 G#2 Pop Hi Hat2
45 A2 Flam Tom 45
46 Bb2 Pop Hi Hat3
47 B2 Tom 47
48 C3 Flam Tom 50
49 C#3 Pop Cymbal2
50 D3 Tom 50
51 D#3 Pop Ride1
52 E3 Pop Cymbal
53 F3 Pop Ride2
54 F#3 Tambourine
55 G3 Splash Cym.
56 G#3 ChaChaCowb
57 A3 CrashCymbal2
58 Bb3 Vibraslap
59 B3 RockRideCym1
60 C4 NewHiBongo
61 C#4 NewLoBongo
62 D4 NewCongaSlp
63 D#4 NewCongaOp
64 E4 NewLoConga
65 F4 Timbal Hi
66 F#4 Timbal Lo
67 G4 Agogo
NewRockKik
Cymbal Roll
Rock Stick 2
Rm Snare 1
Rm Snare 2
St Snare1
St Snare2
NewJzSn2
NewJzSn1
R&B Snare
PopSnare38 2
PopSnare40 2
PopSnare38 2
Snare Ghost1
PopSnare38 2
FingerSnaps2
909 HandClap
Cymbal Roll
Rock Stick 2
Rm Snare 1
Rm Snare 2
St Snare1
Cymbal Roll
Rock Stick 2
Rm Snare 1
Rm Snare 2
St Snare1
St Snare2
St Snare2
JazzSnare2
JazzSnare1
R&B Snare
RockSnare2_2
RockSnare1_2
PopSnare38 2
Snare Ghost1
PopSnare38 2
FingerSnaps2
909 HandClap
808 Clap
Hand clap2
909 HandClap
Pedal Hi Hat
GospelHClp1
Snare Roll 1
Pop Kick 35
Pop Kick 36
Pop Stick1
PopSnare38 1
Snare Ghost1
PopSnare40 1
Flam Tom 41
Pop Hi Hat1
Tom 43
Pop Hi Hat2
Flam Tom 45
Pop Hi Hat3
Tom 47
Flam Tom 50
Pop Cymbal2
Tom 50
Pop Ride1
Pop Cymbal
Pop Ride2
Tambourine
Splash Cym.
ChaChaCowb
CrashCymbal2
Vibraslap
JazzSnare2
JazzSnare1
R&B Snare
RockSnare2 2
RockSnare1 2
PopSnare38 2
Snare Ghost1
PopSnare38 2
FingerSnaps2
909 HandClap
808 Clap
Hand clap2
909 HandClap
Pedal Hi Hat
GospelHClp1
Snare Roll 1
Pop Kick 35
Pop Kick 36
Pop Stick1
PopSnare38 1
Snare Ghost1
PopSnare40 1
Flam Tom 41
Pop Hi Hat1
Tom 43
Pop Hi Hat2
Flam Tom 45
Pop Hi Hat3
Tom 47
Flam Tom 50
Pop Cymbal2
Tom 50
Pop Ride1
Pop Cymbal
Pop Ride2
Tambourine
Splash Cym.
ChaChaCowb
CrashCymbal2
Vibraslap
---
MC-500 Beep
MC-500 Beep
Concert Snr
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High-Q
Slap
Slap
Brazilian_Tamburin Brazilian_Tamburin 808 Clap
ScratchPush
ScratchPull
Sticks
SquareClick
Mtrnm.Click
Mtrnm. Bell
Jazz Kick 2
Jazz Kick 1
Side Stick
Brush Swirl
Brush Slap1
Brush Swirl
Lite Tom 4
Brs HiHatCls
Lite Tom 4
Pedal HiHat
Lite Tom 4
Brs HiHatOpn
Lite Tom 4
Lite Tom 4
Brush Crash
Lite Tom 4
Ride Cym IN
ChinaCymbal
Brush RideBL
Tambourine
Splash Cym.
Cowbell
ScratchPush
ScratchPull
Sticks
SquareClick
Mtrnm.Click
Mtrnm. Bell
Br Kick 1
Br Kick 2
Side Stick
Br Snare1
Br Snare2
Brush Swirl
Lite Tom 4
Brs HiHatCls
Lite Tom 4
Pedal HiHat
Lite Tom 4
Brs HiHatOpn
Lite Tom 4
Lite Tom 4
Brush Crash
Lite Tom 4
Ride Cym IN
ChinaCymbal
Brush RideBL
Tambourine
Splash Cym.
Cowbell
Chimes&Seeds_1
Chimes&Seeds_2
PopHiHatFoot
Chimes&Seeds_1
Chimes&Seeds_2
PopHiHatFoot
Hand clap2
909 HandClap
Pedal HiHat1
VibratoneSlow-Fast VibratoneSlow-Fast GospelHClp1
AfricanCowBell
Kick_Plastic
Kick_Plastic
Snare
Snare
SnareFlam
Snare
FloorTomFlam
Jazz Hat1
FloorTom
Jazz Hat2
Tom2Flam
Jazz Hat3
Tom2
Tom1Flam
JazzCrCym1
PopBrushTom1
NewJzRide1
BrushCrash2
Jazz Ride2
CembaloFree
BrushCrash1
CowBell
AfricanCowBell
Kick_Plastic
Kick_Plastic
Snare
Snare
SnareFlam
Snare
FloorTomFlam
Jazz Hat1
FloorTom
Jazz Hat2
Tom2Flam
Jazz Hat3
Tom2
Tom1Flam
JazzCrCym1
PopBrushTom1
NewJzRide1
BrushCrash2
Jazz Ride2
CembaloFree
BrushCrash1
CowBell
Snare Roll 1
JazzKick
JazzKick
NewJzSW1
NewJzSn1
NewJzSW2
NewJzSn2
NewJzTomLoFl
JazzHiHat1
NewJzTomLo
JazzHiHat2
Jazz Tom MFl
JazzHiHat3
RockTomMid
NewJzTomHiFl
CrachCymbal1
NewJzTomHi
JazzRide1
CrachCymbal2
JazzRide2
Tambourine
Splash Cym.
ChaChaCowb
CrachCymbal1
Vibraslap
RockRideCym1
NewHiBongo
NewLoBongo
NewCongaSlp
NewCongaOp
NewLoConga
Timbal Hi
JzCrashCym1
vibraslp
JzCrashCym1
vibraslp
Crash Cymb2
Vibraslap
Crash Cymb2
Vibraslap
RockRideCym1
HiBongo
LoBongo
CongaSlap
CongaOp
LoConga
Timbal Hi
Timbal Lo
Agogo
RockRideCym1
HiBongo
LoBongo
Conga Slap
Conga Op
Lo Conga
Timbal Hi
Timbal Lo
Agogo
RockRide1
Bongo_SW
Bongo1_4
Congas_SW
Congas_7
Congas_8
Timbal Hi
Timbal Lo
Agogo
RockRide1
Bongo_SW
Bongo1_4
Congas_SW
Congas_7
Congas_8
Timbal Hi
Timbal Lo
Agogo
Ride Cymbal
Bongo High
Bongo Low
Mute H.Conga
Conga Hi Opn
Conga Lo Opn
High Timbale
Low Timbale
Agogo
Ride Cymbal
Bongo High
Bongo Low
Mute H.Conga
Conga Hi Opn
Conga Lo Opn
High Timbale
Low Timbale
Agogo
CongaSlap
CongaOp
LoConga
Timbal Hi
Timbal Lo
Timbal Lo
Agogo
Agogo
68 G#4 Agogo
Agogo
Agogo
Agogo
Agogo
Agogo
Agogo
Agogo
Agogo
69 A4 NewShaker2
70 Bb4 NewShaker1
71 B4 ShrtWhistle
72 C5 LongWhistle
73 C#5 Quide1
Shaker2
Shaker1
ShrtWhistle
LongWhistle
Quide1
Shaker2
Shaker1
ShrtWhistle
LongWhistle
Quide1
Shaker2
Shaker1
ShrtWhistle
LongWhistle
Quide1
Shaker2
Shaker1
ShrtWhistle
LongWhistle
Quide1
Shaker2
Shaker1
ShrtWhistle
LongWhistle
Quide1
NewShaker2
NewShaker1
ShrtWhistle
LongWhistle
NewQuide1
NewQuide2
NewClaves
Woodblock
Woodblock
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
MuteTriangl
OpenTriangl
Shaker
Cabasa
Maracas
Cabasa
Maracas
ShrtWhistle
LongWhistle
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
Woodblock
Woodblock
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
MuteTriangl
OpenTriangl
Shaker
ShrtWhistle
LongWhistle
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
Woodblock
Woodblock
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
MuteTriangl
OpenTriangl
Shaker
74 D5 Quide2
75 D#5 Claves
Quide2
Claves
Quide2
Claves
Quide2
Claves
Quide2
Claves
Quide2
Claves
76 E5 Woodblock
77 F5 Woodblock
78 F#5 Mute Cuica
79 G5 Open Cuica
80 G#5 MuteTriangl
81 A5 OpenTriangl
82 Bb5 Shaker
Woodblock
Woodblock
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
MuteTriangl
OpenTriangl
Shaker
Woodblock
Woodblock
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
MuteTriangl
OpenTriangl
Shaker
Woodblock
Woodblock
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
MuteTriangl
OpenTriangl
Shaker
Woodblock1
Woodblock2
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
MuteTriangl
OpenTriangl
Shaker
Woodblock1
Woodblock2
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
MuteTriangl
OpenTriangl
Shaker
83 B5 Jingle Bell
Jingle Bell
Jingle Bell
Jingle Bell
Jingle Bell
Jingle Bell
Jingle Bell
Jingle Bell
Jingle Bell
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Drum Sets
PC4 [CC32= 4]
New Pop
PC 18 [CC32= 4]
New Rock
PC 45 [CC32= 4]
New BrushPop
PC 8 [CC32= 4]
New Folk
PC 47 [CC32= 4]
New Pop Perc
PC 46 [CC32= 4]
NewPBrshPerc
PC 44 [CC32= 4]
V-JazzBrush
PC41 [CC32= 4]
Brush
PC 42 [CC32= 4]
Brush 2
84 C6 Bell Tree
Bell Tree
Castanets
Bell Tree
Castanets
Bell Tree
Castanets
Belltree
Castanets
Belltree
Castanets
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Cana
Timbal HiFlm
Timbal LoFlm
NewTmblPHS
NewShekere1
NewShekere2
NHBngoMute
L BongoMute
CajonHi
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Applause
---
---
---
---
---
Bell Tree
85 C#6 Castanets
86 D6 Mute Surdo
87 D#6 Open Surdo
88 E6 Cana
89 F6 Timbal HiFlm
90 F#6 Timbal LoFlm
91 G6 NewTmblPHS
92 G#6 NewShekere1
93 A6 NewShekere2
94 Bb6 NHBngoMute
95 B6 L BongoMute
96 C7 CajonHi
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Applause
---
---
---
---
---
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Cana
Timbal HiFlm
Timbal LoFlm
Timbal PHS
Shekere1
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Cana
Timbal HiFlm
Timbal LoFlm
Timbal PHS
Shekere1
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Cana
Timbal HiFlm
Timbal LoFlm
Timbal PHS
Shekere1
Surdo_mute
Surdo_open
Cana
TimbalHiFlm
TimbalLoFlm
TimbalPHS
Shekere1
Surdo_mute
Surdo_open
Cana
TimbalHiFlm
TimbalLoFlm
TimbalPHS
Shekere1
Shekere2
Shekere2
Shekere2
Shekere2
Shekere2
Bongo Mute
L BongoMute
CajonHi
Bongo Mute
L BongoMute
CajonHi
Bongo Mute
L BongoMute
CajonHi
Bongo Mute
LBongoMute
CajonHi
Bongo Mute
LBongoMute
CajonHi
---
---
---
---
---
---
97 C#7 CajonHiFlm
98 D7 Cajon Low
CajonHiFlm
Cajon Low
CajonHiFlm
Cajon Low
CajonLoFlm
FlmncoHClap1
FlmncoHClap1
BongoCowBell
BrushSnare Shot
MamboCowBell
Phrase3
CajonHiFlm
Cajon Low
CajonLoFlm
Flmnco Clap1
Flmnco Clap1
BongoCowBell
PopSnareFl_L
MamboCowBell
FolkSnrFlam2
FolkSnrShot1
FolkSnrShot2
SmallSnarPhr
FolkSnrFlam5
FolkSnrFlam3
FolkSdSnr1Sh
FolkSdSnr2Sh
FkSdSnrPhr1
FolkRimShtNS
FolkSplash1
FolkSplash2
PopRide_Phr4
PopRide_Phr5
---
CajonHiFlm
CajonLo
CajonHiFlm
CajonLo
CajonHiFlm
Cajon Low
---
---
---
---
Jazz Snare1
Jazz Snare2
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap
Brush Slap1
Brush Slap2
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Swirl
Long Swirl
Jazz Snare 1
Jazz Snare 2
Std.1 Snare1
Std.1 Snare2
Std.2 Snare1
Std.2 Snare2
Tight Snare
StandrdSnar1
LD Snare M
LD Snare C
Room Snare 1
Room Snare 2
Dance Snare1
Power Snare1
Rev.Snare
Power Snare2
Elec Snare 1
Dance Snare2
Elec Snare 2
Elec Snare 3
99 D#7 CajonLoFlm
100 E7 FlmncoHClap1
101 F7 FlmncoHClap1
102 F# BongoCowBell
103 G7 PopSnareFl
104 G#7 MamboCowBell
105 A7 PopSnareDrag
106 Bb7 HiHatPhrase3
107 B7 CrashPhrase1
108 C8 CrashPhrase2
109 C#8 CrashPhrase3
110 D8 CrashPhrase4
111 D#8 CrashPhrase5
112 E8 Crash_Stop
113 F8 RidePhrase1
114 F#8 RidePhrase2
115 G8 RidePhrase3
116 G#8 RidePhrase4
117 A8 RidePhrase5
118 Bb8 RidePhrase1
119 B8 RidePhrase2
120 C9 RidePhrase4
121 C#9 ChinaRoll
122 D9 ChinaStopped
123 D#9 Egg S4
CajonLoFlm
FlmncoHClap1
FlmncoHClap1
BongoCowBell
RockSnareFl_H
MamboCowBell
Snare Ghost
HiHatPhrase3
Crash2Phrase4
Crash1Phrase3
Crash1Phrase4
CrashPhrase4
CrashPhrase5
RidePhrase1
RidePhrase2
RidePhrase3
RidePhrase4
RidePhrase5
BrushRidePhrase4
Crash1Phrase1
---
CajonLoFlm
FlmncoHClp1
FlmncoHClp1
BongoCowBell
Crotals
MamboCowBell
CrashPhrase4
CrashPhrase5
RidePhrase1
RidePhrase2
RidePhrase4
Egg_M3
Egg_MEndOff
Egg_M_SW1
Egg_L4
Egg_LEndOff
Egg_L_SW1
Egg_TuttiEndOff
Egg_S4
Egg_SEndOff
Egg_S_SW1
Chimes
DoorKeys
Pinchimes
Harmess-bell1
Harmess-bell2
Harmess-bell3
CembaloEnding
CembaloFree
CajonLoFlm
FlmncoHClp1
FlmncoHClp1
BongoCowBell
Crotals
MamboCowBell
CrashPhrase4
CrashPhrase5
RidePhrase1
RidePhrase2
RidePhrase4
Egg_M3
Egg_MEndOff
Egg_M_SW1
Egg_L4
Egg_LEndOff
Egg_L_SW1
Egg_TuttiEndOff
Egg_S4
Egg_SEndOff
Egg_S_SW1
Chimes
DoorKeys
Pinchimes
Harmess-bell1
Harmess-bell2
Harmess-bell3
CembaloEnding
CembaloFree
CajonLoFlm
FlmncoHClap1
FlmncoHClap1
BongoCowBell
AfHey
MamboCowBell
MexFVox2
AfFoots
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap
Brush Slap1
Brush Slap2
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Swirl
Long Swirl
Jazz Snare 1
Jazz Snare 2
Std.1 Snare1
Std.1 Snare2
Std.2 Snare1
Std.2 Snare2
Tight Snare
StandrdSnar1
LD Snare M
LD Snare C
Room Snare 1
Room Snare 2
Dance Snare1
Power Snare1
Rev.Snare
Power Snare2
Elec Snare 1
Dance Snare2
Elec Snare 2
Elec Snare 3
Phrase1
RidePhrase1
RidePhrase2
RidePhrase4
CrashPhrase4
CrashPhrase5
SnareBrushFlam
RidePhrase1
RidePhrase2
RidePhrase3
RidePhrase4
RidePhrase5
Cascade_Ending
---
MexFVox1
MexMVox1
YodelFVox1
MexMVox2
YodelMVox1
MexMVox3
FlmncoFVox1
YodelFVox2
FlmncoFVox2
NewWhistle1
FlmncoFVox3
NewWhistle2
FlmncoMVox1
FlmncoMVox2
BrazilVox1
FlmncoMVox3
BrazilVox2
BrazilVox3
AfAahhh
Voice Snare
Voice Snare
---
---
Crotals
DoorKeys
Egg S4
---
AAhhh
Uaahh
Egg S4
ChinaStopped
Crash1StopLong
Crash2StopLong
ChinaRoll
Egg EndOff
CembaloEnding
CembaloFree
124 E9 Egg S1
Egg S1
Egg S1
125 F9 Egg AllEndOff
126 F#9 Tambour Ending
127 G9 Tambour Free
Egg EndOff
CembaloEnding
CembaloFree
Egg EndOff
CembaloEnding
CembaloFree
126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Drum Sets
PC 43 [CC32= 4]
Brush 2 L/R
PC 33 [CC32= 4]
Jazz
PC 34 [CC32= 4]
Jazz L/R
PC 1 [CC32= 4]
Standard 1
PC 2 [CC32= 4]
Standard 2
PC 3 [CC32= 4]
Standard L/R
PC 9 [CC32= 4]
Room
PC 13 [CC32= 4]
Room L/R
PC10 [CC32= 4]
Hip Hop
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
C–1 ---
Std.1 Kick1
Std.1 Kick2
Std.2 Kick1
Std2 Kick2
Kick 1
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Std.1 Kick1
Std.1 Kick2
Std.2 Kick1
Std2 Kick2
Kick 1
Std.1 Kick1
Std.1 Kick2
Std.2 Kick1
Std2 Kick2
Kick 1
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Std.1 Kick1
Std.1 Kick2
Std.2 Kick1
Std2 Kick2
Kick 1
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Elec Kick 2
Elec Kick 1
CR78 Kick 1
CR78 Kick 2
TR-606 Kick1
TR-707 Kick1
808 Kick
TR-808 Kick
808 BassDrum
TR-909 Kick
Dance Kick 2
909Comp Kick
TR-909 Kick2
HipHop Kick2
BassDrumSet
TechnoKick1
Bounce
C#–1 ---
D–1 ---
D#–1 ---
E–1 ---
F–1 ---
F#–1 ---
G–1 ---
G#–1 ---
A–1 ---
Kick 2
Kick 2
Kick 2
Kick 2
Jazz Kick 1
Jazz Kick 2
Room Kick 1
Room Kick 2
Power Kick1
Power Kick2
Elec Kick 2
Elec Kick 1
TR-808 Kick
TR-909 Kick
Dance Kick 2
Voice One
Voice Two
Voice Three
Br Kick 1
Jazz Kick 1
Jazz Kick 2
Room Kick 1
Room Kick 2
Power Kick1
Power Kick2
Elec Kick 2
Elec Kick 1
TR-808 Kick
TR-909 Kick
Dance Kick 2
Voice One
Voice Two
Voice Three
Rm Kick 1
Jazz Kick 1
Jazz Kick 2
Room Kick 1
Room Kick 2
Power Kick1
Power Kick2
Elec Kick 2
Elec Kick 1
TR-808 Kick
TR-909 Kick
Dance Kick 2
Voice One
Voice Two
Voice Three
---
Jazz Kick 1
Jazz Kick 2
Room Kick 1
Room Kick 2
Power Kick1
Power Kick2
Elec Kick 2
Elec Kick 1
TR-808 Kick
TR-909 Kick
Dance Kick 2
Voice One
Voice Two
Voice Three
St Kick 1
10 Bb–1 ---
11 B–1 ---
12 C0 ---
13 C#0 ---
14 D0 ---
15 D#0 ---
16 E0 ---
17 F0 Voice One
18 F#0 Voice Two
19 G0 Voice Three
20 G#0 ---
---
---
---
Voice One
Voice Two
Voice Three
---
Voice One
Voice Two
Voice Three
---
Voice One
Voice Two
Voice Three
---
Voice One
Voice Two
Voice Three
HipHop Kick1
Std2 Kick2
MC-500 Beep
MC-500 Beep
Concert Snr
Snare Roll
21 A0 ---
Br Kick 2
---
Rm Kick 2
---
---
St Kick 2
---
22 Bb0 MC-500 Beep
23 B0 MC-500 Beep
24 C1 Concert Snr
25 C#1 Snare Roll
26 D1 Finger Snap
27 D#1 High-Q
MC-500 Beep
MC-500 Beep
Concert Snr
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High-Q
MC-500 Beep
MC-500 Beep
Concert Snr
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High-Q
MC-500 Beep
MC-500 Beep
Concert Snr
Snare Roll
FingerSnaps2
High-Q
MC-500 Beep
MC-500 Beep
Concert Snr
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High-Q
MC-500 Beep
MC-500 Beep
Concert Snr
Snare Roll
FingerSnaps2
High-Q
MC-500 Beep
MC-500 Beep
Concert Snr
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High-Q
MC-500 Beep
MC-500 Beep
Concert Snr
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High-Q
FingerSnaps2
High-Q
28 E1 Slap
Slap
Slap
Slap
Slap
Slap
Slap
Slap
Slap
29 F1 ScratchPush
30 F#1 ScratchPull
31 G1 Sticks
ScratchPush
ScratchPull
Sticks
ScratchPush
ScratchPull
Sticks
ScratchPush
ScratchPull
Sticks
ScratchPush
ScratchPull
Sticks
ScratchPush
ScratchPull
Sticks
ScratchPush
ScratchPull
Sticks
ScratchPush
ScratchPull
Sticks
Scrtch Push2
Scrtch Pull2
Sticks
32 G#1 SquareClick
33 A1 Mtrnm.Click
34 Bb1 Mtrnm. Bell
35 B1 Br Kick 1
36 C2 Br Kick 2
37 C#2 Side Stick
38 D2 Br Snare1
39 D#2 Br Snare2
40 E2 Brush Swirl
41 F2 Lite Tom 4
42 F#2 BrHiHatClosB
43 G2 Lite Tom 4
44 G#2 Pedal HiHat
45 A2 Lite Tom 4
46 Bb2 BrHiHatOpenB
47 B2 Lite Tom 4
48 C3 Lite Tom 4
49 C#3 BrCrashCymbB
50 D3 Lite Tom 4
51 D#3 Br RideCymbB
52 E3 ChinaCymbal
53 F3 Br RideBellB
54 F#3 Tambourine
55 G3 Splash Cym.
56 G#3 Cowbell
57 A3 Crash Cymb2
58 Bb3 Vibraslap
59 B3 Ride Cymbal
60 C4 Bongo High
61 C#4 Bongo Low
62 D4 Mute H.Conga
63 D#4 Conga Hi Opn
64 E4 Conga Lo Opn
65 F4 High Timbale
66 F#4 Low Timbale
67 G4 Agogo
SquareClick
Mtrnm.Click
Mtrnm. Bell
Jazz Kick 1
Jazz Kick 2
Side Stick
SquareClick
Mtrnm.Click
Mtrnm. Bell
Jazz Kick 1
Jazz Kick 2
Side Stick
Jazz Snare1
Hand clap2
Jazz Snare2
Real Tom 6
JzHiHatClosB
Real Tom 6
Pedal HiHat
Real Tom 4
JzHiHatOpenB
Real Tom 4
Real Tom 1
Crash Cymb 1
Real Tom 1
Ride Cymbal
ChinaCymbal
Ridbl_c B
Tambourine
Splash Cym.
Cowbell
Crash Cymb2
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal
Bongo High
Bongo Low
Mute H.Conga
Conga Hi Opn
Conga Lo Opn
High Timbale
Low Timbale
Agogo
SquareClick
Mtrnm.Click
Mtrnm. Bell
St Kick 1
St Kick 2
Side Stick
St Snare2
909 HandClap
St Snare1
SquareClick
Mtrnm.Click
Mtrnm. Bell
Std2 Kick2
Std.2 Kick1
Side Stick
SquareClick
Mtrnm.Click
Mtrnm. Bell
St Kick 1
St Kick 2
Side Stick
St Snare2
909 HandClap
St Snare1
Real Tom 6
St HiHatClsB
Real Tom 6
Pedal HiHat2
Real Tom 4
St HiHatOpnB
Real Tom 4
Real Tom 1
Crash Cymb 1
Real Tom 1
Ride Cymbal
ChinaCymbal
Ridbl_c B
Tambourine
Splash Cym.
Cowbell
Crash Cymb2
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal
Bongo High
Bongo Low
Mute H.Conga
Conga Hi Opn
Conga Lo Opn
High Timbale
Low Timbale
Agogo
SquareClick
Mtrnm.Click
Mtrnm. Bell
Rm Kick 1
Rm Kick 2
Side Stick
SquareClick
Mtrnm.Click
Mtrnm. Bell
Rm Kick 1
Rm Kick 2
Side Stick
Rm Snare 2
808 Clap
Rm Snare 1
Room Tom 5
Rm HiHatClsB
Room Tom 5
Pedal HiHat
Room Tom 2
Rm HiHatOpnB
Room Tom 2
Room Tom 2
Crash Cymb 1
Room Tom 2
Ride Cymbal
ChinaCymbal
Ridbl_c B
Tambourine
Splash Cym.
Cowbell
Crash Cymb2
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal
Bongo High
Bongo Low
Mute H.Conga
Conga Hi Opn
Conga Lo Opn
High Timbale
Low Timbale
Agogo
SquareClick
Mtrnm.Click
Mtrnm. Bell
TR-909 Kick2
909Comp Kick
808 Rimshot
Rap Snare
909 HandClap
House Snare
Brush Tom
Closed HiHat
Brush Tom
Pedal HiHat
Brush Tom
R8OpenHiHat2
Brush Tom
Brush Tom
909 Crash
Brush Tom
Ride Cymbal
ReverseCymbl
Ride Bell
Shake Tamb
Splash Cym.
808 Cowbell
Crash Cymb2
Vibraslap
Jazz Snare1
Hand clap2
Jazz Snare2
Real Tom 6
JazzClosedHH
Real Tom 6
Pedal HiHat
Real Tom 4
JazzOpenHH
Real Tom 4
Real Tom 1
Crash Cymb1
Real Tom 1
Ride Cym IN
ChinaCymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cym.
Cowbell
Crash Cymb2
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal
Bongo High
Bongo Low
Mute H.Conga
Conga Hi Opn
Conga Lo Opn
High Timbale
Low Timbale
Agogo
Std.2 Snare1
808 Clap
Rm Snare 2
808 Clap
Std.2 Snare2
Real Tom 6
JazzClosedHH
Real Tom 6
Pedal HiHat
Real Tom 4
JazzOpenHH
Real Tom 4
Real Tom 1
Crash Cymb1
Real Tom 1
Ride Cymbal
ChinaCymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cym.
Cowbell
Crash Cymb2
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal
Bongo High
Bongo Low
Mute H.Conga
Conga Hi Opn
Conga Lo Opn
High Timbale
Low Timbale
Agogo
Rm Snare 1
Room Tom 5
Closed HiHat
Room Tom 5
Pedal HiHat
Room Tom 2
R8OpenHiHat2
Room Tom 2
Room Tom 2
Crash Cymb1
Room Tom 2
Ride Cymbal
ChinaCymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cym.
Cowbell
Crash Cymb2
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal
Bongo High
Bongo Low
Mute H.Conga
Conga Hi Opn
Conga Lo Opn
High Timbale
Low Timbale
Agogo
Real Tom 6
Close HiHat2
Real Tom 6
Pedal HiHat2
Real Tom 4
Open HiHat2
Real Tom 4
Real Tom 1
Crash Cymb1
Real Tom 1
Ride Cymbal
ChinaCymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cym.
Cowbell
Crash Cymb2
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal
Bongo High
Bongo Low
Mute H.Conga
Conga Hi Opn
Conga Lo Opn
High Timbale
Low Timbale
Agogo
Ride Cymbal
Bongo High
Bongo Low
Mute H.Conga
Conga Hi Opn
Conga Lo Opn
High Timbale
Low Timbale
Agogo
68 G#4 Agogo
Agogo
Agogo
Agogo
Agogo
Agogo
Agogo
Agogo
Agogo
69 A4 Cabasa
Cabasa
Cabasa
Cabasa
Cabasa
Cabasa
Cabasa
Cabasa
Cabasa
70 Bb4 Maracas
71 B4 ShrtWhistle
72 C5 LongWhistle
73 C#5 Short Guiro
74 D5 Long Guiro
75 D#5 Claves
Maracas
Maracas
ShrtWhistle
LongWhistle
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
Maracas
Maracas
Maracas
ShrtWhistle
LongWhistle
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
Maracas
Maracas
ShrtWhistle
LongWhistle
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
808 Maracas
ShrtWhistle
LongWhistle
Short Guiro
CR78 Guiro
808 Clave
ShrtWhistle
LongWhistle
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
ShrtWhistle
LongWhistle
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
ShrtWhistle
LongWhistle
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
ShrtWhistle
LongWhistle
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
76 E5 Woodblock
77 F5 Woodblock
78 F#5 Mute Cuica
79 G5 Open Cuica
80 G#5 MuteTriangl
81 A5 OpenTriangl
82 Bb5 Shaker
Woodblock
Woodblock
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
MuteTriangl
OpenTriangl
Shaker
Woodblock
Woodblock
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
MuteTriangl
OpenTriangl
Shaker
Woodblock
Woodblock
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
MuteTriangl
OpenTriangl
Shaker
Woodblock
Woodblock
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
MuteTriangl
OpenTriangl
Shaker
Woodblock
Woodblock
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
MuteTriangl
OpenTriangl
Shaker
Woodblock
Woodblock
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
MuteTriangl
OpenTriangl
Shaker
Woodblock
Woodblock
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
MuteTriangl
OpenTriangl
Shaker
Woodblock
Woodblock
Hoo
Hoo
MuteTriangl
OpenTriangl
626 Shaker
Jingle Bell
83 B5 Jingle Bell
Jingle Bell
Jingle Bell
Jingle Bell
Jingle Bell
Jingle Bell
Jingle Bell
Jingle Bell
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Drum Sets
PC 43 [CC32= 4]
Brush 2 L/R
PC 33 [CC32= 4]
Jazz
PC 34 [CC32= 4]
Jazz L/R
PC 1 [CC32= 4]
Standard 1
PC 2 [CC32= 4]
Standard 2
PC 3 [CC32= 4]
Standard L/R
PC 9 [CC32= 4]
Room
PC 13 [CC32= 4]
Room L/R
PC10 [CC32= 4]
Hip Hop
84 C6 Bell Tree
Bell Tree
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Applause
---
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Applause 2
---
Bar Chimes
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Applause 2
---
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Applause 2
---
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Applause 2
---
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Applause 2
---
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Small Club
Rap Snare
85 C#6 Castanets
86 D6 Mute Surdo
87 D#6 Open Surdo
88 E6 Applause
89 F6 ---
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Applause
---
90 F#6 ---
91 G6 ---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Power Snare2
Noise Slap
92 G#6 ---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
St Snare1
93 A6 ---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
St Snare2
94 Bb6 ---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Rm Snare 1
Rm Snare 2
Dance Snare1
Techno Hit
Philly Hit
Shock Wave
Lo Fi Rave
Bam Hit
95 B6 Br Kick 1
96 C7 Br Kick 2
97 C#7 Brush Crash
98 D7 Br Snare1
99 D#7 Ride Cym IN
100 E7 Br Snare2
101 F7 Lite Tom 4
102 F# Brs HiHatCls
103 G7 Lite Tom 4
104 G#7 Brush RideBL
105 A7 Lite Tom 4
106 Bb7 Brs HiHatOpn
107 B7 Br Kick1P
108 C8 Br Kick2P
109 C#8 BrCrashCymbP
110 D8 Br Snare1P
111 D#8 BrRideCymbal
112 E8 Br Snare2P
113 F8 Lite4_t P
114 F#8 BrHiHatClosP
115 G8 Lite4_t P
116 G#8 Br RideBell
117 A8 Lite4_t P
118 Bb8 BrHiHatOpenP
119 B8 ---
Jazz Kick 1
Jazz Kick 2
Crash Cymb1
Jazz Snare1
Ride Cym IN
Jazz Snare2
Real Tom 6
JazzClosedHH
Real Tom 4
Ride Bell
Real Tom 1
JazzOpenHH
Jazz Kick1 P
Jazz Kick2 P
JzCrashCym1P
Jazz Snare1P
Ride Cymbal
Jazz Snare2P
Real Tom
JzHiHatClosP
Real Tom
Ridbl_c P
Real Tom
JzHiHatOpenP
---
Rm Snare 2
Rm Snare 1
Std.1 Snare1
Std.1 Snare2
Std.2 Snare1
Std.2 Snare2
Tight Snare
StandrdSnar1
LD Snare M
LD Snare C
Jazz Snare 1
Jazz Snare 2
Room Snare 1
Room Snare 2
Dance Snare1
Power Snare1
Rev.Snare
Power Snare2
Elec Snare 1
Dance Snare2
Elec Snare 2
Elec. Snare
Elec Snare 3
TR-707 Snare
808 Snare 1
808 Snare 2
909 Snare 1
909 Snare 2
Rap Snare
JungleSnare1
House Snare
House Snare
House Snare
St Kick 1
St Kick 2
Crash Cymb1
St Snare2
Ride Cymbal
St Snare1
Real Tom 6
Close HiHat2
Real Tom 4
Ride Bell
Real Tom 1
Open HiHat2
St Kick1 P
St Kick2 P
JzCrashCym1P
St Snare2 P
Ride Cymbal
St Snare1P
Real Tom
St HiHatClsP
Real Tom
Ridbl_c P
Real Tom
St HiHatOpnP
---
St Snare2
St Snare1
Rm Kick 1
Rm Kick 2
Crash Cymb1
Rm Snare 2
Ride Cymbal
Rm Snare 1
Room Tom 5
Closed HiHat
Room Tom 2
Ride Bell
Room Tom 2
R8OpenHiHat2
Rm Kick1 P
Rm Kick2 P
JzCrashCym1P
Rm Snare2 P
Ride Cymbal
Rm Snare1 P
Room Tom 5 P
Rm HiHatClsP
Room Tom 2 P
Ridbl_c P
Room Tom 2 P
Rm HiHatOpnP
---
Std.1 Snare1
Std.1 Snare2
Std.2 Snare1
Std.2 Snare2
Tight Snare
StandrdSnar1
LD Snare M
LD Snare C
Jazz Snare 1
Jazz Snare 2
Room Snare 1
Room Snare 2
Dance Snare1
Power Snare1
Rev.Snare
Power Snare2
Elec Snare 1
Dance Snare2
Elec Snare 2
Elec. Snare
Elec Snare 3
TR-707 Snare
808 Snare 1
808 Snare 2
909 Snare 1
909 Snare 2
Rap Snare
JungleSnare1
House Snare
House Snare
House Snare
Std.1 Snare1
Std.1 Snare2
Std.2 Snare1
Std.2 Snare2
Tight Snare
StandrdSnar1
LD Snare M
LD Snare C
Jazz Snare 1
Jazz Snare 2
Room Snare 1
Room Snare 2
Dance Snare1
Power Snare1
Rev.Snare
Power Snare2
Elec Snare 1
Dance Snare2
Elec Snare 2
Elec. Snare
Elec Snare 3
TR-707 Snare
808 Snare 1
808 Snare 2
909 Snare 1
909 Snare 2
Rap Snare
JungleSnare1
House Snare
House Snare
House Snare
Br Snare1
Br Snare2
Brush Swirl
Brush Tap
Brush Slap1
Brush Slap2
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Swirl
Long Swirl
Jazz Snare 1
Jazz Snare 2
Std.1 Snare1
Std.1 Snare2
Std.2 Snare1
Std.2 Snare2
Tight Snare
StandrdSnar1
LD Snare M
LD Snare C
Room Snare 1
Room Snare 2
Dance Snare1
Power Snare1
Rev.Snare
Power Snare2
Elec Snare 1
Dance Snare2
Elec Snare 2
Elec Snare 3
Bim Hit
TapeRewind
Phono Noise
Dance Snare1
Power Snare2
Elec Snare 1
Dance Snare2
Elec Snare 2
Elec. Snare
Elec Snare 3
66 Snare 260
TR-707 Snare
808 Snare 1
808 Snare 2
TR-808Snare2
909 Snare 1
909 Snare 2
909 SD 1
120 C9 ---
121 C#9 ---
122 D9 ---
123 D#9 ---
124 E9 ---
125 F9 ---
126 F#9 ---
127 G9 ---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
TR-909Snare2
Rap Snare
JungleSnare1
House Snare
House Snare
House Snare
Voice Tah
Noise Slap
128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
r
Drum Sets
PC 11 [CC32= 4]
Jungle
PC12 [CC32= 4]
Techno
PC14 [CC32= 4]
House
PC17 [CC32= 4]
Power
PC 25 [CC32= 4]
Electronic
PC 15 [CC32= 5]
909 808 Kit
PC29 [CC32= 4]
TR-606
PC30 [CC32= 4]
TR-707
PC 26 [CC32= 4]
TR-808
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
C–1 Elec Kick 2
Elec Kick 2
Elec Kick 1
CR78 Kick 1
CR78 Kick 2
TR-606 Kick1
TR-707 Kick1
808 Kick
TR-808 Kick
808 BassDrum
TR-909 Kick
Dance Kick 2
909Comp Kick
TR-909 Kick2
HipHop Kick2
BassDrumSet
TechnoKick1
Bounce
Elec Kick 2
Elec Kick 1
CR78 Kick 1
CR78 Kick 2
TR-606 Kick1
TR-707 Kick1
808 Kick
TR-808 Kick
808 BassDrum
TR-909 Kick
Dance Kick 2
909Comp Kick
TR-909 Kick2
HipHop Kick2
BassDrumSet
TechnoKick1
Bounce
Voice One
Voice Two
Voice Three
TR-909 Kick2
TechnoKick2
MC-500 Beep
MC-500 Beep
Concert Snr
Snare Roll
Std.1 Kick1
Std.1 Kick2
Std.2 Kick1
Std2 Kick2
Kick 1
Elec Kick 2
Elec Kick 1
CR78 Kick 1
CR78 Kick 2
TR-606 Kick1
TR-707 Kick1
808 Kick
TR-808 Kick
808 BassDrum
TR-909 Kick
Dance Kick 2
909Comp Kick
TR-909 Kick2
HipHop Kick2
BassDrumSet
TechnoKick1
Bounce
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Elec Kick 2
Elec Kick 1
CR78 Kick 1
CR78 Kick 2
TR-606 Kick1
TR-707 Kick1
808 Kick
TR-808 Kick
808 BassDrum
TR-909 Kick
Dance Kick 2
909Comp Kick
TR-909 Kick2
HipHop Kick2
BassDrumSet
TechnoKick1
Bounce
Elec Kick 2
Elec Kick 1
CR78 Kick 1
CR78 Kick 2
TR-606 Kick1
TR-707 Kick1
808 Kick
TR-808 Kick
808 BassDrum
TR-909 Kick
Dance Kick 2
909Comp Kick
TR-909 Kick2
HipHop Kick2
BassDrumSet
TechnoKick1
Bounce
Elec Kick 2
Elec Kick 1
CR78 Kick 1
CR78 Kick 2
TR-606 Kick1
TR-707 Kick1
808 Kick
TR-808 Kick
808 BassDrum
TR-909 Kick
Dance Kick 2
909Comp Kick
TR-909 Kick2
HipHop Kick2
BassDrumSet
TechnoKick1
Bounce
C#–1 Elec Kick 1
D–1 CR78 Kick 1
D#–1 CR78 Kick 2
E–1 TR-606 Kick1
F–1 TR-707 Kick1
F#–1 808 Kick
G–1 TR-808 Kick
G#–1 808 BassDrum
A–1 TR-909 Kick
Kick 2
Jazz Kick 1
Jazz Kick 2
Room Kick 1
Room Kick 2
Power Kick1
Power Kick2
Elec Kick 2
Elec Kick 1
TR-808 Kick
TR-909 Kick
Dance Kick 2
Voice One
Voice Two
Voice Three
---
10 Bb–1 Dance Kick 2
11 B–1 909Comp Kick
12 C0 TR-909 Kick2
13 C#0 HipHop Kick2
14 D0 BassDrumSet
15 D#0 TechnoKick1
16 E0 Bounce
17 F0 Voice One
18 F#0 Voice Two
19 G0 Voice Three
20 G#0 TR-909 Kick2
21 A0 909Comp Kick
22 Bb0 MC-500 Beep
23 B0 MC-500 Beep
24 C1 Concert Snr
25 C#1 Snare Roll
26 D1 FingerSnaps2
27 D#1 High-Q
Voice One
Voice Two
Voice One
Voice Two
Voice Three
---
Voice One
Voice Two
Voice Three
---
Voice One
Voice Two
Voice Three
---
Voice One
Voice Two
Voice Three
---
Voice Three
HipHop Kick2
TR-909 Kick2
MC-500 Beep
MC-500 Beep
Concert Snr
Snare Roll
---
---
---
---
---
MC-500 Beep
MC-500 Beep
Concert Snr
Snare Roll
FingerSnaps2
High-Q
MC-500 Beep
MC-500 Beep
Concert Snr
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High-Q
MC-500 Beep
MC-500 Beep
Concert Snr
Snare Roll
FingerSnaps2
High-Q
MC-500 Beep
MC-500 Beep
Concert Snr
Snare Roll
FingerSnaps2
High-Q
MC-500 Beep
MC-500 Beep
Concert Snr
Snare Roll
FingerSnaps2
High-Q
FingerSnaps2
High-Q
FingerSnaps2
High-Q
28 E1 Slap
Slap
Slap
Slap
Slap
TR909 Kick 2
TR909 Kick 4
Urbn Sn Roll
TR909 Kick 5
TR909 Snr 3
TR909 Kick 3
TR909 PHH 2
TR909 Kick 6
TR909 Kick 1
TR909 Rim
TR909 Snr 1
TR909 Clap 1
TR909 Snr 2
TR909 Tom L
TR909 CHH 1
TR909 Tom L
TR909 PHH 1
TR909 Tom M
TR909 OHH 2
TR909 Tom M
TR909 Tom H
TR909 Crash
TR909 Tom H
TR909 Ride 1
TR909 Crash1
TR909 Ride 2
CR78 Tamb 1
TR909 Crash2
JD Sm Metal
TR909 Ride 3
Syn Swt Atk3
TR808 Kick 1
TR808 Kick 2
TR808 Rim
TR808 Snr 2
TR808 Clap 2
TR808 Snr 4
TR808 Tom L
TR808 CHH 1
TR808 Tom L
TR808 CHH 2
TR808 Tom M
TR808 OHH 1
TR808 Tom M
TR808 Tom H
TR808Cowbell
TR808 Tom H
TR606 Cym
TR606 OHH 1
TR606 OHH 2
CR78 Tamb 2
Slap
Slap
Slap
29 F1 Scrtch Push2
30 F#1 Scrtch Pull2
31 G1 Sticks
Scrtch Push2
Scrtch Pull2
Sticks
Scrtch Push2
Scrtch Pull2
Sticks
SquareClick
Mtrnm.Click
Mtrnm. Bell
HipHop Kick2
TR-909 Kick2
Side Stick
House Snare
909 HandClap
Elec Snare 2
909 Tom
TR-707HiHatC
909 Tom
ScratchPush
ScratchPull
Sticks
SquareClick
Mtrnm.Click
Mtrnm. Bell
Power Kick2
Power Kick1
Side Stick
Scrtch Push2
Scrtch Pull2
Sticks
SquareClick
Mtrnm.Click
Mtrnm. Bell
Elec Kick 2
Elec Kick 1
Side Stick
Scrtch Push2
Scrtch Pull2
Sticks
SquareClick
Mtrnm.Click
Mtrnm. Bell
CR78 Kick 2
TR-606 Kick1
CR78 Rim
66 Snare 160
707 Claps
66 Snare 260
606 Tom
606 HiHat Cl
606 Tom
606 HiHat Cl
606 Tom
606 HiHat Op
606 Tom
606 Tom
Scrtch Push2
Scrtch Pull2
Sticks
Scrtch Push2
Scrtch Pull2
Sticks
32 G#1 SquareClick
33 A1 Mtrnm.Click
34 Bb1 Mtrnm. Bell
35 B1 HipHop Kick1
36 C2 Std2 Kick2
37 C#2 Side Stick
38 D2 Dance Snare1
39 D#2 HC2 Claps 2
40 E2 House Snare
41 F2 909 Tom
42 F#2 606 HiHat Cl
43 G2 909 Tom
44 G#2 JungleHiHat
45 A2 909 Tom
46 Bb2 606 HiHat Op
47 B2 909 Tom
48 C3 909 Tom
SquareClick
Mtrnm.Click
Mtrnm. Bell
TechnoKick1
TR-909 Kick2
808 Rimshot
Dance Snare1
707 Claps
SquareClick
Mtrnm.Click
Mtrnm. Bell
TR-707 Kick1
TR-707 Kick1
TR-707 Rim
TR-707 Snare
707 Claps
TR-707Snare2
TR-707 Tom
TR-707HiHatC
TR-707 Tom
TR-707HiHatC
TR-707 Tom
TR-707HiHatO
TR-707 Tom
TR-707 Tom
909 Crash
TR-707 Tom
909Ride Cymb
ChinaCymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cym.
808 Cowbell
Crash Cymb2
Vibraslap
SquareClick
Mtrnm.Click
Mtrnm. Bell
808 BassDrum
TR-808 Kick
808 Rimshot
808 Snare 1
808 Clap
TR-808Snare2
808 Tom 2
TR-808HiHatC
808 Tom 2
808 HiHat Cl
808 Tom 2
TR-808HiHatO
808 Tom 2
808 Tom 2
808 Crash
808 Tom 2
606 Ride Cym
ChinaCymbal
Ride Bell
CR78 Tambour
Splash Cym.
808 Cowbell
909 Crash
Dance Snare1
808 Clap
Elec. Snare
808 Clap
909 SD 1
Power Snare1
Rock Tom 4
Close HiHat2
Rock Tom 4
Pedal HiHat2
Rock Tom 4
Open HiHat2
Rock Tom 4
Rock Tom 1
Crash Cymb1
Rock Tom 1
Ride Cymbal
ChinaCymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cym.
Cowbell
Crash Cymb2
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal
Bongo High
Bongo Low
Mute H.Conga
Conga Hi Opn
Conga Lo Opn
High Timbale
Low Timbale
Agogo
Elec Snare 2
Synth Drum 2
JazzClosedHH
Synth Drum 2
Pedal HiHat
Synth Drum 2
JazzOpenHH
Synth Drum 2
Synth Drum 2
Crash Cymb1
Synth Drum 2
Ride Cymbal
ReverseCymbl
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cym.
Cowbell
Crash Cymb2
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal
Bongo High
Bongo Low
Mute H.Conga
Conga Hi Opn
Conga Lo Opn
High Timbale
Low Timbale
Agogo
606 Dist.Tom
TR-707HiHatC
606 Dist.Tom
CR-78HiHatCl
606 Dist.Tom
909HiHat Opn
606 Dist.Tom
606 Dist.Tom
909 Crash
606 Dist.Tom
Ride Cymbal
ReverseCymbl
Ride Bell
CR-78HiHatCl
909 Tom
909HiHat Opn
909 Tom
909 Tom
909 Crash
49 C#3 Jngl Crash
50 D3 909 Tom
51 D#3 Ride Cymbal
52 E3 ReverseCymbl
53 F3 Ride Bell
808 Crash
606 Tom
909 Tom
909Ride Cymb
ReverseCymbl
Ride Bell
Shake Tamb
Splash Cym.
808 Cowbell
909 Crash
606 Ride Cym
ChinaCymbal
Ride Bell
CR78 Tambour
Splash Cym.
CR78 Cow
909 Crash
54 F#3 Shake Tamb
55 G3 Splash Cym.
56 G#3 808 Cowbell
57 A3 Crash Cymb2
58 Bb3 Vibraslap
59 B3 ---
60 C4 Bongo High
61 C#4 Bongo Low
62 D4 Mute H.Conga
63 D#4 Conga Hi Opn
64 E4 Conga Lo Opn
65 F4 High Timbale
66 F#4 Low Timbale
67 G4 Agogo
Shake Tamb
Splash Cym.
808 Cowbell
909 Crash
Vibraslap
Vibraslap
Vibraslap
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal
CR78 HiBongo
CR78 LoBongo
808 Conga
808 Conga
808 Conga
High Timbale
Low Timbale
Agogo
Ride Cymbal
CR78 HiBongo
CR78 LoBongo
808 Conga
808 Conga
808 Conga
High Timbale
Low Timbale
Agogo
Ride Cymbal
CR78 HiBongo
CR78 LoBongo
808 Conga
808 Conga
808 Conga
High Timbale
Low Timbale
Agogo
Ride Cymbal
Bongo High
Bongo Low
Mute H.Conga
Conga Hi Opn
Conga Lo Opn
High Timbale
Low Timbale
Agogo
Ride Cymbal
CR78 HiBongo
CR78 LoBongo
808 Conga
808 Conga
808 Conga
High Timbale
Low Timbale
Agogo
68 G#4 Agogo
69 A4 Cabasa
Agogo
Cabasa
Agogo
Cabasa
Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
Agogo
Cabasa
Agogo
Cabasa
Agogo
Cabasa
70 Bb4 808 Maracas
71 B4 ShrtWhistle
72 C5 LongWhistle
73 C#5 Short Guiro
74 D5 CR78 Guiro
75 D#5 808 Clave
76 E5 Woodblock
77 F5 Woodblock
78 F#5 Hoo
808 Maracas
ShrtWhistle
LongWhistle
Short Guiro
CR78 Guiro
808 Clave
Woodblock
Woodblock
Hoo
808 Maracas
ShrtWhistle
LongWhistle
Short Guiro
CR78 Guiro
808 Clave
Woodblock
Woodblock
Hoo
CR78 Maracas
ShrtWhistle
LongWhistle
Short Guiro
CR78 Guiro
CR78 Clv
Woodblock
Woodblock
Hoo
808 Maracas
ShrtWhistle
LongWhistle
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
Woodblock
Woodblock
Hoo
808 Maracas
ShrtWhistle
LongWhistle
Short Guiro
CR78 Guiro
808 Clave
Woodblock
Woodblock
Hoo
ShrtWhistle
LongWhistle
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
Woodblock
Woodblock
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
MuteTriangl
OpenTriangl
Shaker
ShrtWhistle
LongWhistle
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
Woodblock
Woodblock
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
MuteTriangl
OpenTriangl
Shaker
79 G5 Hoo
Hoo
Hoo
CR78 OHH
Cowbell Mute
CR78 OHH
1
Hoo
Hoo
Hoo
80 G#5 MuteTriangl
81 A5 OpenTriangl
82 Bb5 626 Shaker
83 B5 Jingle Bell
MuteTriangl
OpenTriangl
626 Shaker
Jingle Bell
MuteTriangl
OpenTriangl
626 Shaker
Jingle Bell
CR78 M.Beat
CR78 M.Beat
626 Shaker
Jingle Bell
MuteTriangl
OpenTriangl
626 Shaker
Jingle Bell
MuteTriangl
OpenTriangl
626 Shaker
Jingle Bell
2
Syn Swt Atk5
TR808 OHH 2
Jingle Bell
Jingle Bell
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Drum Sets
PC 11 [CC32= 4]
Jungle
PC12 [CC32= 4]
Techno
PC14 [CC32= 4]
House
PC17 [CC32= 4]
Power
PC 25 [CC32= 4]
Electronic
PC 15 [CC32= 5]
909 808 Kit
PC29 [CC32= 4]
TR-606
PC30 [CC32= 4]
TR-707
PC 26 [CC32= 4]
TR-808
84 C6 Bell Tree
Bell Tree
Castanets
Bell Tree
Castanets
Bell Tree
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Small Club
---
---
---
---
---
808 Maracas
TR808 Claves
Triangle Mt
Triangle Op
Narrow Hit 2
TR808 Cym1
MG Zap 4
Scratch 1
MG Zap 1
TR606 Snr 2
Synth Saw
Digi Breath
TR808 Cym2
TR808 Conga1
TR808 Conga2
Cajon 1
Bell Tree
Bell Tree
Bell Tree
85 C#6 Castanets
86 D6 Mute Surdo
87 D#6 Open Surdo
88 E6 Small Club
89 F6 Kick Roll
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Applause 2
---
---
---
---
---
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Small Club
---
---
---
---
---
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Small Club
---
---
---
---
---
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Small Club
---
---
---
---
---
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Applause 2
Dance Snare1
Elec Snare 2
Dance Snare1
House Snare
Rap Snare
House Snare
Dance Snare1
Rap Snare
Techno Hit
Philly Hit
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Applause 2
66 Snare 260
Dance Snare1
909 SD 1
Dance Snare1
Dance Snare1
Rap Snare
House Snare
House Snare
Techno Hit
---
Shock Wave
Lo Fi Rave
90 F#6 Snare Roll
91 G6 66 Snare 260
92 G#6 Dance Snare1
93 A6 909 SD 1
94 Bb6 Elec Snare 2
95 B6 Dance Snare1
96 C7 Rap Snare
97 C#7 Techno Hit
98 D7 Philly Hit
99 D#7 Shock Wave
100 E7 Lo Fi Rave
101 F7 Bam Hit
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Std.1 Snare1
Std.1 Snare2
Std.2 Snare1
Std.2 Snare2
Tight Snare
StandrdSnar1
LD Snare M
LD Snare C
Jazz Snare 1
Jazz Snare 2
Room Snare 1
Room Snare 2
Dance Snare1
Power Snare1
Rev.Snare
Power Snare2
Elec Snare 1
Dance Snare2
Elec Snare 2
Elec. Snare
Elec Snare 3
TR-707 Snare
808 Snare 1
808 Snare 2
909 Snare 1
909 Snare 2
Rap Snare
JungleSnare1
House Snare
House Snare
House Snare
Techno Hit
Philly Hit
Shock Wave
Lo Fi Rave
Bam Hit
Bim Hit
TapeRewind
---
Techno Hit
Philly Hit
Shock Wave
Lo Fi Rave
Bam Hit
Techno Hit
Philly Hit
Shock Wave
Lo Fi Rave
Bam Hit
Techno Hit
Philly Hit
Shock Wave
Lo Fi Rave
Bam Hit
Shock Wave
Lo Fi Rave
Bam Hit
Vint Snr 3
Door Creak
Vint.Phone
Door Creak
Bam Hit
Bim Hit
102 F# Bim Hit
Bim Hit
Bim Hit
Bim Hit
Bim Hit
103 G7 TapeRewind
104 G#7 Phono Noise
105 A7 Dance Snare1
106 Bb7 Power Snare2
107 B7 Elec Snare 1
108 C8 Dance Snare2
109 C#8 Elec Snare 2
110 D8 Elec. Snare
111 D#8 Elec Snare 3
112 E8 66 Snare 260
113 F8 TR-707 Snare
114 F#8 808 Snare 1
115 G8 808 Snare 2
116 G#8 TR-808Snare2
117 A8 909 Snare 1
118 Bb8 909 Snare 2
119 B8 909 SD 1
120 C9 TR-909Snare2
121 C#9 Rap Snare
122 D9 JungleSnare1
123 D#9 House Snare
124 E9 House Snare
125 F9 House Snare
126 F#9 Voice Tah
127 G9 Noise Slap
TapeRewind
Phono Noise
Dance Snare1
Power Snare2
Elec Snare 1
Dance Snare2
Elec Snare 2
Elec. Snare
Elec Snare 3
66 Snare 260
TR-707 Snare
808 Snare 1
808 Snare 2
TR-808Snare2
909 Snare 1
909 Snare 2
909 SD 1
TapeRewind
Phono Noise
Dance Snare1
Power Snare2
Elec Snare 1
Dance Snare2
Elec Snare 2
Elec. Snare
Elec Snare 3
66 Snare 260
TR-707 Snare
808 Snare 1
808 Snare 2
TR-808Snare2
909 Snare 1
909 Snare 2
909 SD 1
TapeRewind
Phono Noise
Dance Snare1
Power Snare2
Elec Snare 1
Dance Snare2
Elec Snare 2
Elec. Snare
Elec Snare 3
66 Snare 260
TR-707 Snare
808 Snare 1
808 Snare 2
TR-808Snare2
909 Snare 1
909 Snare 2
909 SD 1
TR-909Snare2
Rap Snare
JungleSnare1
House Snare
House Snare
House Snare
Voice Tah
Noise Slap
TapeRewind
Phono Noise
Dance Snare1
Power Snare2
Elec Snare 1
Dance Snare2
Elec Snare 2
Elec. Snare
Elec Snare 3
66 Snare 260
TR-707 Snare
808 Snare 1
808 Snare 2
TR-808Snare2
909 Snare 1
909 Snare 2
909 SD 1
TR-909Snare2
Rap Snare
JungleSnare1
House Snare
House Snare
House Snare
Voice Tah
Noise Slap
TapeRewind
Phono Noise
Dance Snare1
Power Snare2
Elec Snare 1
Dance Snare2
Elec Snare 2
Elec. Snare
Elec Snare 3
66 Snare 260
TR-707 Snare
808 Snare 1
808 Snare 2
TR-808Snare2
909 Snare 1
909 Snare 2
909 SD 1
TR-909Snare2
Rap Snare
JungleSnare1
House Snare
House Snare
House Snare
Voice Tah
Noise Slap
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Power Snare2
Elec Snare 1
Dance Snare2
Elec Snare 2
Elec. Snare
Elec Snare 3
66 Snare 260
TR-707 Snare
808 Snare 1
808 Snare 2
TR-808Snare2
909 Snare 1
909 Snare 2
909 SD 1
TR-909Snare2
Rap Snare
JungleSnare1
House Snare
House Snare
House Snare
Voice Tah
Noise Slap
TR-909Snare2
Rap Snare
TR-909Snare2
Rap Snare
JungleSnare1
House Snare
House Snare
House Snare
Voice Tah
JungleSnare1
House Snare
House Snare
House Snare
Voice Tah
Noise Slap
Noise Slap
130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
r
Drum Sets
PC 31 [CC32= 4]
TR-909
PC 27 [CC32= 4]\
Dance
PC 28 [CC32= 4]
CR-78
PC 64 [CC32= 4]
V-VoxDrum
PC 49 [CC32= 4]
Orchestra
PC 50 [CC32= 4]
Ethnic
PC 32 [CC32= 4]
Multi Drum
PC 4 [CC32= 5]
StandardKit1
PC 5 [CC32= 5]
StandardKit3
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
C–1 Elec Kick 2
Elec Kick 2
Elec Kick 1
CR78 Kick 1
CR78 Kick 2
TR-606 Kick1
TR-707 Kick1
808 Kick
TR-808 Kick
808 BassDrum
TR-909 Kick
Dance Kick 2
909Comp Kick
TR-909 Kick2
HipHop Kick2
BassDrumSet
TechnoKick1
Bounce
Elec Kick 2
Elec Kick 1
CR78 Kick 1
CR78 Kick 2
TR-606 Kick1
TR-707 Kick1
808 Kick
TR-808 Kick
808 BassDrum
TR-909 Kick
Dance Kick 2
909Comp Kick
TR-909 Kick2
HipHop Kick2
BassDrumSet
TechnoKick1
Bounce
HipHop Kick1
Jazz Kick 1
Voice Kick
Rm Kick 1
Rm Kick 2
HipHop Kick2
TechnoKick1
BassDrumSet
HipHop Kick1
909Comp Kick
St Kick 1
Std.1 Kick1
Std.1 Kick2
Std.2 Kick1
Std2 Kick2
Kick 1
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Pop Cymbal2
Pop Ride1
R&B Snare
R&B Clap
Techno Snare
House Snare
Jungle Snare
Ps Snare
909 Snare
909Snare2
909 Kick 3
House Kick
TR-808 Kick
909 Kick
909 Kick2
TR-909 OHHsh
TR-909 OHH
Ah
Ha
ShutHa
ShutHi
One
Two
Three
Four
Snare Roll
FingerSnaps2
High-Q
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
C#–1 Elec Kick 1
D–1 CR78 Kick 1
D#–1 CR78 Kick 2
E–1 TR-606 Kick1
F–1 TR-707 Kick1
F#–1 808 Kick
G–1 TR-808 Kick
G#–1 808 BassDrum
A–1 TR-909 Kick
Kick 2
Jazz Kick 1
Jazz Kick 2
Room Kick 1
Room Kick 2
Power Kick1
Power Kick2
Elec Kick 2
Elec Kick 1
TR-808 Kick
TR-909 Kick
Dance Kick 2
Voice One
Voice Two
Voice Three
---
10 Bb–1 Dance Kick 2
11 B–1 909Comp Kick
12 C0 TR-909 Kick2
13 C#0 HipHop Kick2
14 D0 BassDrumSet
15 D#0 TechnoKick1
16 E0 Bounce
17 F0 Voice One
18 F#0 Voice Two
19 G0 Voice Three
20 G#0 ---
JazzKick
NewRockKik
Cymbal Roll
Rock Stick 2
Rm Snare 1
Rm Snare 2
St Snare1
St Snare2
NewJzSn2
NewJzSn1
R&B Snare
RockSnare2_2
RockSnare1_2
PopSnare38 2
Snare Ghost1
PopSnare38 2
FingerSnaps2
909 HandClap
808 Clap
Hand clap2
909 HandClap
Pedal Hi Hat
GospelHClp1
Voice Snare
Voice Kick
Voice One
Voice Two
Voice One
Voice Two
Voice Three
---
Voice Three
HipHop Kick2
TR-909 Kick2
MC-500 Beep
MC-500 Beep
Concert Snr
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High-Q
Slap
Scrtch Push2
Scrtch Pull2
Sticks
SquareClick
Mtrnm.Click
Mtrnm. Bell
TR-909 Kick2
TechnoKick2
Side Stick
Dance Snare1
909 HandClap
Power Snare1
Synth Drum 2
CR-78HiHatCl
Synth Drum 2
808 HiHat Cl
Synth Drum 2
CR-78HiHatOp
Synth Drum 2
Synth Drum 2
808 Crash
Synth Drum 2
606 Ride Cym
ReverseCymbl
Ride Bell
Shake Tamb
Splash Cym.
808 Cowbell
Crash Cymb2
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal
Bongo High
Bongo Low
Mute H.Conga
Conga Hi Opn
Conga Lo Opn
High Timbale
Low Timbale
Agogo
21 A0 ---
---
---
22 Bb0 MC-500 Beep
23 B0 MC-500 Beep
24 C1 Concert Snr
25 C#1 Snare Roll
26 D1 FingerSnaps2
27 D#1 High-Q
MC-500 Beep
MC-500 Beep
Concert Snr
Snare Roll
FingerSnaps2
High-Q
MC-500 Beep
MC-500 Beep
Concert Snr
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
JazzClosedHH
Pedal HiHat
JazzOpenHH
Ride Cymbal
Sticks
SquareClick
Mtrnm.Click
Mtrnm. Bell
Jazz Kick 1
ConcertKick
Side Stick
Concert Snr
Castanets
Concert Snr
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Tambourine
Splash Cym.
Cowbell
Con.Cymbal2
Vibraslap
Concert Cym
Bongo High
Bongo Low
Mute H.Conga
Conga Hi Opn
Conga Lo Opn
High Timbale
Low Timbale
Agogo
---
Finger Snap
Tambourine
Castanets
Crash Cymb1
Snare Roll
Concert Snr
Concert Cym
ConcertKick
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Bar Chimes
Wadaiko
Wadaiko Rim
Shimedaiko
Atarigane
Hyoushigi
Ohkawa
H kotsuzumi
L Kotsuzumi
Ban_Gu
Big Gong
Small Gong
Bend Gong
RAMA Cymbal
RAMA Cymbal
Gamelan Gong
Udo_Short
Udo_Long
Udo_slap
Bendir
28 E1 Slap
Slap
Slap
MaxLow Kick2
Rk CmpKick
Gospel Clap
Sweep Bass
Sft Snr Gst
HipHop Kick2
Reg.PHH
Reg.Kick 1
Reg.Kick 2
Reg.Stick
Reg.Snr 2
Reg.Snr Gst
Reg.Snr 1
Reg.F.Tom
Reg.CHH 1
Reg.L.Tom
Reg.CHH 2
Reg.M.Tom 1
Reg.OHH
Reg.M.Tom 2
Reg.H.Tom 1
Crash Cym1
Reg.H.Tom 2
Rock Ride
China Cymbal
Ride Edge
Tamborine
Crash Cym2a
Cowbell Low
Crash Cym2b
Cowbell Hi
Ride Bell
Conga Hi Mt
Conga Lo Mt
Conga Lo
Conga Hi Op
Conga Lo Op
Timbale Hi
Timbale Low
Agogo Bell H
Agogo Bell L
Cabasa Up
Maracas
Whistle Shrt
Whistle Long
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Claves
HipHop Kick2
Syn Swt Atk1
Lo-Bit Stk 1
TR707 Kick
TR808 Snr 5
Vint Kick 1
Reg.PHH
Vint Kick 2
Old Kick 1
Lo-Bit Stk 4
Reg.Snr 1
Amb Clap
TY Rim
Jazz Lo Tom1
Reg.CHH 1
Jazz Lo Tom2
Reg.CHH 2
Jazz Mid Tom
Reg.OHH
Jazz Mid Tom
Jazz Hi Tom
Crash Cym1
Jazz Hi Tom
Rock Rd Edge
China Cymbal
Rock Rd Cup
Tamborine
Splash Cym
Cowbell
Rock Crash 2
TR808 Cym
Jazz Ride
Bongo Hi
Bongo Lo
Conga Hi Mt
Conga Hi
Conga Lo
Timbale Hi
Timbale Low
Cowbell Hi
Cowbell Low
Cabasa
29 F1 Scrtch Push2
30 F#1 Scrtch Pull2
31 G1 Sticks
32 G#1 SquareClick
33 A1 Mtrnm.Click
34 Bb1 Mtrnm. Bell
35 B1 TechnoKick2
36 C2 TR-909 Kick2
37 C#2 TR-909 Rim
38 D2 909 SD 1
39 D#2 909 HandClap
40 E2 TR-909Snare2
41 F2 909 Tom
42 F#2 TR-707HiHatC
43 G2 909 Tom
44 G#2 TR-707HiHatC
45 A2 909 Tom
46 Bb2 909HiHat Opn
47 B2 909 Tom
48 C3 909 Tom
49 C#3 909 Crash
50 D3 909 Tom
51 D#3 909Ride Cymb
52 E3 ChinaCymbal
53 F3 Ride Bell
54 F#3 Tambourine
55 G3 Splash Cym.
56 G#3 808 Cowbell
57 A3 Crash Cymb2
58 Bb3 Vibraslap
59 B3 Ride Cymbal
60 C4 Bongo High
61 C#4 Bongo Low
62 D4 Mute H.Conga
63 D#4 Conga Hi Opn
64 E4 Conga Lo Opn
65 F4 High Timbale
66 F#4 Low Timbale
67 G4 Agogo
Scrtch Push2
Scrtch Pull2
Sticks
SquareClick
Mtrnm.Click
Mtrnm. Bell
CR78 Kick 2
CR78 Kick 1
CR78 Rim
CR78 Snare 1
707 Claps
CR78 Snare 2
78 TOM
CR-78HiHatCl
78 TOM
606 HiHat Cl
78 TOM
CR-78HiHatOp
78 TOM
78 TOM
Scrtch Push2
Scrtch Pull2
Sticks
SquareClick
Mtrnm.Click
Mtrnm. Bell
HipHop Kick
SimpleKick
Side Stick
HipHop Snare
707 Claps
HipHopSnare2
85St Tom16
HipHopCHH
85St Tom16
HipHopCHH
85St Tom12
---
85St Tom12
85St Tom10
85St CrsCym1
85St Tom10
85St RdCym
ChinaCymbal
85St RdBell
Tambourine
Splash Cym.
Cowbell
Voice Kick
Voice Stick
Voice Snare
Voice Stick
Voice Snare
Voice Snare
Voice Hi Hat
Voice Tom
Voice Hi Hat
Voice Tom
Voice Hi Hat
Voice Tom
Voice Tom
Voice Hi Hat
Voice Tom
808 Crash
78 TOM
606 Ride Cym
ChinaCymbal
Ride Bell
CR78 Tambour
Splash Cym.
CR78 Cow
909 Crash
Voice Ride
VoxCymbal1
Voice Cymbal
Voice Tambou
Voice Cymbal
Voice Perc
Voice Cymbal
Vibraslap
AfAahhh
NewHiBongo
NewLoBongo
NewCongaSlp
NewCongaOp
NewLoConga
Timbal Hi
Req_Dum
Req_tik
Tabla_Te
Tabla_Na
Tabla_Tun
Tabla_Ge
Tabla Ge Hi
Talking Drum
Bend tlk_drm
Caxixi
DJembe
Djembe_rim
Low Timbale
Timbl Paila
High Timbale
Cowbell
Bongo High
Bongo Low
Mute H.Conga
Conga Hi Opn
Conga MtLow
Conga Slap
Conga Lo Opn
Conga Slide
Mut Pandiero
Opn Pandiero
Open Surdo
Mute Surdo
Tamborim
Crash Cymb2
Vibraslap
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal
CR78 HiBongo
CR78 LoBongo
808 Conga
808 Conga
808 Conga
High Timbale
Low Timbale
Agogo
Ride Cymbal
Bongo High
Bongo Low
Mute H.Conga
Conga Hi Opn
Conga Lo Opn
High Timbale
Low Timbale
Agogo
Timbal Lo
Agogo
Agogo
68 G#4 Agogo
69 A4 Cabasa
Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
Agogo
Cabasa
Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
NewShaker2
NewShaker1
ShrtWhistle
LongWhistle
NewQuide1
NewQuide2
NewClaves
Woodblock
Woodblock
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
MuteTriangl
OpenTriangl
Shaker
70 Bb4 808 Maracas
71 B4 ShrtWhistle
72 C5 LongWhistle
73 C#5 Short Guiro
74 D5 CR78 Guiro
75 D#5 808 Clave
76 E5 Woodblock
77 F5 Woodblock
78 F#5 Hoo
CR78 Maracas
ShrtWhistle
LongWhistle
Short Guiro
CR78 Guiro
CR78 Clv
Woodblock
Woodblock
Hoo
Shaker
ShrtWhistle
LongWhistle
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
Woodblock
Woodblock
Hoo
ShrtWhistle
LongWhistle
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
Woodblock
Woodblock
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
MuteTriangl
OpenTriangl
Shaker
ShrtWhistle
LongWhistle
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
Woodblock
Woodblock
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
MuteTriangl
OpenTriangl
Shaker
Noise OHH 2
Scratch 5
Syn Low Atk2
MG Zap 3
Syn Swt Atk1
Syn Swt Atk4
Bongo Hi Slp
Noise OHH
Noise CHH
Triangle 1
Triangle 2
Cajon 1
Cajon 3
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Triangle Mt
Triangle Op
Cabasa Cut
Castanet
79 G5 Hoo
Hoo
Hoo
80 G#5 MuteTriangl
81 A5 OpenTriangl
82 Bb5 626 Shaker
83 B5 Jingle Bell
MuteTriangl
OpenTriangl
626 Shaker
Jingle Bell
CR78 M.Beat
CR78 M.Beat
626 Shaker
Jingle Bell
Jingle Bell
Jingle Bell
Jingle Bell
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Drum Sets
PC 31 [CC32= 4]
TR-909
PC 27 [CC32= 4]\
Dance
PC 28 [CC32= 4]
CR-78
PC 64 [CC32= 4]
V-VoxDrum
PC 49 [CC32= 4]
Orchestra
PC 50 [CC32= 4]
Ethnic
PC 32 [CC32= 4]
Multi Drum
PC 4 [CC32= 5]
StandardKit1
PC 5 [CC32= 5]
StandardKit3
84 C6 Bell Tree
Bell Tree
Castanets
Bell Tree
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Cana
Timbal HiFlm
Timbal LoFlm
NewTmblPHS
NewShekere1
NewShekere2
NHBngoMute
L BongoMute
CajonHi
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Applause
---
---
---
---
---
Agogo
Agogo
Shaker
Low Whistle
Low Whistle
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
MuteTriangl
OpenTriangl
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Cabasa Up
Cabasa Down
Claves
Woodblock
Woodblock
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Bell Tree
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
ReverseCymbl
Hoo
Bongo Hi Mt
Bongo Hi Slp
Bongo Lo Slp
Bongo Hi Op
Bongo Lo Op
Cajon 1
Cajon 2
Cajon 3
Vint Snr 2
Shaker 3
WD Rim
Mix Kick 1
Mix Kick 2
Mix Kick 3
Mix Kick 4
Mix Kick 5
Wind Chime
SprgDrm Hit
Crotale
R8 Click
Metro Bell
DR202 Beep
Reverse Cym
Xylo Seq.
Vinyl Noise
Mobile Phone
Group Snap
Laser
Siren
AnalogKick 3
Old Kick 2
Reg.Kick
TR909 Snr 4
TR808 Snr 2
Short Snr1
Vint Snr 4
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
85 C#6 Castanets
86 D6 Mute Surdo
87 D#6 Open Surdo
88 E6 Applause 2
89 F6 ---
90 F#6 ---
91 G6 ---
92 G#6 ---
93 A6 ---
Castanets
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Small Club
---
---
---
---
---
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Small Club
66 Snare 260
909 SD 1
Elec Snare 2
House Snare
Rap Snare
House Snare
Dance Snare1
Rap Snare
Techno Hit
Philly Hit
Hoo
MuteTriangl
OpenTriangl
MuteTriangl
OpenTriangl
808 Tom 2
808 Tom 2
808 Tom 2
808 Tom 2
808 Tom 2
808 Tom 2
808 Cowbell
808 Conga
808 Conga
808 Conga
Synth Drum 2
Synth Drum 2
Synth Drum 2
Synth Drum 2
Synth Drum 2
Synth Drum 2
R&B OHHsh
R&B OHH
R&B CHH
R&B OHH
TR-909 CHH
TR-909 OHH
909 Crash
Pop Kick 36
IPopCStk37st
IPopSn38st
IPopSn40st
Pop Hi Hat1
Pop Hi Hat2
Pop Hi Hat3
Tom 43
94 Bb6 ---
95 B6 ---
96 C7 ---
---
---
---
---
---
---
97 C#7 Techno Hit
98 D7 Philly Hit
99 D#7 Shock Wave
100 E7 Lo Fi Rave
101 F7 Bam Hit
102 F# Bim Hit
103 G7 TapeRewind
104 G#7 Phono Noise
105 A7 Dance Snare1
106 Bb7 Power Snare2
107 B7 Elec Snare 1
108 C8 Dance Snare2
109 C#8 Elec Snare 2
110 D8 Elec. Snare
111 D#8 Elec Snare 3
112 E8 66 Snare 260
113 F8 TR-707 Snare
114 F#8 808 Snare 1
115 G8 808 Snare 2
116 G#8 TR-808Snare2
117 A8 909 Snare 1
118 Bb8 909 Snare 2
119 B8 909 SD 1
120 C9 TR-909Snare2
121 C#9 Rap Snare
122 D9 JungleSnare1
123 D#9 House Snare
124 E9 House Snare
125 F9 House Snare
126 F#9 Voice Tah
127 G9 Noise Slap
Techno Hit
Philly Hit
Shock Wave
Lo Fi Rave
Bam Hit
CajonHiFlm
Cajon Low
Applause 2
Small Club
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Shock Wave
Lo Fi Rave
Bam Hit
CajonLoFlm
FlmncoHClap1
FlmncoHClap1
BongoCowBell
AfHey
MamboCowBell
MexFVox2
AfFoots
Mix Clap 1
Wind Chime
Tibet Cymbal
Bim Hit
Bim Hit
TapeRewind
Phono Noise
Dance Snare1
Power Snare2
Elec Snare 1
Dance Snare2
Elec Snare 2
Elec. Snare
Elec Snare 3
66 Snare 260
TR-707 Snare
808 Snare 1
808 Snare 2
TR-808Snare2
909 Snare 1
909 Snare 2
909 SD 1
TapeRewind
Phono Noise
Dance Snare1
Power Snare2
Elec Snare 1
Dance Snare2
Elec Snare 2
Elec. Snare
Elec Snare 3
66 Snare 260
TR-707 Snare
808 Snare 1
808 Snare 2
TR-808Snare2
909 Snare 1
909 Snare 2
909 SD 1
TR-909Snare2
Rap Snare
JungleSnare1
House Snare
House Snare
House Snare
Voice Tah
Noise Slap
Crotale
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
MexFVox1
MexMVox1
YodelFVox1
MexMVox2
YodelMVox1
MexMVox3
FlmncoFVox1
YodelFVox2
FlmncoFVox2
NewWhistle1
FlmncoFVox3
NewWhistle2
FlmncoMVox1
FlmncoMVox2
BrazilVox1
FlmncoMVox3
BrazilVox2
BrazilVox3
AfAahhh
Voice Snare
Voice Snare
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
TR-909Snare2
Rap Snare
JungleSnare1
House Snare
House Snare
House Snare
Voice Tah
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Tom 47
Tom 50
Noise Slap
---
132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
r
Drum Sets
PC 6 [CC32= 5]
Kit-Euro:POP
PC 1 [CC32= 5]
WD Std Kit
PC 2 [CC32= 5]
LD Std Kit
PC 3 [CC32= 5]
TY Std Kit
PC 7 [CC32= 5]
LatinDrmKit
PC 8 [CC32= 5]
Latin Menu1
PC 9 [CC32= 5]
Latin Menu2
PC 10 [CC32= 5]
Latin Menu3
PC 13 [CC32= 5]
Asia Menu
21 A0 ---
22 Bb0 ---
23 B0 ---
24 C1 ---
25 C#1 ---
26 D1 ---
27 D#1 ---
28 E1 TR707 Kick
29 F1 AnalogKick 1
30 F#1 Dirty Snr 6
31 G1 FB Kick
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
TimbalesHand
Timbles HiMt
Timbles HiOp
Timbles LoMt
Timbles LoOp
TmbSideStick
TimblesPaila
SectChd m9
SectChd Mj9
TimbalesFil4
TimbalesFil3
TimbalesFil2
TimbalesFil1
Dixie HH Hlf
Fat BD
Room Kick 2
Cross Stick2
Maple Lo Snr
Hand Clap 2
MapleSoft SN
Studio Tom 4
Dixie HH Cls
Studio Tom 3
Dixie HH Pdl
Studio Tom 2
Dixie HH Opn
Studio Tom 2
Studio Tom 1
Crash Cymbal
Studio Tom 1
Rock RdCym1
Crash 1
Bongo 1 Hi
Tambrin Hit
Bongo 1 Lo
Cowbell Op 1
BongoHiSlap1
Cowbell 3
Bongo LoSlap
Conga Hi Mt
Conga Lo Mt
Conga Slap
Conga Hi Op
CongaLoOp f
Timbles HiMt
Timbles LoOp
Agogo 2 Hi
Agogo 2 Lo
Real Cabasa2
Maracas 2
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Cuica 3
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Dance Kick
Dry Kick 1
Snr Roll
Power Kick
Amb.Snr 2
Reg.Kick 2
Reg.PHH
Reg.Kick 1
WD Kick
WD CStk
Dance Kick
Dry Kick 1
Snr Roll
Power Kick
Amb.Snr 2
Reg.Kick 2
Reg.PHH
Reg.Kick 1
LD Kick
LD CStk
LD Snr
Reg.Snr Gst
LD Rim
Dance Kick
Dry Kick 1
Snr Roll
Power Kick
Amb.Snr2 p
Power Kick
Reg.PHH
Reg.Kick
TY Kick
TY CStk
TY Snr
32 G#1 BrushRoll
33 A1 PlasticKick2
34 Bb1 Reg.CHH 2
35 B1 Power Kick
36 C2 TR909 Kick 6
37 C#2 R&B ShrtRim1
38 D2 TR909 Snr 3
39 D#2 TR909 Clap 1
40 E2 TR909 Snr 4a
41 F2 Sharp L.Tom2
42 F#2 TR909 CHH 1
43 G2 Sharp L.Tom1
44 G#2 TR909 PHH 1
45 A2 Sharp M.Tom
46 Bb2 TR909 OHH 2
47 B2 Sharp M.Tom
48 C3 Sharp H.Tom
49 C#3 TR909 Crash
50 D3 Sharp H.Tom
51 D#3 TR909 Ride
52 E3 China Cymbal
53 F3 Rock Rd Edge
54 F#3 Tamborine 3
55 G3 Crash Cym1 p
56 G#3 Cowbell
57 A3 Rock Crash 2
58 Bb3 Vibraslap
59 B3 TR606 Cym 2
60 C4 Bongo Lo Op
61 C#4 Bongo Hi Op
62 D4 Conga Hi Mt
63 D#4 Conga Hi Op
64 E4 Conga Lo Op
65 F4 Conga Efx
66 F#4 Shaker 3
67 G4 Shaker 2
68 G#4 CR78 Beat
69 A4 Cabasa Cut 1
70 Bb4 Cabasa Cut 2
71 B4 Lo-Bit PHH
72 C5 Scratch 7
73 C#5 Syn Low Atk2
74 D5 MG Zap 7
75 D#5 Syn Swt Atk1
76 E5 Syn Swt Atk4
77 F5 Conga Thumb
78 F#5 Triangle 1
79 G5 Triangle 2
80 G#5 Euro Hit 1
81 A5 Tao Hit
Agogo 2 Hi
Agogo 2 Lo
Agogo 3 Hi
Agogo 3 Lo
ApitoHiShort
ApitoLoShort
Berimbau Dn
Berimbau Mut
Berimbau Opn
Berimbau Up
Bongo 1 Hi
Bongo 1 Lo
Bongo 2 Hi
Bongo 2 Lo
Bongo Hi Hrd
Bongo HiOp f
Bongo Lo Hrd
Bongo Lo Sft
Bongo LoOp f
Bongo LoOpmf
Bongo LoSlap
BongoBell Mt
BongoBell Op
BongoHiSlap1
BongoHiSlap2
Cabasa Roll
Caixa Mute
Caixa Mute2
Caixa Open1
Caixa Open2
Caixa Open3
Caixa Rim
Caixa Roll
Caixa Roll2
Cajon Hi
Cajon Lo
Cajon Rol Hi
Cajon Rol Lo
Caxixi
Surdo Hard
Surdo Mute
Surdo Mute2
Surdo Open H
Surdo Open L
Surdo Open1
Surdo Open2
Surdo Rim
Surdo Rim 2
Surdo Soft
Tamborim Mut
Tamborim Opn
Tamborim Slp
TamborimMute
TamborimOpen
TamborimRim
TamborimRoll
Tambrin Hit
TambrinShake
Timbale Hi
Timbale Lo
Timbale Side
Timbales Rim
TimbalesFil1
TimbalesFil2
TimbalesFil3
TimbalesFil4
TimbalesHand
Timbles HiMt
Timbles HiOp
Timbles LoMt
Timbles LoOp
TmbSideStick
SectChd 13th
SectChd m9
SectChd Mj9
Sabor!
Hyoshigi
Hyoshigi 2
Kane
Cuica Hi 1
Cuica Hi 2
Cuica Lo 1
Cuica Lo 2
Ganza Hard
Ganza Soft
Guiro Long
Guiro Long2
Guiro Short
Guiro Short2
Hand Clap 2
MamboBell Mt
MamboBell Op
Maracas 2
MaracasUpDwn
MtlGuiroLng
MtlGuiroSht
PandeiroCrsh
PandeiroHit
PandeiroL Hi
PandeiroL Lo
PandeiroL Rm
PandeiroL Sp
PandeiroMute
PandeiroOpen
PandeiroRim
PandeiroRoll
PandeiroS Op
PandeiroS Rm
PandeiroS Sp
Quide Long
Quide Short
Quijada
Rainstick
Real Cabasa1
Real Cabasa2
RecoRecoLng
RecoRecoSht
Repinique1
Repinique2
RepiniqueHrd
RepiniqueSft
Repique Open
Repique Rim
Repique Roll
SambaBateria
SambaWhistle
Shaker 1
Shaker 2
Shaker Long
Shaker Short
---
WD Snr
SF Snr Gst
WD Rim
SF SnrGst
TY Rim
Kane Side
Atarigane
Kwaengwari f
Kwaengwari p
KwaengwariMt
Mokugyo 1
Mokugyo 2
Ohkawa
Ohkawa 2
Shimedaiko 2
Sime Taiko
Taiko
Tsuzumi 2 Hi
Tsuzumi 2 mf
Tsuzumi 2 p
Tsuzumi Hi
Tsuzumi Lo
Wadaiko
Wadaiko Rim
Ho
RR F.Tom
Reg.CHH 1
TY L.Tom
Reg.CHH 2
TY M.Tom
Reg.OHH
TY M.Tom
TY H.Tom
Crash Cym1a
TY H.Tom
Rock Ride 1
China Cymbal
Splash Cym
Tamborine 3
Rock Crash 1
Cowbell3
Crash Cym1b
Cowbell2 Lng
Rock Ride 2
Conga Hi Mt
Conga Lo Mt
Conga Hi Slp
Conga Hi Op
Conga Lo Op
Timbale Hi
Timbale Low
Mild Agogo H
Mild Agogo L
Cabasa Up
Maracas
Whistle Shrt
Whistle Long
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Claves
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Triangle Mt
Triangle Op
Cabasa Cut
DigiSpectrum
Wind Chime
Wood Block M
Cajon 2
RR F.Tom
Reg.CHH 1
LD L.Tom
Reg.CHH 2
LD M.Tom
Reg.OHH
LD M.Tom
LD H.Tom
Crash Cym1a
LD H.Tom
Rock Ride 1
China Cymbal
Splash Cym
Tamborine 3
Rock Crash 1
Cowbell3
Crash Cym1
Cowbell
Rock Ride 2
Conga 2H Mt
Conga 2L Mt
Conga 2H Slp
Conga 2H Op
Conga Lo Op
Timbale 1
Timbale 2
Agogo 2 Hi
Agogo 2 Low
Cabasa 2
Shaker 2
Whistle Shrt
Whistle
Guiro 2 Up
Guiro Long
Claves 2
Wood Block2H
Wood Block2L
Cuica 2 Low
Cuica 2 Hi
Triangle Mt
Triangle Op
Cabasa2 Cut
DigiSpectrum
Wind Chime
Wood Block2M
Cajon 2
RR F.Tom
Reg.CHH 1
TY L.Tom
Reg.CHH 2
TY M.Tom
Reg.OHH
TY M.Tom
TY H.Tom
Crash Cym 2
TY H.Tom
Rock Ride 1
China Cymbal
Splash Cym
Tamborine2
Crash Cym1a
Cowbell3
Crash Cym1b
Cowbell2 Lng
Rock Ride 2
Conga 2H Mt
Conga 2L Mt
Conga 2H Slp
Conga 2H Op
Conga 2L Op
Timbare 4
Timbare 3
Agogo 2 Hi
Agogo 2 Low
Cabasa 2
Shaker 1
Whistle Shrt
Whistle Long
Guiro 2 Up
Guiro 2 Down
Claves 2
Wood Block2H
Wood Block2L
Cuica 2 Low
Cuica 2 Hi
Triangle Mt
Triangle Op
Cabasa2 Cut
DigiSpectrum
Wind Chime
Wood Block2M
Cajon 2
Yoh
iYooh
Yyoo Dude
Buk
Buk Rim
Changgo
Asian Gong 1
Asian Gong 2
Gamelan Gong
Asian Gong 3
Asian Gong 4
Asian Gong 6
Asian Gong 7
Ban Gu 1
Ban Gu 2
Ban Gu 3
Ban Gu 4
Gu Hi
ApitoHiShort
ApitoLoShort
Guiro Short2
Guiro Long2
Claves Lo 2
Berimbau Up
Berimbau Dn
Cuica Hi 1
Arriba!
Ole!
Uno!
Dos!
Chekere 1
Chekere 2
Chekere 3
Clave!
Tres!
Gu Roll
Quatro!
Grito-Hahaha
Grito-Ahaha!
Grito-Haahai
Grito-Rrrrr!
Tiquitito!
Grito-Oa Oa!
Grito-Eh Eh!
Ama ya ahi!
Fuego!
Hey Brazil
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
HuYinLuoH Mt
HuYinLuoH Op
HuYinLuoL Mt
HuYinLuoL Op
Nao Bo
Cuica Lo 2
Claves Lo 2
Conga Hi Mt
Conga Hi Op
Conga Link
Conga Lo Mt
Conga Roll
Conga Slap
Conga Thumb
CongaLoOp f
CongaLoOp mf
Cowbell 1
Cowbell 2
Cowbell 3
Cowbell Mt 1
Cowbell Mt 2
Cowbell Op 1
Cowbell Op 2
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Caixa Mute
Caixa Open2
Caixa Rim
82 Bb5 Narrow Hit 2
83 B5 Euro Hit 2
84 C6 Wind Chime
85 C#6 Timpani Roll
86 D6 Crotale
Caixa Roll2
Cajon Rol Hi
Cajon Rol Lo
Surdo Mute2
Surdo Open2
PandeiroL Hi
PandeiroL Lo
PandeiroOpen
PandeiroMute
PandeiroL Rm
PandeiroL Sp
Quijada
Rainstick
Metronome 2
R8 Click
Metronome 1
180:LatinPt2
160:CgMambo
132:TmblPtn1
132:AgogoPtn
104:Shakin'
---
Xiao Bo
Asian Gong 5
Shou Luo 1
Shou Luo 2
Shu Ban 1
Shu Ban 2
Shu Gu
87 D#6 R8 Click
ConcertBD
R&B Kick
Dry Kick 2
Old Kick
Jazz Doos
Agogo Noise
Rock OHH
JD Anklungs
Rock OHH
Cajon 3
ConcertBD
R&B Kick
Dry Kick 2
Old Kick
Jazz Doos
Agogo Noise
Rock OHH
JD Anklungs
Rock OHH
Cajon 3
ConcertBD
R&B Kick
Dry Kick 2
Old Kick
Jazz Doos
Agogo Noise
Rock OHH
JD Anklungs
Rock OHH
Cajon 3
88 E6 Metro Bell
89 F6 MC500 Beep 1
90 F#6 MC500 Beep 2
91 G6 Atmosphere
92 G#6 Agogo Noise
93 A6 Car Slip
94 Bb6 Group Snap
95 B6 Laser
96 C7 ConcertBD
97 C#7 AnalogKick 3
98 D7 Old Kick
99 D#7 Reg.Kick
100 E7 TR909 Snr 4b
101 F7 TR808 Snr 2
102 F# Vint Snr 4
103 G7 Light Snr
104 G#7 ---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Shu Gu Rim
Tang Gu Mt
Tang Gu Op
BaliCym Cls
BaliCym Opn
Ceng Ceng
Chenchen Cls
Chenchen Opn
Kopyak Mt
Kopyak Op
Finger Cym
Ramacymbal
Jaw Harp Opn
Jaw Harp Wow
---
Cajon 1
Mix Clap
Cajon 1
Cajon 1
TY Rim f
Mix Kick 4
Gospel Clap
Bright Clap
Rock Rd Cup
Cowbell
Gospel Clap
Bright Clap
Rock Rd Cup
Cowbell
Crash Cym 2
---
Gospel Clap
Bright Clap
Rock Rd Cup
Cowbell
Crash Cym 2
---
---
---
---
---
Crash Cym 2
---
105 A7 ---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
106 Bb7 ---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
107 B7 ---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
108 C8 ---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Drum Sets
PC 14 [CC32= 5]
India Menu
PC 11 [CC32= 5]
IndiaDrmKit
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
PC 12 [CC32= 5]
MidEastDrKit
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
PC 101 [CC32= 4] PC 102 [CC32= 4] PC 103 [CC32= 4] PC 65 [CC32= 4]
PC 66 [CC32= 4]
Or. Techno
House Kick
HipHop Kick
SimpleKick
909 Kick2
HipHopSnare2
Techno Snare
R&B Snare
R&B Clap
PC 117 [CC32= 1]
Oriental 1
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
IndoMix1
Elec Kick 2
Elec Kick 1
CR78 Kick 1
CR78 Kick 2
TR-606 Kick1
TR-707 Kick1
808 Kick
TR-808 Kick
808 BassDrum
TR-909 Kick
Dance Kick 2
909Comp Kick
TR-909 Kick2
HipHop Kick2
BassDrumSet
TechnoKick1
Dol4
Dance Snare1
GondangAlToba
Elec Snare 1
Dance Snare2
Elec Snare 2
MamboCowBell
CowBell
Claves
Woodblock1
Dol2
IndoMix2
IndoMix3
Pop Cymbal2
Pop Ride1
R&B Snare
R&B Clap
Techno Snare
House Snare
Jungle Snare
Ps Snare
909 Snare
909Snare2
909 Kick 3
House Kick
TR-808 Kick
909 Kick
Or. R&B
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
C–1 ---
C#–1 ---
D–1 ---
D#–1 ---
E–1 ---
F–1 ---
F#–1 ---
G–1 ---
G#–1 ---
A–1 ---
HipHop Kick1
Jazz Kick 1
Mex Kick
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Synth Drum 2
Synth Drum 2
St Snare2
Synth Drum 2
NewJzSn1
Synth Drum 2
RockSnare2_2
Synth Drum 2
Rm Kick 2
Snare Ghost1
Rm Snare 2
FingerSnaps2
Rm Snare 1
Room Tom 5
Room Tom 5
Room Tom 2
TR707 Hihat C
Room Tom 2
ConcertKick
HipHop Kick2
TR-909 Kick2
Side Stick
House Snare
909 HandClap
Elec Snare 2
808 Tom 2
TR-808HiHatC
808 Tom 2
House Kick
HipHop Kick
TR-808 Kick
909 Kick2
HipHopSnare2
Techno Snare
TR-808Snare2
R&B Clap
707 Claps
707 Claps
Tambourine
R&B OHHsh
R&B OHH
Wadaiko
Ohkawa
Shimedaiko
H kotsuzumi
L Kotsuzumi
Tabla_Ge
Tabla_Na
Tabla_Te
Tabla_Tun
Udo_Long
Djembe_rim
909 HandClap
Tambourine
Pop Hi Hat1
Pop Hi Hat2
Pop Hi Hat3
NewShaker2
NewShaker1
IPopSn40st
HipHop Snare
Jungle Snare
House Snare
808 BassDrum
909 Kick 3
SimpleKick
Side Stick
R&B Snare
HandClap1st
Hand Clap 21
909Snare2
R&B CHH
Pop Kick 36
R&B CHH
IPopCStk37st
R&B OHH
Tambourine
TR-909 OHHsh
TR-909 OHH
Wadaiko
10 Bb–1 ---
11 B–1 ---
12 C0 ---
13 C#0 ---
14 D0 ---
15 D#0 ---
16 E0 ---
17 F0 ---
18 F#0 ---
19 G0 ---
20 G#0 ---
21 A0 ---
22 Bb0 ---
23 B0 ---
24 C1 ---
25 C#1 ---
26 D1 ---
27 D#1 ---
28 E1 ---
29 F1 ---
30 F#1 ---
31 G1 ---
32 G#1 ---
33 A1 ---
Ohkawa
909 Kick2
Shimedaiko
H kotsuzumi
L Kotsuzumi
Tabla_Ge
Tabla_Na
Tabla_Te
TR-909 OHHsh
TR-909 OHH
Ah
Ha
ShutHa
ShutHi
One
Two
Three
Tabla_Tun
Udo_Long
Djembe_rim
909 HandClap
Tambourine
Pop Hi Hat1
Pop Hi Hat2
Pop Hi Hat3
NewShaker2
NewShaker1
IPopSn40st
HipHop Snare
Jungle Snare
House Snare
TechnoKick2
TR-909 Kick2
909 Kick
Four
SnareFlam
FingerSnaps2
High-Q
Dol3
GonTaput4
GonTaput5
GonTaput6
Sticks
Slap
Scrtch Push2
Scrtch Pull2
Synth Drum 2
Synth Drum 2
Synth Drum 2
Synth Drum 2
HipHop Kick
SimpleKick
Side Stick
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Congas_SW
Congas_SW2
Congas_SW4
808 BassDrum
TR-808 Kick
808 Rimshot
808 Snare 1
GdgTaputRim
TR-808Snare2
808 Tom 2
TR-808HiHatC
808 Tom 2
808 HiHat Cl
808 Tom 2
TR-808HiHatO
808 Tom 2
808 Tom 2
808 Crash
808 Tom 2
606 Ride Cym
ChinaCymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cym.
808 Cowbell
909 Crash
34 Bb1 ---
35 B1 ---
Dixie HH Hlf
Fat BD
Dixie HH Hlf
Maple Kick
Warm Kick
Cross Stick2
NaturlHardSN
Claps Real
NaturlRimSht
Studio Tom 4
Dixie HH Cls
Studio Tom 3
Dixie HH Pdl
Studio Tom 2
Dixie HH Opn
Studio Tom 2
Studio Tom 1
Crash Cymbal
Studio Tom 1
Rock RdCym1
Crash 1
Rek Dom
R8 Tamb
Rek Open
VDrm Cowbell
Rek Tek
VDrm Cowbell
Rek Trill
Afro Feet 1
Slit Drum
Afro Feet 2
Afro Clap
Bendir 1
Bendir 2
Dawul
Sagat Close
Sagat Open
VDrmCabasaUp
VDrm Maracas
VDrmCabasDwn
AfroDrum Flm
AfroDrum Op1
AfroDrum Op2
AfroDrum Rat
VDrm Woodblk
VDrm Woodblk
TalkingDr Dn
TalkingDr Up
Doholla Dom
Doholla Roll
Doholla Sak
Doholla Stop
Bass Drum
Bass Drum
Rim Shot
Snare Drum
Hand Clap 1
Hand Clap 2
Tom 1
Closed Hi-Hat
Tom 2
Closed Hi-Hat
Tom 3
Open Hi-Hat
Tom 4
Tom 5
Crash Cymbal
Tom 6
Ride Cymbal
Doholla1 Rim1
Doholla1 Dom
Finger Doff A
Doholla1 Rim2
Cowbell
Doholla 1 Sak
Dof 2 Dom
Dof 1 Rim 1
Dof 1 Dom
Dof 1 Sak 1
Dof 1 Rim 2
Dof 1 Sak 2
Tabla 1 Tak 1
Tabla 1 Tak 2
Tabla Roll
Tabla 1 Dom
Tabla FX
Tabla 1 Tak 3
Tabla 1 Sak
Tabla 1 Rim
Rek Trill
Rek 1 Sak
Rek 1 Tak 1
Rek 1 Rim
Rek 1 Dom
Rek 1 Tak 2
Rek 1 Brass
Rek 1 Tak 3
Rek 1 Roll
Rek 1 Khana Closed
Tabl Noueri Rim
Rek 1 Khana Open
36 C2 Bebarongan 1
37 C#2 Bebarongan 2
38 D2 Bebarongan 3
39 D#2 Pelegongan 1
40 E2 Pelegongan 2
41 F2 Pelegongan 3
42 F#2 Wadon 1
43 G2 Wadon 2
44 G#2 Wadon 3
45 A2 Wadon 4
46 Bb2 Wadon 5
47 B2 Wadon 6
48 C3 Wadon 7
49 C#3 Dhol 1
50 D3 Dhol 2
51 D#3 Dhol 3
52 E3 Dhol 4
53 F3 Dhol 5
54 F#3 Dholak 1
55 G3 Dholak 2
56 G#3 Dholak 3
57 A3 Dholak 4
58 Bb3 Dholak 5
59 B3 Dholak 6
60 C4 Dholak 7
61 C#4 Dholak 8
62 D4 Dholak 9
63 D#4 Dholak Ga
64 E4 Dholak Na
65 F4 Dholak Ta
66 F#4 Dholak Tun
67 G4 Madal Da
68 G#4 Madal Din
69 A4 Madal Ta
70 Bb4 TablaBaya 1
71 B4 TablaBaya 2
72 C5 TablaBaya 3
73 C#5 TablaBaya 4
74 D5 TablaBaya 5
75 D#5 TablaBaya 6
76 E5 TablaBaya 7
77 F5 TablaBaya 8
78 F#5 TablaBaya Ge
79 G5 TablaBaya Ka
80 G#5 TablaBaya Na
81 A5 TablaBaya Te
82 Bb5 TablaBaya Ti
83 B5 TablaBayaGin
Room Kick 2
Cross Stick2
Maple Lo Snr
Claps Real
MapleSoft SN
Studio Tom 4
Dixie HH Cls
Studio Tom 3
Dixie HH Pdl
Studio Tom 2
Dixie HH Opn
Studio Tom 2
Studio Tom 1
Crash Cymbal
Studio Tom 1
Rock RdCym1
Crash 1
TR-909 Rim
909 SD 1
St Snare2
707 Claps
St Snare1
HandClap1st
Hand Clap 21
TR-909Snare2
TR-707HiHatC
Pop Kick 36
TR-707HiHatC
909 Tom
909HiHat Opn
909 Tom
909 Tom
85St Tom16
HipHopCHH
85St Tom16
HipHopCHH
85St Tom12
HipHopOHH
85St Tom12
85St Tom10
85St CrsCym1
85St Tom10
85St RdCym
ChinaCymbal
85St RdBell
Tambourine
Splash Cym.
Cowbell
JazzClosedHH
808 Tom 2
JazzOpenHH
808 Tom 2
808 Tom 2
808 Crash
Bend tlk_drm
Tabla Ge Hi
Tabla_Tun
Tom 43
Tom 47
Pop Cymbal2
Tom 50
909 Crash
909 Tom
Pop Ride1
Pop Cymbal
Dholla Dom
Dholla Sak 1
Dholla Sak 2
Dholla Sak 3
Dholla Rim
Dholla Raka
Dholla Tak 1
Dholla Tak 2
DofDom 1
DofDom 2
DofDom 3
DofTak 1
DofTak 2
DofSak 1
DofRim 1
DofSak 2
DofRim 2
DofSak 3
909Ride Cymb
ChinaCymbal
Dholla Dom
Dholla Sak 1
Dholla Sak 2
Dholla Sak 3
Dholla Rim
Dholla Raka
Dholla Tak 1
Dholla Tak 2
DofDom 1
DofDom 2
DofDom 3
DofTak 1
DofTak 2
DofSak 1
DofRim 1
DofSak 2
DofRim 2
DofSak 3
Dhol 2
Tabla_Na
R8 Tamb
Dholak 1
VDrm Cowbell
Dholak 8
VDrm Cowbell
Dholak 9
TablaBaya 1
TablaBayaSld
TablaBaya 3
TablaBaya 6
TablaBaya 5
TablaBaya Na
TablaBayaTin
TablaBayaTun
TablaBaya 8
VDrmCabasaUp
VDrm Maracas
VDrmCabasDwn
Madal Da
Madal Din
Madal Ta
VDrm Claves
VDrm Woodblk
VDrm Woodblk
FingerSnaps4
Udu Pot1 Acc
Udu Pot1 Hi
Udu Pot1 Lo
Udu Pot1 Slp
Udu Pot2 Lng
Tambourine
Bongo2_SW2
808 Cowbell
909 Crash
Crash Cymb2
Vibraslap
Vibraslap
Pop Kick 36
PopSnare38 1
Bongo High
CR78 LoBongo
808 Conga
NewCongaOp
NewLoConga
High Timbale
Bongo_SW_P1
Bongo_SW_P2
Bongo_SW_P3
Bongo_SW_P4
808 Maracas
Gamelan Gong
LongWhistle
Quide1
Ride Cymbal
CR78 HiBongo
CR78 LoBongo
808 Conga
808 Conga
808 Conga
Timbal Hi
Timbal Lo
Agogo
Agogo
Cabasa
808 Maracas
GongToba1
GongToba2
Short Guiro
CR78 Guiro
808 Clave
Woodblock
Woodblock
---
Ride Cymbal
NewHighBongo
NewLowBongo
NewCongaSlap
NewCongaOpen
NewLowConga
High Timbale
Low Timbale
Agogo
Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
Bongo1_SW1
Bongo1_SW3
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
Woodblock
Woodblock
CR78 HiBongo
CR78 LoBongo
DofFinger 1
DofFinger 2
Tabla Raka 1
Tabla Tak 1
Tabla Tik 1
Tabla Dom
Tabla Sak
DofFinger 1
DofFinger 2
Tabla Raka 1
Tabla Tak 1
Tabla Tik 1
Tabla Dom
Tabla Sak
Quide2
Claves
Woodblock
Bongo1_SW3
Mute Cuica
Congas_8_P1
Tabla Roll
Tabla Roll
---
Tabla Tak 2
Tabla Raka 2
Tabla Rim 1
Tabla Toks
Tabla Rim 2
Tabla Tak 2
Tabla Raka 2
Tabla Rim 1
Tabla Toks
Tabla Rim 2
MuteTriangl
OpenTriangl
Castanets
CongaLoOpen_P1 MuteTriangl
CongaLoOpen_P2 OpenTriangl
CongaLoOpen_P3 Shaker
Mute Surdo
CongaLoOpen_P4 CowBellSide
134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
r
Drum Sets
PC 14 [CC32= 5]
India Menu
PC 11 [CC32= 5]
IndiaDrmKit
PC 12 [CC32= 5]
MidEastDrKit
PC 101 [CC32= 4] PC 102 [CC32= 4] PC 103 [CC32= 4] PC 65 [CC32= 4]
PC 66 [CC32= 4]
Or. Techno
PC 117 [CC32= 1]
Oriental 1
IndoMix1
IndoMix2
IndoMix3
Or. R&B
84 C6 TablaBayaSld
85 C#6 TablaBayaTin
86 D6 TablaBayaTun
87 D#6 Udu Pot1 Acc
88 E6 Udu Pot1 Hi
89 F6 Udu Pot1 Lo
90 F#6 Udu Pot1 Slp
91 G6 Udu Pot2 Lng
92 G#6 Udu Pot2 Mut
93 A6 Udu Pot2 Sht
94 Bb6 ---
95 B6 ---
96 C7 ---
97 C#7 ---
98 D7 ---
99 D#7 ---
100 E7 ---
101 F7 ---
102 F# ---
103 G7 ---
104 G#7 ---
105 A7 ---
106 Bb7 ---
107 B7 ---
108 C8 ---
109 C#8 ---
110 D8 ---
111 D#8 ---
112 E8 ---
113 F8 ---
114 F#8 ---
115 G8 ---
116 G#8 ---
117 A8 ---
118 Bb8 ---
Udu Pot2 Mut
Udu Pot2 Sht
Udu Pot MENU
118:TablaByP
TablaBY 3
Tablah 1
Tablah 2
Tablah 3
Tablah 4
TablaBY 1
TablaBY 2
Tablah Bend
Metronome 2
R8 Click
Metronome 1
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Doholla Tak
Doira Dun
Doira Tik
Sarna Bell
Sitar Gliss
ZaghrutaStop
Yoh Tribe
How Tribe
92:DholakPh
120:Dhol Ph
African Ens
Morocco Ens
Metronome 2
R8 Click
Metronome 1
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Open Surdo
Small Club
CR78 Tambour
Side Stick
GospelHClp1
TR-808Snare2
909 Snare 1
909 Snare 2
909 SD 1
CongaLoOpen_P5 AfricanCowBell
Tabla Tik 2
Rek Raka
Rek Dom
Rek Trill
Rek Tak 1
Rek Rim
Rek Brass 1
Rek Tok
Rek Brass 2
Rek Tak 2
Rek Sak
Tabla Tik 2
Rek Raka
Rek Dom
Rek Trill
Rek Tak 1
Rek Rim
Rek Brass 1
Rek Tok
Rek Brass 2
Rek Tak 2
Rek Sak
Sagat Mid
Tabl Noueri Dom 1
Sagat High
Tabl Noueri Tak 1
Sagat Sak
Hager
Zir
Nakrazan A
Zaghrouta 1 Loop
Nakrazan B
Zaghrouta 2 End
Zaghrouta 2 Loop
Zaghrouta 2 End
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Castanets
Castanets
Bongo High
Bongo Low
Mute H.Conga
Conga Hi Opn
Conga MtLow
Conga Slap
NewShekere1
NewShekere2
NHBngoMute
L BongoMute
CajonHi
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Udo_Long
808 Tom 2
808 Tom 2
808 Tom 2
808 Tom 2
808 Tom 2
808 Tom 2
808 Cowbell
808 Conga
808 Conga
808 Conga
Bend Gong
FlmncoHClp1
FlmncoHClp1
BongoCowBell
Bend tlk_drm
MamboCowBell
Tabla_Ge
Tabla Ge Hi
Talking Drum
Bend tlk_drm
Udo_Short
Udo_Long
TR-909Snare2
Rap Snare
JungleSnare1
House Snare
House Snare
House Snare
Congas_SW
Congas_SW2
Congas_SW4
MamboCowBell
Tabla Dhut
BongoCowBell
Tabla_Ge
Tabla Ge Hi
Talking Drum
Bend tlk_drm
Udo_Short
Udo_Long
Udo_slap
Rek Tik
Rek Tik
Mazhar Dom
Mazhar Tak
Mazhar Sak
Mazhar Brass
Sagat Mid
Sagat Hi
Sagat Closed
Sagat Sak
Dofs Tak
Mazhar Dom
Mazhar Tak
Mazhar Sak
Mazhar Brass
Sagat Mid
Sagat Hi
Sagat Closed
Sagat Sak
Dofs Tak
CajonHiFlm
Cajon Low
CajonLoFlm
FlmncoHClap1
FlmncoHClap1
BongoCowBell
PopSnareFl
MamboCowBell
PopSnareDrag
HiHatPhrase3
CrashPhrase1
CrashPhrase2
CrashPhrase3
CrashPhrase4
CrashPhrase5
Crash_Stop
RidePhrase1
RidePhrase2
RidePhrase3
Scrtch Push2
Scrtch Pull2
Small Club
Dofs Dom
Dofs Sak
Dofs Dom
Dofs Sak
Dofs Rim 1
Dofs Rim 2
Dofs Dom st.
TablaNurDom
Dofs Sak st.
TablaNurRim
TablaNurTak
TablaNurSak
BassSlideFX
BassSlapFX
ZaghroutaSm2
Zir 1
ZaghroutaEd2
NewHiBongo
NewLoBongo
NewCongaSlp
NewCongaOp
NewLoConga
Timbal Hi
Dofs Rim 1
Dofs Rim 2
Dofs Dom st.
TablaNurDom
Dofs Sak st.
TablaNurRim
TablaNurTak
TablaNurSak
BassSlideFX
BassSlapFX
ZaghroutaSm2
Zir 1
ZaghroutaEd2
NewHiBongo
NewLoBongo
NewCongaSlp
NewCongaOp
NewLoConga
Timbal Hi
Udo_slap
Tabla_Te
Tabla_Na
Tabla_Tun
Tabla_Te
Tabla_Na
Tabla_Tun
Ohkawa
Ohkawa
H kotsuzumi
L Kotsuzumi
Tabla Tong
Tabla Tak
Tabla Tung
Tabla_Tang
Tabla_Dung
Harmess-bell1
Harmess-bell2
Harmess-bell3
CembaloEnding
CembaloFree
H kotsuzumi
L Kotsuzumi
Open Surdo
Mute Surdo
Conga Lo Opn
Tabla_Tun
119 B8 ---
120 C9 ---
121 C#9 ---
122 D9 ---
123 D#9 ---
124 E9 ---
125 F9 ---
126 F#9 ---
Explosion
Wind
Thunder
Helicopter
Tabla_Tun
Applause
Screaming
Laughing
GtFretNoise
Wind Chimes
Harmess-bell1
Harmess-bell2
Harmess-bell3
CembaloEnding
CembaloFree
Timbal Lo
Hager 1
Timbal Lo
Hager 1
127 G9 ---
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Drum Sets
PC 117 [CC32= 2]
Oriental 2
PC 117 [CC32= 3]
Oriental 3
PC 117 [CC32= 4] PC 118 [CC32= 4] PC 119 [CC32= 4] PC 57 [CC32= 4]
Oriental4
Greek 1
Greek 2
SFX
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
C–1 ---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
HipHop BD2
Rek 2 Rim 2
Rek Dom 1
Rek 2 Tak 1
Rek 2 Tak 2C
Rek 2 Sak 1
Tabla_Ge
Timpani
Timpani
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
C#–1 ---
D–1 ---
D#–1 ---
E–1 ---
F–1 ---
F#–1 ---
G–1 ---
G#–1 ---
A–1 ---
Snare Roll
Concert Snr
Concert BD
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Tabla_Na
Tabla_Te
Bar Chimes
Wadaiko
Tabla_Tun
Djembe_rim
IPopKik35
IPopKik36
IPopCStk37st
IPopSn38_1
IPopGstS39_1
IPopSn40st
PopFlrTmFl
IPopHat1_42
IPopTomL43
IPopHat2_44
RockTom2Fl
IPopHat3_46
IPopTomM47
RockTom1Fl
IPopCyml2_52
IPopTomH50
IPopRd1_51
IPopCym1_49
PopRideBl
Tambourine
Splash Cym.
ChaChaCBell
NewRkCrCym2
626 Shaker
NewRkRdCym1
TR-909 BD2
Side Stick
Small Gong
Gamelan Gong
Udo_Long
82JzBsDrum2
Side Stick
82JzSnare1
Hand clap2
82JzSnare2
Real Tom 6
82JzClsHatB
Real Tom 6
Pedal HiHat
Real Tom 4
82JzOpenHatB
Real Tom 4
---
Crash1c B
Real Tom 4
Ride_i B
ChinaCymbal
Ridbl_c B
Tambourine
Splash Cym.
Cowbell
10 Bb–1 ---
11 B–1 ---
12 C0 ---
13 C#0 ---
14 D0 ---
15 D#0 ---
16 E0 ---
17 F0 ---
18 F#0 ---
19 G0 ---
20 G#0 ---
21 A0 ---
22 Bb0 ---
23 B0 ---
24 C1 ---
25 C#1 ---
26 D1 ---
27 D#1 ---
28 E1 ---
29 F1 ---
30 F#1 ---
31 G1 ---
32 G#1 ---
33 A1 ---
Wadaiko
Ohkawa
Shimedaiko
H kotsuzumi
L Kotsuzumi
Tabla_Ge
Tabla_Na
Tabla_Te
Tabla_Tun
Udo_Long
Djembe_rim
909 HandClap
Tambourine
ChaChaCowb
Agogo
---
---
---
---
---
MC-500 Beep
MC-500 Beep
ytwn3.xtp
ytwn2.xtp
Guitar Slap
Chord Stroke
Chord Stroke
Biwa 3
Phono Noise
TapeRewind
Scrtch Push2
Scrtch Pull2
GtCutNoise2
GtCutNoise2
Dist.CutNoiz
Dist.CutNoiz
Bass Slide
Pick Scrape
High-Q
Slap
Agogo
NewShaker2
NewShaker1
PopSnare40 1
Elec Snare 2
909 Snare 2
909 Snare 1
Elec Kick 2
TR-909 Kick2
Std.2 Kick1
Pop Stick1
PopSnare38 1
HandClap1st
Hand Clap 21
TR-707 Snare
JazzClosedHH
Real Tom 6
Pedal HiHat
Real Tom 4
JazzOpenHH
Real Tom 4
Tom 43
---
---
---
Crash Cym.2
Vibraslap
34 Bb1 ---
35 B1 Bass Drum
36 C2 Bass Drum
37 C#2 Rim Shot
38 D2 Snare Drum
39 D#2 Hand Clap 1
40 E2 Hand Clap 2
41 F2 Tom 1
42 F#2 Closed Hi-Hat
43 G2 Tom 2
44 G#2 Closed Hi-Hat
45 A2 Tom 3
46 Bb2 Open Hi-Hat
47 B2 Tom 4
48 C3 Tom 5
49 C#3 Crash Cymbal
50 D3 Tom 6
51 D#3 Ride Cymbal
52 E3 Doholla 2 Rim 1
53 F3 Doholla 2 Dom
54 F#3 Hager
TR-707 Kick1
TR-707 Kick1
TR-707 Rim
TR-707 Snare
Hand Clap 2
TR-707 Snare
Tom
TR-707HiHatC
Tom
TR-707HiHatC
Tom
TR-707HiHatO
Tom
Tom
TR-707 Crash
Tom
Ride Cymbal
Dholla2 Dom2
Dholla 2 Sak
Tambourine
Dholla2 Rim1
Cowbell
Dholla2 RimC
Cabasa
Doff 2 Dom 2
Doff2 Sak 1B
Low Bongo
Doff 2 Sak 2
High Bongo
Doff 2 Rim 3
Tabla1 Dom 2
Tabla Roll
Tabla 2 Sak
Tabla Fx
Tabla2 Tak1D
Tabla 2 Tik
Tabla2 Rim 2
Rek 2 Dom 1B
Rek 2 Rim 2
Rek Dom 1
Rek 2 Tak 1
Rek 2 Tak 2C
Rek 2 Sak 1
Hager 2
Rek2Khan Cl2
Zir 2
RideCym Edge
TR-909 BD2
808 Rimshot
Rap Snare
HandClap
House SD
909 HandClap
Elec Snare 2
Real Tom 6
TR-707 HH-c
Real Tom 6
CR-78 chh
Real Tom 4
909 OH
Real Tom 4
---
House SD
RkFlrTomFl
Room Chh
RkFloorTom
Pedal HiHat
RockTom2Fl
R8 Ohh2
RockTom2
RockTom1Fl
909 Crash
RockTom1
Ride Cymbal
ReverseCymbl
Dholla Dom
Dholla Sak 1
Dholla Sak 2
Dholla Sak 3
Dholla Rim
Dholla Raka
Dholla Tak 1
Dholla Tak 2
DofDom 1
DofDom 2
DofDom 3
DofTak 1
DofTak 2
DofSak 1
DofRim 1
DofSak 2
DofRim 2
DofSak 3
DofFinger 1
DofFinger 2
NewClaves
NewShaker2
NewShaker1
Tabla1 Tak 1
Tabla1 Dom 1
Tabla Roll
Tabla1 Tak 2
Tabla Fx
Tabla1 Tak 3
Tabla 1 Sak
Tabla 1 Rim
ScratchPush
ScratchPull
Sticks
SquareClick
Mtrnm.Click
Mtrnm. Bell
GtFretNoise
GtCutNoise
GtCutNoise
String Slap
Fl.KeyClick
Laughing
Screaming
Punch
Heart Beat
Footsteps
Footsteps
Applause
Creaking
Door
Scratch
Wind Chimes
Car-Engine
Car-Stop
Car-Pass
Car-Crash
Siren
Crash Cymb1
Tom 47
---
Real Tom 1
ReverseCymbl
Dholla2 Dom2
Dholla 2 Sak
808clave
RockRideCym1
Pop Ride2
Dholla Dom
Dholla Sak 1
Dholla Sak 2
Dholla Sak 3
Dholla Rim
Dholla Raka
Dholla Tak 1
Dholla Tak 2
DofDom 1
DofDom 2
DofDom 3
DofTak 1
55 G3 Doholla 2 Rim 2
56 G#3 Cowbell
57 A3 Doholla 2 Sak
58 Bb3 Zir
Dholla2 Rim1
Rek 2 Roll
Dholla2 RimC
Rek 2 Sak 1
Doff 2 Dom 2
Doff2 Sak 1B
Tabla Raka 1
Tabla Tak 1
Tabla Tik 1
Tabla Dom
Tabla Sak
59 B3 Dof 2 Rim 1
60 C4 Dof 2 Dom
61 C#4 Dof 2 Sak 1
62 D4 Dof 2 Rim 2
63 D#4 Dof 2 Sak 2
64 E4 Tabla 2 Tak 1
65 F4 Tabla 2 Tak 2
66 F#4 Tabla Roll
67 G4 Tabla 2 Dom
68 G#4 Tabla FX
69 A4 Tabla 2 Tak 3
70 Bb4 Tabla 2 Sak
71 B4 Tabla 2 Rim
72 C5 Rek Trill
73 C#5 Rek 2 Sak
74 D5 Rek 2 Dom Closed
75 D#5 Rek 2 Rim
76 E5 Rek 2 Dom Open
77 F5 Rek 2 Tak 1
78 F#5 Rek 2 Khana Open
79 G5 Rek 2 Tak 2
80 G#5 Rek 2 Roll
81 A5 Rek 2 Khana Closed
82 Bb5 Tabl Noueri Rim
83 B5 Rek 2 Tak 3
DofTak 2
DofSak 1
DofRim 1
DofSak 2
DofRim 2
DofSak 3
DofFinger 1
DofFinger 2
Tabla Raka 1
Tabla Tak 1
Tabla Tik 1
Tabla Dom
Tabla Sak
Tabla Roll
Tabla Tak 2
Tabla Raka 2
Tabla Rim 1
Tabla Toks
Tabla Rim 2
Tabla Roll
Tabla Tak 2
Tabla Raka 2
Tabla Rim 1
Tabla Toks
Tabla Rim 2
Tabla Tik 2
Rek Raka
Rek Dom
Rek Trill
Rek Tak 1
Rek Rim
Rek Brass 1
Rek Tok
Rek Brass 2
Rek Tak 2
Rek Sak
Rek Tik
Train
Jetplane
Helicopter
Starship
Gun Shot
Machine Gun
Lasergun
Explosion
Dog
HorseGallop
Bird
Rain
Thunder
Wind
Seashore
Stream
Rek2Khan Op2
Rek 2 Roll
Rek 2 Sak 1
136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
r
Drum Sets
PC 117 [CC32= 2]
Oriental 2
PC 117 [CC32= 3]
Oriental 3
PC 117 [CC32= 4] PC 118 [CC32= 4] PC 119 [CC32= 4] PC 57 [CC32= 4]
Oriental4
Greek 1
Greek 2
SFX
84 C6 Sagat Mid
Tabla Tik 2
Rek Raka
Rek Dom
Rek Trill
Rek Tak 1
Rek Rim
Rek Brass 1
Rek Tok
Rek Brass 2
Rek Tak 2
Rek Sak
Sagat Mid
Sagat Hi
Sagat Sak
Jingle Bell L
ZaghroutaSm3
ZaghroutaEd3
TablaNurDom3
Nakrazhan 1
TablaNurRim2
Nakrazhan 2
TablaNurTak3
TR-707 Kick1
Mazhar Dom
Mazhar Tak
Mazhar Sak
Mazhar Brass
Sagat Mid
Sagat Hi
Sagat Closed
Sagat Sak
Dofs Tak
Rek Trill
Bubble
Kitty
Bird 2
Growl
Applause 2
Telephone 1
Telephone 2
Small Club
Small Club 2
ApplauseWave
Eruption
Big Shot
Perc. Bang
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
85 C#6 Tabl Noueri Dom 2
86 D6 Sagat High
87 D#6 Tabl Noueri Tak 2
88 E6 Sagat Sak
89 F6 Bongos Dom
90 F#6 Nakrazan A
91 G6 Bongos Tak
92 G#6 Zaghrouta 1 Loop
93 A6 Bongos Rim
94 Bb6 Zaghrouta 1 End
95 B6 Zaghrouta 2 Loop
96 C7 Zaghrouta 2 End
97 C#7 ---
98 D7 ---
99 D#7 ---
100 E7 ---
101 F7 ---
102 F# ---
103 G7 ---
104 G#7 ---
105 A7 ---
106 Bb7 ---
107 B7 ---
108 C8 ---
109 C#8 ---
110 D8 ---
111 D#8 ---
112 E8 ---
113 F8 ---
114 F#8 ---
115 G8 ---
116 G#8 ---
117 A8 ---
118 Bb8 ---
119 B8 ---
120 C9 ---
121 C#9 ---
Rek 1 Sak
L Rek Tak 1
Rek 1 Rim
L Rek Dom
L Rek Tak 2
Rek 1 Brass
L Rek Tak 3
Rek 1 Roll
Rek 1 Khan A
TablaNurRim1
Rek 1 Khan B
Sagat Mid
TablaNurDom1
Sagat Hi
TablaNurTak1
Sagat Sak
Hager 1
Dofs Dom
Dofs Sak
Rek Tik
Dofs Rim 1
Dofs Rim 2
Dofs Dom st.
TablaNurDom
Dofs Sak st.
TablaNurRim
TablaNurTak
TablaNurSak
DoubleSlide
Bass Slide1
ZaghroutaSm2
Zir 1
ZaghroutaEd2
NewHiBongo
NewLoBongo
NewCongaSlp
NewCongaOp
NewLoConga
NewTmblHi
NewTmblLo
Hager 1
Mazhar Dom
Mazhar Tak
Mazhar Sak
Mazhar Brass
Sagat Mid
Sagat Hi
Sagat Closed
Sagat Sak
Dofs Tak
Hand Clap 1
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Zir 1
Nakrazhan 1
ZaghroutaSm1
Nakrazhan 2
ZaghroutaEd1
ZaghroutaSm2
ZaghroutaEd2
TR-707 BD
TR-909 BD2
Mix Kick
82RmBsDrum1
82StSnare1
82JzSnare1
House SD
Rev.Snare
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Dofs Dom
Dofs Sak
Dofs Rim 1
Dofs Rim 2
Dofs Dom st.
TablaNurDom
Dofs Sak st.
TablaNurRim
TablaNurTak
TablaNurSak
BassSlideFX
BassSlapFX
ZaghroutaSm2
Zir 1
ZaghroutaEd2
NewHiBongo
NewLoBongo
NewCongaSlp
NewCongaOp
NewLoConga
Timbal Hi
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Bongo High
Bongo Lo
Mute H.Conga
Conga Hi Opn
Conga Lo Opn
High Timbale
Low Timbale
Agogo
122 D9 ---
123 D#9 ---
124 E9 ---
125 F9 ---
126 F#9 ---
127 G9 ---
---
---
---
Timbal Lo
Hager 1
---
---
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Specifications
21. Specifications
Display type
Display
Graphic LCD, 160 x 160 dots, backlit
61 velocity sensitive keys
Keyboard
Keyboard
Sound Source
Max. Polyphony
Sounds
128 voices (GM2/GS/XG Lite compatible)
1,172 tones
60 Drum Sets
Multitimbral parts
Master Tuning
3 keyboard parts (UP1, UP2, LWR) + 16 song parts
415.3~466.2 Hz
Key Control (Transpose)
Tempo change
–6~+5 in semitones (for audio/MIDI data)
20~250 BPM for SMF and rhythms
75~125% for mp3 and WAV files
Part mute functions
Effects
TRACK MUTE: Rhythms, SMF
CENTER CANCEL: mp3, WAV, AUDIO INPUT signals
keyboard parts (UP1, UP2, LWR)
Rhythms/SMF section
Reverb: 8 types (selectable via Makeup Tools)
Chorus: 8 types (selectable via Makeup Tools)
MFX: 84 types for keyboard parts (selectable via Tone Part MFX)
A & B for rhythm and SMF section (selectable via Makeup Tools)
Parametric EQ: 6 presets + 1 User memory
Multi-band compressor: 6 presets + 1 User memory
Rhythm section
Rhythms
305 in 6 “Rhythm” families (localized rhythms for specific areas are included in the
WORLD 1 and WORLD 2 families)
Rhythm Composer
Internal Rhythm Composer, SMF-to-Rhythm Converter provided as PC application (Win-
dows) on the bundled CD-ROM
One Touch memories
Rhythm Makeup Tools
Songs
4 programmable registrations per rhythm
Instrument-oriented editing
Real-time player
SMF (Format 0/1), KAR, mp3, WAV, mp3+CDG
Automatic chord detection for SMF files
Instrument-oriented editing
Song chord extractor
SMF Makeup Tools
Performance Memories
Performance Lists
Unlimited number (storage on USB memory)
Over 500 “Music Assistant” memories (internal memory)
5 “Factory Song” memories (internal memory)
Performance memories per List
Max. 999
Search function
Demo
Quick location of SMF, audio and JPG files on the connected USB memory
Demo
Yes
138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
r
Specifications
Recording
Media
USB Flash memory
Save format
Video
Audio files: WAV (44.1 kHz, 16-bit linear)
Lyrics
SMF, mp3/WAV, mp3+CDG
Slide shows
Panel controls
Knob
Picture folder linked to songs (recommended resolution: 512 x 384 or 1024 x 768 pixels)
VOLUME
Data dial
Rotary encoder
Connectors
PHONES jack x2
AUDIO INPUT jack
Stereo 1/4” phone type
Stereo miniature phone type
AUDIO OUTPUT jacks (L/Mono, R/Mono) 1/4” phone type
USB ports
USB COMPUTER connector (Type A, reception and transmission of MIDI data)
USB MEMORY (Type B, data storage devices)
MIDI IN, MIDI OUT (Visual Control function)
RCA-type (CVBS, PAL or NTSC – selectable)
HOLD, SWITCH/EXPRESSION (programmable)
MIDI connectors
VIDEO OUTPUT jack
Foot pedal jacks
General specifications
Speakers
2x 10 cm
Rated power output
Power supply
2x 12 W RMW
AC adaptor (PSB-7U adaptor)
1100mA
Power consumption
Auto Off function
Dimensions
Off, 10min, 30min, 240min
Without music rest:
1044 (W) x 317 (D) x 129 (H) mm
41-1/8 (W) x 12-1/2 (D) x 5-1/8 (H) inches
Including music rest:
1044 (W) x 317 (D) x 301 (H) mm
41-1/8 (W) x 12-1/2 (D) x 11-7/8 (H) inches
Weight
7.5 kg (excluding AC adaptor and music rest)
16 lbs 9 oz (excluding AC adaptor and music rest)
Supplied Accessories
Owner’s Manual, PSB-7U AC adaptor, Power cord (for connecting the AC adaptor), Music
rest, CD-ROM (Style Converter 4.0, USB driver)
Options
USB
USB flash memory (M-UF-series)
Pedals
DP-series/BOSS FS-5U foot switch
Roland EV-series expression pedal
Note: In the interest of product improvement, the specifications and/or appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior notice.
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Specifications
Style Converter 4 system requirements
Operating system
Microsoft® Windows® XP
Microsoft® Windows® Vista®
* This does not work with the 64-bit edition of Windows Vista®
Microsoft® Windows® 7
CPU/clock
Pentium® Celeron® processor
1 GHz or higher
RAM
512 MB or more
2 MB or more
Hard disk
Display/colors
800 x 600 or higher /
65,536 colors (16-bit High Color) or more
Others
CD-ROM drive
140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
r
MIDI Implementation Chart
22. MIDI Implementation Chart
[Backing Keyboard]
Date: November 2011
Version: 1.00
Model: BK-5
Function...
Transmitted
Recognized
Remarks
Basic
Default
1~16
1~16
Channel
Changed
1~16, Off
1~16, Off
Default
Mode 3
Mode 3
Mode
Message
Altered
Mode 3, 4 (M=1)
*****
Mode 3, 4 (M=1)
*2
Note
Number
0~127
*****
0~127
0~127
True Voice
Note ON
Note OFF
O
X
O
X
Velocity
After
Touch
Key’s
Ch’s
O
O
O
O
*1
*1
Pitch Bend
O
*1
O
*1
0,32
1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*1
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*1
*1
Bank Select
Modulation
Portamento Time
Data Entry
Volume
Panpot
Expression
C1
Hold 1
Portamento
Sostenuto
Soft
Hold 2
Resonance
Realease Time
Attack Time
Cutoff
Decay Time
Vibrato Rate
Vibrato Depth
Vibrato Delay
Portamento Control
Effect 1 Depth
Effect 3 Depth
NRPN LSB, MSB
RPN LSB, MSB
5
6, 38
7
10
11
16
64
65
66
67
69
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
Control
Change
O
O
O
O
O
O
78
84
91
93
*1
*1
*1
*1
O (Reverb)
O (Chorus)
O
O
*1
*1
*1
*1
98, 99
100, 101
Program
Change
O
*****
*1
O
0~127
*1
Program Number 1~128
True #
System Exclusive
O
*1
*1
O
*1
Song Position Pointer
Song Sel
Tune
O
X
X
O
X
X
System
Common
System
Real Time
Clock
Commands
O
O
*1
*1
O
O
All Sounds Off
X
X
O
X
O
X
O (120, 126, 127)
O (121)
O (Song parts)
O (123-125)
O
X
Reset All Controllers
Local On/Off
All Notes Off
Active Sensing
Reset
Aux
Messages
*1
*1 O X is selectable
*2 Recognized as M= 1 even if M≠ 1
Notes
Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY
Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO
Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO
O:Yes
X: No
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Chord Intelligence
23. Chord Intelligence
C
C#
D
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
F
CM7
C#M7
DM7
M7
EM7
FM7
C7
C#7
D7
7
E7
F7
Cm
C#m
Dm
m
Em
Fm
Cm7
C#m7
Dm7
m7
Em7
Fm7
CmM7
Cdim
Cm7 ( 5 )
Caug
Csus4
C7sus4
C7/13
C#mM7
C#dim
C#m7 ( 5 )
C#aug
C#sus4
C#7sus4
C#7/13
DmM7
Ddim
Dm7 ( 5 )
Daug
Dsus4
D7sus4
D7/13
mM7
dim
EmM7
Edim
Em7 ( 5 )
Eaug
Esus4
E7sus4
E7/13
FmM7
Fdim
Fm7 ( 5 )
Faug
Fsus4
F7sus4
F7/13
m7 ( 5 )
aug
sus4
7sus4
7/13
142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
r
Chord Intelligence
F#
G
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
F#M7
GM7
M7
AM7
M7
BM7
B7
F#7
G7
7
A7
7
F#m
Gm
m
Am
m
Bm
F#m7
Gm7
m7
Am7
m7
Bm7
BmM7
Bdim
F#mM7
F#dim
F#m7 ( 5 )
F#aug
F#sus4
F#7sus4
F#7/13
GmM7
Gdim
Gm7 ( 5 )
Gaug
Gsus4
G7sus4
G7/13
mM7
dim
AmM7
Adim
Am7 ( 5 )
Aaug
Asus4
A7sus4
A7/13
mM7
dim
m7 ( 5 )
m7 ( 5 )
Bm7 ( 5 )
aug
aug
Baug
sus4
7sus4
7/13
sus4
7sus4
7/13
Bsus4
B7sus4
B7/13
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Index
Index
Drum Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Numerics
2nd bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
2nd Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
7th . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
CC32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Change
A
Gate Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Character set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Chord recognition . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Coarse Tune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Common. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Connecting
Control Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Create
Accompaniment . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Alteration
Song Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Chord Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Aspect Ratio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Audio
REC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Audio In
MFX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61, 78
Erase
Expression. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
External Lyrics. . . . . . . . . . . .55, 56
Center Canc . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
AudioXfade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Auto
Event. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Cut Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 76
F
Fill In. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Data
B
Data Change. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Degree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96, 100
Delete
Brightness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Division. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Bender Assign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Blocking settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
BPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 35
Break Mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
FUp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
144
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G
Get It . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Global . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Change. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
LWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Lyrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Lyrics Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Performances . . . . . . . . . . 112
Recordings . . . . . . . . .53, 112
Rhythms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Songs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
H
Hard Comp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Headphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Highlight Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
One Touch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Performance . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Hold Pedal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Note-to-Arranger. . . . . . . . . . . 108
NTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
NTSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Numeric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Makeup Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Basic Channel. . . . . . . . . . 107
Synchronization. . . . . . . . 106
Visual Control. . . . . . . . . . 113
MIDI Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Minus One . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Original. . . . . . . . . . . . . .69, 74, 75
I
Initialize
Factory settings. . . . . . . . .111
Insert
Instr Equalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Intell Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Intelligent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Internal Lyrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Pan Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Expression. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Photos
J
Jazz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
JPEG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
JPG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
K
Key Touch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
KEYBOARD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Keyboard part . . . . . . . . 24, 56, 61
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Modulation Assign. . . . . . . . . . . 59
Mono . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
L
Language. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Pianist1/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Index
Pictures
Rx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104, 107
Sysex. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Transpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Velocity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Storing, see Save
Style, see Rhythm
Melody Intelligence . . . . . .64
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Pitch Bend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Portamento . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Preset
Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Equalizer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Protecting settings . . . . . . . . . . 54
Audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Q
Quantize
Tap Tempo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31, 35
Makeup Tools . . . . . . . . . . .75
Rhythm Composer. . . . . . . 88
Quick Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
R
Rate
MIDI Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Scale Tune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Second Tone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Shift
SysEx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Audio Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Audio Sync. . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Rec Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 83
Record
Relative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Replace
RESOLUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Resonance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 77
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Short
SMF
Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Start/Stop Tx. . . . . . . . . . . 106
Comp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Song
Parts (MIDI). . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Position Pointer . . . . . . . . 106
Searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Sostenuto. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
U
Undo Changes . . . . . . . . . . .75, 79
UP1, UP2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Upper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
146
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
r
MIDI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
User . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 71, 72, 110
Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 70
V
Rhythms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
VIMA TUNES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Visual Control
Visual Ctrl Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
V-Link, Visual Control . . . . . . . .113
Instrument. . . . . . . 56, 61, 76
Makeup Tools. . . . . . . . . . . .75
Metronome . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
W
Wait Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Rhythm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Song. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72, 73
Z
Zone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
Index
148
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
r
When you need repair service, call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor in your
country as shown below.
Information
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Backing Keyboard BK-5
MEMO
150
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For EU countries
For China
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
r
602.00.0527.01 RES 873-11 BK-5 – OM/E
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|